d** < ^ 



























“ siia , ,j,v 






o5 ^ 



''IW—^P "V ^ ✓» 

,,.' 0^ -^o '* 

,<D'^ , '^Q 


<r V 

\V 

,^v 




^ 0 , V ,G^ 

^ 0'^^ .‘j;.: ' 


» 0 S 


'c 



■ft 


V' 


^ 'V “ Z V ‘^> 

d _ A> J> 

,0 O 

ri«* 





S ^ O n X. \G)' 

' « ^ O’^ c 

O ■» ^ 4 ^: 5 ^^'' ' 

k. ..s:N.\\\r\^ •y 



^ 9 1 N 


*• <- • 

^ aV- 

.N c 

0 - ^ ■is ^ 



> -Is 



^iv' jgtiPf^ ' 'f‘_^ 


aVJ ^ 

I* ^ 

> i' "xT^v V 


<= 




'^O 0 ^ 

5 ^® ^ 

0 N 0 • '^Z' i- , , , >^ '' 

v' ,.^ "0, X* 0‘ v‘'\fW 

'f* -<^ « riS\\My^ V V '■’ 

> 'A 




,- 0 ^ C “ ■■ '' < 9 ^ 


c A o . 


^ " -9 ' 




IP" 





J r 1,, ’ • ’ 



'^u 






w 




vr.'J •> ■' '•! 

i'*> ' < . 

■ ii ^ ^ . 

*.- • ■ • * ’ *■ ‘ 


♦ * f 













rnw^wmm 





( c 


LSN T IT 


WOR'IH 


COMINC; FOR ? 


I 



A 


UNITED STATES 
AVIDSHIPMAN 


IN THE 


SOUTH SEAS 


Lt. Com. Yates Stirling Jr.U.S.N. 
Author of 

“A US. Midshipman Afloat" 

“A U.S. Midshipman in China" 

“A U.^Midshipman in the Philippines” 



Illustrated RalphLBoj^er 


THE PENN PUBLISHING 
COMPANY PHILADELPHIA 
MCMXIII 



r /-'j 

I 

U» 


COPYKIGHr 
1913 BY 
THE PENN 
PUBUSHING 
COMPANY 





©CI,A3 3 700 4 


During the process of empire building, even to-day 
carried on by the great powers, the far distant South 
Sea Islands received their share of attention from 
designing cabinets* 

In their patriotic desire to further the cause of their 
country many sailors laid down their lives in battles 
with the natives. 

These small wars are scarcely remembered at home, 
but in the islands where the rivalry between the nations 
was bitterest, there stand impressive monuments to these 
sailor heroes, and in their songs the chivalrous islanders 
praise the virtues of their fallen foes. 

To the sailors of all nations who thus met death, fight- 
ing in their country's cause, these pages are dedicated. 



Introduction 


In this story Midshipmen Phil Perry and 
Sydney Monroe, together with Boatswain’s 
Mate ‘‘Jack” O’Neil, act through an historic 
drama of a South Sea war. 

The same characters have seen active serv- 
ice in many parts of the world. 

In “A United States Midshipman Afloat,” 
life in a battle-ship of the Atlantic fleet, 
together with a typical South American 
revolution, furnished the setting. In “ A 
United States Midshipman in China,” the 
midshipmen and O’Neil help to rescue an 
American Mission and put an end to a 
“ Boxer ” uprising. In “ A United States 
Midshipman in the Philippines,” the same 
officers see very active service on board a gun- 
boat in cooperation with the army against the 
Filipino insurgents. 

In “ A United States Midshipman in Japan,” 
they discover a plot to bring the United States 
and Japan into open hostilities over the 
5 


6 


INTRODUCTION 


purchase of some foreign war-ships. War is 
narrowly averted through the detective work 
of the midshipmen and their Japanese class- 
mate at Annapolis, but now a lieutenant in 
the Imperial Navy. 

The present volume carries the midshipmen 
through further thrilling scenes that occurred 
in an island of the far-away South Seas. The 
portrayal of native life is faithful and many 
of the incidents are historic. 


Contents 


I. 

The Rival Chiefs 


11 

11 . 

Discord Among the Whites 


23 

III. 

Plotting for Power . 


44 

IV. 

Captain ‘‘ Bully ” Scott and 

His 



Mate 


58 

V. 

The ‘‘Talofa” in Ukula 


81 

VI. 

The “Talofa’s” Cargo . 


103 

VII. 

The Kapuan Firm . 


112 

VIII. 

Avao, Tapau of Ukula 



IX. 

O’Neil’s Opinion 


145 

X. 

Rumors of War 


165 

XI. 

High Chief Kataafa 


183 

XII. 

Smuggled Arms 


202 

XIII. 

Ukula Attacked 


221 

XIV. 

Count Rosen Takes Charge 


240 

XV. 

The De Facto ” Government 


259 

XVI. 

Carl Klinger .... 


277 

XVII. 

Ben Stump Listens . 


293 

XVIII. 

A “ Cutting Out ” Expedition 


310 

XIX. 

A Reenforcement 


327 

XX. 

The Tables Turned 


345 

XXI. 

A Reconnaissance 


362 

XXII. 

War in Earnest 


377 

XXIII. 

Conclusion .... 


395 


7 


i , <.■> * . '■ 

ir ^ 

■ '^'7 1 . 

- 

i/.i' • 

,U . 

-hi- '.; 




Illustrations 


PAGE 

“ Isn’t It Worth Coming For ? ” . Frontispiece 

Three American Officers Were Standing in 
THE Road 51 

“ I Want About a Dozen Sailors ” . .128 

He Began at Once to Wave It . . . 204 

“ You Are Simply a Bully ! ” . . .281 

“ Is It Quite Clear ? ” the Admiral Asked . 329 

He Did Not Fire 385 


A United States Midshipman in the South Seas. 


9 


A United States Midshipman 
in the South Seas 


CHAPTER I 

THE RIVAL CHIEFS 

A MAN-OF-WAR boat propelled by six sailor- 
men and with the flag of the United States 
flying fron its staff navigated the tortuous 
channel through the fringing coral reef and 
landed upon the sandy beach of the harbor of 
Ukula. 

Three American naval ofiicers from the 
cruiser Sitka stepped from the boat upon 
the shore. 

In the great public square on Kulinuu 
Point at one end of the town many thousands 
of the natives of the Kapuan Islands had 
gathered. They had come from all the 
villages of the islands by special invitation 
from the Herzovinian consul for the purpose 
of giving welcome to their great war chief 
11 


12 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


Kataafa, who had but just returned from five 
long years of exile in a foreign land. 

Toward this assemblage the three officers 
bent their steps. They were shown to their 
chairs by obsequious Herzovinian sailors and 
found themselves placed with the English 
officers from their war-ship in port. The 
Herzovinian officers sat close to their consul, 
who, in all the splendor of a court uniform, 
his chest covered with medals, was enthroned 
under a bower of freshly cut shrubs and 
flowers. 

The American captain. Commander Taze- 
well, regarded the Herzovinian officials, a 
twinkle of merriment in his eyes. 

All their paint and powder is on thick,’’ 
he said, smiling good-humoredly, to his two 
companions. Midshipmen Philip Perry and 
Sydney Monroe, who had accompanied him 
ashore to be present at this novel ceremony. 

Phil was gazing with open-eyed admiration 
at the handsome islanders. 

'' I mean the Herzovinian officers,” Com- 
mander Tazewell added. It’s a hot day for 
special full dress uniform, but ^ noblesse 
oblige,’ I suppose.” 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


13 

The American consul, Mr. Lee, accom- 
panied by the chief justice of Kapua, Judge 
Lindsay, walked solemnly behind their sailor 
escort and seated themselves in chairs re- 
served for them between the English and 
American officers. Their ladies were escorted 
to seats in another stand. ; 

Mr. Lee remained standing until the two 
young women who had accompanied him had 
been shown seats, then he sat down with an 
audible exclamation of annoyance. 

Judge,’^ he exclaimed, “ be prepared to be 
outraged. I know these pig-headed Her- 
zovinians well enough to appreciate that they 
never do things half-way.^’ 

“ We were fools to come and be insulted,” 
the judge snapped, removing his soft 
“ Panama ” and wiping his moist forehead. 

Look at that stand of theirs; looks like a 
Christmas tree — the very thing to catch the 
savage eye. Here are we in our democratic 
simplicity.” 

The two midshipmen gazed about ; the 
wonderful spectacle delighted them. Several 
thousands of Kapuan men and women col- 
lected in mathematical accuracy had formed 


14 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

a great square about the Herzovinian officials. 
In front were the women, garbed in colors of 
flaming hue, their dark hair loose over their 
shoulders. The scarlet hibiscus blossom 
woven into necklaces and entwined in their 
blue-black locks was both efiective and start- 
ling. The men were naked to the lava-lava 
covering about their waists, their copper 
brown skins glistening with cocoanut oil. 

There^s Kataafa,” Commander Tazewell 
said to his companions at his side. “ He and 
Panu-Mafili are rivals to the Kapuan throne, 
and the flnal decision is now in the hands of 
Judge Lindsay.^^ The midshipmen had ar- 
rived in Kapua only that morning on the 
mail steamer from San Francisco. 

“ Kataafa is the high chief who has always 
rebelled against the king,^^ the commander 
added. The Herzovinians deported him to 
one of their penal islands after his warriors 
had killed many of their sailors, and now 
they are giving him a royal welcome.” 

Where's Panu-Mafili?” Phil asked excit- 
edly, after he had feasted his eyes upon the 
high chief sitting next the Herzovinian consul. 

Commander Tazewell indicated a small 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


15 


native squatting on the ground in front of 
the assemblage. He seemed dwarfed in com- 
parison to the giant next him. 

“ The big one alongside of him is Tuamana/^ 
the commander explained. He has always 
been loyal to the legal king, and is a fine 
character and a great fighter. Well call 
upon him by and by.^^ 

With a flourish of trumpets the ceremony 
began. The band then struck up the impress- 
ive Herzovinian national air, and all rose to 
their feet. 

The Herzovinian consul, Mr. Carlson, 
moved forward after the music had ceased. 
He held in his hand a paper which he raised 
above bis head, praying silence. 

The midshipmen listened eagerly. 

What language is it ? Phil whispered. 
He could not recognize a word. From differ- 
ent quarters of the great crowd could be heard 
the native talking men repeating the 
words until they were heard by every native. 

Phil riveted his attention upon the sea of 
native faces opposite him, endeavoring to sur- 
prise their thoughts, and thus obtain knowl- 
edge of what was being said. 


i6 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


I can’t follow him,” Commander Tazewell 
whispered to Phil, ‘‘ but I see it’s making a 
great impression.” He turned slowly in his 
chair to observe the effect upon Judge Lind- 
say and Mr. Lee, both of whom spoke Kapuan 
fluently. 

Judge Lindsay’s under lip was noticeably 
quivering, while Mr. Lee ground his teeth in 
silent rage. 

An exclamation from Phil caused the com- 
mander to turn again. The tall warrior and 
Panu-Mafili, the other candidate for king- 
ship, had turned their backs upon the speaker 
and were talking to their followers behind 
them. Almost as one man they obeyed the 
call, and nearly five hundred natives slowly 
and with great dignity marched away, leaving 
a gaping hole in the symmetry of the square. 

Mr. Carlson’s flow of native eloquence 
came to a sudden stop. He gazed in appar- 
ent bewilderment about him. Then from the 
departing natives came in melodious rhythm 
the words, sung over and over again — Malea- 
Toa-Panu-Tupu-e-Kapua ” — Malea Toa Panu 
is King of Kapua. 

I’m afraid I can’t stand to hear the rest 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


17 


myself/' Judge Lindsay declared, unable to 
control himself longer. He rose to his feet 
and walked away with great dignity. Mr. 
Lee and the British consul followed. 

I am going to stick it through," Com- 
mander Sturdy, of the British war-ship 
Hyacinth," exclaimed as he changed his 
seat to one next to Commander Tazewell. 
‘‘ I can't understand a jolly word, you know, 
but it's as good as a musical opera at home." 

Chief Kataafa now stood beside Mr. 
Carlson, while Klinger, the manager of the 
Herzovinian firm's plantations in Kapua, 
called the Kapuan Firm," called loudly to 
the natives for silence. 

The worst is yet to come," Commander 
Tazewell laughed. The Herzovinian sailor 
company of a hundred strong, their rifles 
shining brightly in the sunlight, had smartly 
taken the position of present arms." But 
quiet must be restored before the remainder 
of this impressive ceremony will be retailed 
out to us," he added impressively. 

Mr. Carlson solemnly placed a wreath of 
royal yellow about the chiefs neck. The as- 
semblage suddenly burst forth in uncontrolled 


i8 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


savage joy. Then as if by magic this demon- 
stration was stilled by the music of a gun. 
The Herzovinian war-ship was firing a salute 
in honor of the returned exiles. 

Nineteen guns, I suppose,’’ Commander 
Sturdy said. Every one was counting, the 
natives most of all. The nineteenth gun had 
fired. All held their breath. This was the 
salute usually given a high chief. There 
seemed a perceptible pause and then another 
crash reverberated across the water, and yet 
another. 

A royal salute,” all gasped. Again pande- 
monium broke loose among the Kataafa 
adherents. Herzovinia had acknowledged 
Kataafa as king of Kapua. 

Commander Tazewell’s face suddenly 
dropped its joviality. The British captain 
said things under his breath, while the 
American and English officers gazed at each 
other, utterly speechless with surprise. 

** Kataafa Tupu-e-Kapua ^ — ah,” the song 
burst forth, drowning out all other sounds. 

The stands were quickly emptied. The 
American and English officers joined the 

* Kataafa is king of Kapua. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


19 

resident ladies of their nationality and escorted 
them in angry silence away from the scene. 

Judge Lindsay and Mr. Lee were encoun- 
tered only a few hundred yards away. Mr. 
Lee called Commander Tazewell to his side. 

We are waiting to hear from Mr. Carlson 
what is the meaning of this treachery,” he ex- 
claimed. “Judge Lindsay goes so far as to 
believe that now a war over the title of king of 
Kapua cannot be averted. It is outrageous.” 

Phil and Sydney gazed with interest at the 
daughters of the American consul, Mr. Lee, 
whom they had not met, and were greatly 
disappointed when they heard him direct 
them to return home immediately. The mid- 
shipmen remained behind with their captain. 

The Herzovinian consul, accompanied by 
Klinger and a stranger and followed by 
several naval officers, soon appeared. Their 
faces were wreathed in smiles and their 
shoulders were decorated with circlets of 
flowers placed there by the jubilant Kataafa 
adherents. 

Judge Lindsay placed himself squarely in 
their path. His face was pale, and he held 
his cane clutched firmly in his hand. 


20 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


Mr. Carlson/’ he exclaimed in a clear 
vibrant voice, I desire you to state to me, 
as chief justice ofKapua, publicly and at once, 
your authority in making such a speech, 
acknowledging for Herzovinia the claim of 
Kataafa to be king of Kapua. Further, I 
desire to hear the authority for the salute of 
twenty-one guns, a salute given only to a 
king. As chief justice of these islands I 
represent the Herzovinian law as well as the 
law of England and America. Do I under- 
stand, sir, that you have set aside law, the 
law of the treaty between the three great 
nations, and have rendered a decision in favor 
of Kataafa, even while I am still deliberating 
upon the justice of these two claimant chiefs 
for the title of king ? ” 

Mr. Carlson’s face was a study. He looked 
appealingly to the stranger beside him' as if 
for support. Phil was astonished to note the 
evident gleam of triumph in the stranger’s 
eyes. The lad regarded him closely. He was 
tall and finely built ; his face was pale and 
highly intellectual in appearance. He ap- 
peared to be a man of great force of character. 

'‘My dear judge,” Mr. Carlson fioundered 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


21 


hopelessly. Come with us to the consulate. 
This ‘is really not the place for dispute.^’ 

They had been surrounded by inquisitive 
natives of all sizes, who are quick to scent an 
altercation, and even though not understand- 
ing the words, like all nature’s children, can 
read the language of the eye, the face and the 
hand. 

Don’t dear me,” the judge exclaimed, even 
more angrily. Your treachery was public ; 
my condemnation of it shall be public also.” 

Mr. Carlson’s face streamed with perspira- 
tion. He was a big man and inclined to be 
fat. His gorgeous uniform fitted like a glove. 
Under a torrid sun he was a picture of woe. 

The stranger whispered in the consul’s ear. 
Phil noted that the red face suddenly cleared. 

You have misunderstood, judge,” Mr. 
Carlson began, not at all certain of his ground, 
but his voice gained strength as he continued. 

I did not say he was Tupu ^ of Kapua. That 
you must decide. I only hailed Kataafa as 
Tupu. Being the choice of so many villages 
makes him Tupu. That was my meaning. 
Kataafa and Panu-Mafili are both Tupu, but 

‘ Tupu — King. 


22 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

neither is yet Tupu-e-Kapua.’^ Mr. Carlson 
was now smiling benignly upon the judge. 

Judge Lindsay made a sign of disgust. 

“ Do you take me for a babe in arms? ” he 
exploded. How dare you insult my intelli- 
gence by such an absolute and unnecessary 
falsehood ! Whether you know what you 
read or not, I do know. I heard and under- 
stood. You did not mince matters there.'' 
He drew himself up haughtily and glared 
defiantly and for the first time at the stranger 
and Klinger. 

“ The Kapuan language, to one who knows 
it, is not difficult. I advise you, Mr. Carlson, 
hereafter to stick to a language you know, 
otherwise your able co-conspirators will be 
putting embarrassing words into your inno- 
cent mouth." 

A ripple of suppressed merriment rose un- 
rebuked at the judge's sally. Mr. Carlson 
seemed too dazed and worried to make any 
reply. 

The judge bowed ceremoniously, linking 
his arm in that of Mr. Lee, and walked away. 


CHAPTER II 


DISCORD AMONG THE WHITES 

The day after the ceremony of welcome to 
Kataafa, Phil and Sydney again accompan- 
ied their captain on shore. Commander 
Tazewell took a lively interest in everything 
that was going on and was delighted to have 
such enthusiastic young supporters. 

“ You’ll find/^ he said after they had landed 
and sent the boat away, that the natives 
of both factions are equally friendly to us. 
That is a good sign and I hope it will con- 
tinue.” 

The highroad of Ukula was filled with half- 
naked muscular men and lithe, graceful, dark- 
eyed women. Every native exhaled the acrid 
odor of cocoanut oil. The men’s long hair 
was plastered white with lime and tied on top 
in the form of a topknot. 

The lime bleaches the hair red, you know,” 
Commander Tazewell explained, noting the 
lads’ curiosity at this peculiar custom. The 
23 


24 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

oil is to prevent them from catching cold. 
They go into the water, you see, any hour of 
the day, and when they come out they are as 
dry as ducks.” 

The officers had landed at Kulinuu, the 
traditional residence of the Malea-Toa family, 
from which many kings had been chosen and 
to which Panu-Mafili belonged. On every 
hand they encountered good-natured smiling 
natives. “ Talofa, Alii ” ^ was on every lip. 

Ten thousand of these fellows are en- 
camped in the vicinity of Ukula waiting to 
see who the chief justice makes their king,” 
the commander said. You see,” he added, 
strange as it may seem to us, two chiefs may 
rightfully be elected. Election depends upon 
quality of votes rather than upon quantity. 
So according to traditional Kapuan custom 
when two kings are elected, they decide it by 
having a big battle. That is the normal way, 
but we have persuaded the natives that arbi- 
tration is more civilized. Now the chief jus- 
tice decides and the three nations support that 
decision.” 

It looks rather as though Herzovinia 

* Talofa, Alii — Good-day, chief. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


25 


would support the judge only in case he de- 
cides for Kataafa/^ Sydney said questioningly. 

If that country refuses to back up the judge 
what will happen ? 

Commander Tazewell was thoughtful for 
half a minute. 

According to the treaty all are required 
to agree,” he answered. “ There is no choice. 
Once the decision is made that creates a king, 
all who oppose him are rebels. That is the 
law, and these foreign war-ships are here to 
uphold Judge Lindsay’s decision, right or 
wrong.” 

As the three pedestrians, dressed in their 
white duck uniforms, white helmets protect- 
ing their heads from the tropical sun, reached 
the hard coral road leading along the shore 
of the bay, the panorama of the harbor opened 
and delighted the eyes of the young men. 

The white coral reef, lying beneath scarcely 
half a fathom of water, was peopled by natives 
gathering shell-fish to feed the greater influx 
of population. On the bosom of the dark 
green water, beyond the inner reef, and al- 
most encircled by spurs of a second ledge of 
coral, lay anchored the war-ships of three 


26 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


great nations. In the foreground, lying on 
their sides, two twisted red-stained hulls, the 
bleaching bones of once proud men-of-war, 
told of the sport of giant waves that had 
hurled them a hundred yards along the inner 
reef and drowned many of their crews. This 
manifestation of the power of a tropical hur- 
ricane, that might come almost unheralded 
out of the watery waste, prevented any relaxa- 
tion of vigilance. At all times the war-ships 
were kept ready to seek safety at sea, clear of 
the treacherous coral reefs. To be caught at 
anchor in the harbor of Ukula when a hur- 
ricane broke could mean only another red- 
stained wreck upon the reef. 

The road soon left the water’s edge. Now it 
ran several hundred yards inland through 
groves of cocoanut, banana and breadfruit 
trees. Fringing the road were many spider- 
like, grass-thatched native houses, similar to 
those they had seen among the groves at 
Kulinuu. Seated on mats under these shelters 
were numerous natives, and the Americans as 
they progressed received frequent cordial in- 
vitation to stop and refresh themselves from 
the very hospitable islanders. Commander 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


27 



XiliilCoSli 



28 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


Tazewell, during his stay in Kapua, had 
acquired some facility in the language, which 
greatly delighted ^^the childlike natives, and 
they lost no opportunity to engage him to join 
their meetings, in order that they might listen 
to their own language from the lips of a 
‘‘ papalangi ^ chief. Put apparently the com- 
mander did not intend to stop. Both mid- 
shipmen now eyed longingly the cool interior 
of a large and pretentious house which they 
were approaching. From the entrance a 
stately warrior beckoned them to come and 
partake of the milk of a cocoanut. 

Commander Tazewell waved a solemn ac- 
knowledgment. That’s Tuamana, the chief 
of Ukula/’ he said to his companions. We’ll 
stop for just a minute. It was he,” the 
commander added as they approached the 
delighted chief, ''who saved so many lives 
during the hurricane when those two war- 
ships were thrown up bodily on the reef, and 
several others were wrecked at their moor- 
ings.” 

Tuamana grasped each by the hand in turn 
and then led them to mats laid upon the 

* Papalaugi — White person. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


29 

pebbly floor. He clapped his hands, and 
almost at once from behind the dividing cur- 
tain of “ Tapa ^ cloth, two native girls glided, 
gracefully and with outstretched hands, to the 
side of the papalangis.’^ Seating themselves 
the girls began industriously fanning the 
heated officers. Phil soon appreciated the 
reason for this delicate attention ; swarms of 
flies hovered about them, to fight which alone 
would soon exhaust one’s patience. 

Commander Tazewell and Chief Tuamana 
engaged in quiet conversation in Kapuan 
while the chiefs talking-man, a native edu- 
cated at one of the mission schools, came 
frequently to their aid when the commander’s 
limited native vocabulary gave evidence of 
being inadequate. 

Phil and Sydney were thus left free to 
enjoy the novelty of their surroundings. 

The two young girls fanned and giggled in 
turns until Phil, unused to such delicate 
attention from the opposite sex, insisted upon 
taking the cleverly wrought banana leaf fan, 
and much to the amusement of the two girls 
began fanning himself and the girl too. 

» Tapa— Native cloth beaten out of mulberry bark. 


30 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

After a few moments this young lady arose, 
bowed and disappeared behind the screen 
convulsed with laughter. 

YouVe offended her,” insisted Sydney. 

HavenT you learned yet to give women 
their own way ? ” 

But Phil’s gallantry was to receive its 
reward. A third graceful Kapuan girl, her 
high caste face beaming upon them, glided 
through the tapa screen. Bowing low before 
Commander Tazewell, she took the vacant 
place at Phil’s side. 

Commander Tazewell made a jesting remark 
in Kapuan, which caused every one to laugh 
except the two midshipmen. 

“ This is Tuamana’s daughter Avao,” the 
commander said. I told her she’d have a 
difficult time making a choice between my 
two handsome aides ; but I see she has made 
up her mind already.” 

Avao had taken the fan from Phil’s hand 
and was now efficiently fanning him. 

A half hour later as they were standing, 
bidding good-bye to their hosts, Commander 
Tazewell announced to Phil that the chief’s 
daughter had paid him a signal honor. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


31 

She wants you to be her “ felinge/^ ^ he 
said, his grave eyes sparkling. It^s a 
Tapau’s^ privilege to choose. Your obliga- 
tion is to present her with soap, tooth powder, 
in fact, anything she fancies that you can get 
in the ship’s store. For this you are privileged 
to drink as many cocoanuts and eat as much 
fruit as you desire at her father’s house. She 
will even send you presents of fruit, tapa 
and fans. If I were Mr. Monroe, I’d envy 
you your luck, for Avao is the belle of Ukula.” 

Avao blushed under her bronze and play- 
fully struck the commander with her fan. 

“ Leonga Alii 1 ” ^ she exclaimed abashed. 

“ She understands and speaks English as 
well as I do,” he said, laughing at the girl’s 
sudden shyness. Once I thought she’d make 
me her felinge, but I suppose youth takes 
rank.” 

Once more on the road Commander Taze- 
well became again serious. 

That affair yesterday is taking on a darker 
aspect,” he confided. Tuamana says that 
everyone knows among the natives that if 

^Felinge — Literally friend, a benefactor. 

* Tapau — Princess of a village. ® Leonga Alii — Bad chief. 


32 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Judge Lindsay decides for Panu-Mafili then 
Kataafa has been persuaded by the Herzovin- 
ians to make war. 

Tuamana, of course/’ he added, is a 
loyal man. He is on Panu’s side, but will be 
loyal to whom Judge Lindsay decides is really 
the king.” 

In front of the big wooden store in the 
Matafeli district of the town. Commander 
Tazewell stopped. Many natives were gath- 
ered there. The porch was crowded, while 
within the store there seemed to be only 
standing room. 

What mischief is going on here ? ” he ex- 
claimed, a perplexed frown on his face. 

Suddenly Klinger and the stranger of yes- 
terday darkened the doorway. The stranger 
gazed coldly upon the Americans but gave no 
sign of recognition. He and Klinger con- 
tinued to talk in their guttural Herzovinian 
tongues. 

Phil suddenly observed that the air of 
friendliness they had noted earlier was now 
lacking. The natives no longer greeted them. 
Instead in the native eye was a sheepish, sul- 
len look. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


33 

“ That was Count Rosen/^ Commander 
Tazewell said as they again moved onward. 
“ Klinger, of course, is active and sides with 
Kataafa. Klinger’s wife is a native, you 
know, a close relative of the high chief. I 
suppose he’d like to have royalty in the fam- 
ily.” 

The store looked like a recruiting station,” 
Phil suggested. 

Commander Tazewell nodded gravely. It 
may be,” he replied. 

The Matautu section of Ukula, set aside 
for the official residences of the consuls of 
England and the United States, was being 
approached. 

At the gate of the American consulate, Mr. 
Lee hailed them. The consul was naturally 
a peace loving man, and the fact that he had 
with him in Kapua his two daughters was an 
added argument for peace. 

Come in, commander,” he called from his 
doorway. 

They turned in through the gateway. 

'^All manner of war rumors,” Mr. Jiee ex- 
claimed, as he shook hands, are going the 
rounds. The latest is that a paper has been 


34 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

found written by Herzovinian statesmen some 
years ago declaring their country would never, 
never permit Kataafa to be king. The 
Kapuans believe that this will make Judge 
Lindsay decide for Panu-Mafili. Until that 
disgraceful affair of yesterday, and the rumor 
of this paper, we all thought that whatever 
the decision the three consuls would unite to 
prevent war. Panu-Mafili has said openly he 
and his followers would abide by the decision. 
Kataafa appeared willing, but has as yet 
made no statement. 

“ The situation is alarming, commander,’^ 
Mr. Lee added gravely, “ and I for one am at 
a loss what should be done.’' 

‘‘ Arrest the white men who are inciting 
Kataafa to revolt in the event of an adverse 
decision and ship them from Kapua ; that’s 
my remedy,” Commander Tazewell answered 
promptly. 

“ Count Rosen and Klinger,” the consul 
exclaimed. Impossible! ” 

Commander Tazewell shrugged his shoul- 
ders. 

‘‘ It’s the one way to prevent war,” he 
said. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


35 

“ The Herzovinian consul, after agreeing to 
stand with us and prevent a war, has now 
assumed a mysterious air of importance and 
we can get nothing definite from him,’^ 
Mr. Lee complained bitterly. ** If my ad- 
vice had only been followed and Kataafa kept 
away until after a new king had been crowned, 
this perplexing state could not have existed. 

Commander Tazewell was thoughtful for 
several minutes. 

Mr. Lee,’’ he said gravely, “ I believe 
that bringing Kataafa back at this time was a 
Herzovinian plan. The chief has been in ex- 
ile for five years and in a Herzovinian colony, 
and I hear was treated as a prince instead of 
a prisoner. Although his warriors killed 
Herzovinian sailors in the last revolt, now he 
favors that nation. Once he is king of Kapua 
he will advance all Herzovinian interests. 
They may hope even for annexation, a dream 
long cherished by Klinger and his country- 
men. 

“ Yes, if the judge decides against Kataafa 
there will be war,” he concluded solemnly. 

Phil and Sydney listened eagerly. Though 
these native affairs were not easy to under- 


36 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

stand, yet they could not interrupt and ask 
for explanations. 

At this time there came an interruption in 
the serious talk between Commander Tazewell 
and Mr. Lee. It was the arrival of the two 
young ladies. They had been out in the 
“ bush,^^ as the country back of the sea beach 
is called in Kapua. They appeared, their 
young faces glowing with health from their 
recent exercise and their arms full of the 
scarlet pandanus blossoms. 

Margaret, the older girl, was a woman in 
spite of her nineteen years. She greeted the 
newcomers to Kapua with a grace that won 
the midshipmen at once. Alice, two years 
her junior, caught the boyish fancy of the 
lads instantly. She seemed to carry with her 
the free air of the woods, and exhaled its 
freshness. She had scarcely a trace of the 
reserve in manner of her older sister. Her 
greeting was spontaneously frank and un- 
abashed. 

While Margaret presided at the tea table, 
around which Commander Tazewell and the 
consul gathered, Alice impressed the willing 
midshipmen into her service, and with their 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


37 


arms loaded with the pandanus flowers, led 
them to the dining-room. Here she placed 
the brilliant blossoms into numerous vases, 
giving to the room with its paucity of furni- 
ture a gala aspect. 

Do you care for tea ? ” she said ques- 
tioningly, implying clearly a negative answer, 
which both lads were quick to catch. 

“ Never take it,^^ Phil replied quickly. ‘‘Do 
you,Syd?" 

Sydney smiled and shook his head. 

“ Because if you don’t, while the others are 
drinking it, we can climb Mission Hill back 
of the town and enjoy the view of the harbor. 
It’s not far,” she added glancing at the spotless 
white uniform of the young officers. 

She led them at a rapid pace across the 
garden and by a narrow path into a thickly 
wooded copse. The path was apparently one 
not frequently used and was choked with 
creepers and underbrushes. After a score of 
yards the path led at a steep angle up the 
wooded side of one of the low surrounding 
hills, which at Matautu descended almost to 
the harbor’s edge. Here the shore is rocky 
and dangerous. 


38 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Alice climbed with the ease of a wood sprite, 
while the midshipmen lumbered after her in 
their endeavor to keep pace. 

Here we are,^^ she cried joyfully as she 
sprang up the last few feet of incline and seated 
herself in the fork of a small mulberry tree. 

Out of breath, their white trousers and 
white canvas shoes stained with the juice of 
entangling vines, and with perspiration 
streaming in little rivulets down their crim- 
son faces, the two young men looked with 
amazement at their slim pace-maker ; she was 
not even out of breath. 

Isn^t it worth coming for ? she exclaimed, 
perfect enjoyment in her girlish voice. See, 
the town and the harbor and all the ships lie 
at our feet ; and everything looks so very 
near;^^ then she added whimsically, I some- 
times pretend I am queen and order every- 
thing and every one about — no one else ever 
comes here,^^ she explained quickly. My 
sister Margaret came once, but never came 
again. 

It’s not easy to get here,” Sydney said, 
panting slightly, ‘‘but it would more than 
be worth the trouble if by coming one could 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


39 


really know the feeling of being a king or a 
queen. I haven’t sufficient imagination. 
What should you do if you were queen 
he asked of Alice. 

She drew her brows down thoughtfully. 

“ I don’t know all that I should do,” she 
replied earnestly, “ but the very first thing 
would be to send away every papalangi.” 

‘‘The war-ships too ?” Phil inquired. “I 
call that hospitable ! ” 

“ I might keep you,” indicating both lads by 
a wave of her free hand, “ as leaders for my 
army, but every one else would be sent away 
and leave these children of nature free to live 
their lives as God intended they should.” A 
deep conviction in the girl’s voice was not lost 
upon the midshipmen. 

“ Suppose you tell us of Kapua,” Phil said 
gently, after a short silence. 

“ Yes, do,” Sydney urged eagerly. 

“Tell you of Kapua Uma,”^ Alice said 
wistfully. “ I have lived here now three years, 
and I feel as if the people were my people. 
They are gentle, generous and lovable, except 
when they are excited by the papalangi. 

* Kapua Uma — The real Kapua. 


40 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

The white men have brought only trouble 
and sorrow to the islands. No Kapuan has 
ever broken his word, except when the white 
men have betrayed him. In all their wars 
they have been generous to their foes. They 
never harm women and children. The white 
men incite war, but are free from injury, ex- 
cept when they attack the Kapuans first. 

“ Once all the rich land near the sea belonged 
to Kapua. Now white men have stolen it 
away by fraud and deceit.^^ Alice’s eyes 
flashed indignantly, while her hearers were 
thrilled by the fervor in her young voice. 
“ The foreign firm of which Klinger is man- 
ager, called the ‘ Kapuan Firm,’ owned by 
Herzovinian capital, is no ordinary company 
of South Sea traders,” she added. It is the 
feet of the Herzovinian Empire, holding the 
door of annexation open. The firm’s business 
grows greater every year. They import black 
labor from the Solomon Islands and hold them 
to work as slaves. The treaty gives the 
Kapuans the right to choose their king, but 
the firm will sanction no king who will not 
first agree to further the interests of the 
Kapuan firm. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


41 

Kataafa once fought against the firm and 
won, but he was exiled by the Herzovinian 
government. Now a majority of people again 
wish him for king, and this time the firm is 
not only willing but anxious that he should 
he made king. England and America rep- 
resented in Kapua see in this a bid for 
annexation. Judge Lindsay will soon decide 
between Kataafa and Panu-Mafili. Panu has 
given his word he will not fight. Kataafa 
signed a sworn agreement in order to obtain 
the consent of the three Powers to his return 
from exile, that he would never again take 
up arms.” 

Alice stopped breathless. There you have 
the full history of Kapua in a nutshell,” she 
added laughingly as she slipped down from 
her seat. 

Poor Panu-Mafili is only a boy. His father, 
you know, was the late king Malea-Toa or 
‘ Laupepe,^ a ^ sheet of paper,’ as the natives 
called him, because he was intellectual. Panu 
begged to be allowed to go away and study,” 
she said, “ but our great governments need 
him as a big piece in the political chess game.” 

More aptly a pawn,” Phil corrected. 


42 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Alice was gazing wistfully seaward. 

“ Out there/' she said after a moment's si- 
lence, ** is a sail. It's probably the ‘ Talofa,' 
a schooner from the Fiji. The natives say 
^ Bully ' Scott and the ‘ Talofa ' scent out wars 
in the South Seas and arrive just in time to 
sell a shipload of rifles." 

The midshipmen saw the tops of a sail " 
far out on the horizon. 

“ If Kataafa needs guns to defy the chief 
justice, there they are," she added. 

“ Isn't it against the law to sell guns to the 
natives?" Sydney asked. 

Alice regarded him with high disdain. 

^ Bully ' Scott knows no law nor nation- 
ality," she replied. ‘‘ To give your nation- 
ality in Kapua is a disadvantage, because then 
your consul interferes with your business. 
When you're trading in ‘ blacks ' and guns, 
it's best to deprive yourself of the luxury of a 
country. ^ Bully ' Scott is from the world." 

How do you know that is the ^ Talofa' ? " 
Phil asked incredulously, but all the same 
greatly interested. 

** I don't know," she answered gayly as she 
led the way toward home ; but the ‘ Talofa ' 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 43 

is a schooner, and the natives believe she will 
come. And that’s a schooner.” 

Her logic was not convincing to the mid- 
shipmen, but then they had not lived three 
years in Kapua. Schooners were not frequent 
visitors at Ukula. 


CHAPTER III 


PLOTTING FOE POWER 

The Herzovinian consul sat upon his wide 
verandah gazing out upon the quiet bay of 
Ukula. His usually serene face wore a 
troubled look. Count Rosen paced the porch 
restlessly. His well-knit figure was becom- 
ingly clad in a military khaki riding suit, 
and he held a heavy rhinoceros hide whip 
in his hand. Consul Carlson was over fifty. 
Rosen was not over thirty, and appeared even 
younger. 

Count Rosen was talking while Mr. Carlson 
listened with an unusual air of deference. 

‘‘ When Kataafa was hurried here from 
Malut, the island of his exile, our foreign 
office expected you to have paved the way to 
make him king.’^ The speaker struck a 
picturesque stand in front of the consul’s 
chair. Instead you have been fraternizing 
with these other consuls. The chief justice 
44 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


45 

has you under his thumb. Is that the way 
to bring on a crisis ? ” 

The Herzovinian consul swallowed a lump 
in his throat. It was hard to be taken to task 
by such a young man. 

“ Count Rosen/’ he answered, a sudden 
spark of resentment coming into his small 
eyes, “ if I have displeased the foreign office, 
I can resign.” 

Resign,” the count exclaimed disgustedly. 
Why talk of resigning with such an oppor- 
tunity before you? Have you no ambition? 
Will you permit Herzovinia to be robbed of 
what naturally belongs to her? We have 
worked long and spilled Herzovinian blood in 
order to acquire these beautiful rich islands. 
And with the end in sight will you resign ? ” 
Mr. Carlson roused himself from his dejection. 
‘‘ I agreed with the other consuls to try to 
prevent a war. Cannot we succeed without 
bloodshed ? I don’t believe the foreign office 
really wishes that.” 

Count Rosen’s eyes flashed. 

“ What are these puny wars to our states- 
men ? ” he asked. “ Has anything worth 
while ever been attained without the shed- 


46 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

ding of blood? But/' he added, “you were 
about to tell me of some important news." 

“ I have reliable information that a letter 
has been received by Judge Lindsay, written 
some years ago by our government, which de- 
mands that Kataafa shall never be king," Mr. 
Carlson said earnestly. “ I knew of the letter, 
but believed it was withdrawn when England 
and America refused to agree." 

“ It was never withdrawn," Count Rosen re- 
plied. “ The chief justice then will decide 
for this foolish boy Panu-Mafili. That de- 
cision must bring on a war." 

Mr. Carlson looked surprised, his round 
red face a picture of timid anxiety. “ Kataafa 
will break his oath ? " he questioned aghast. 

“ Of course, and now for the political side 
of this issue," the count nodded and contin- 
ued. “ Under the treaty the three consuls 
must act in concert to uphold the decisions of 
the chief justice. Will you, knowing the aim 
of your government and loving the natives as 
your friends, give your support to such a 
wicked decision? Will you call for your 
sailors and force upon these honest, childlike 
natives a king not of their choosing? " 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


47 


Mr. Carlson glanced up appealingly. 

Count/^ he exclaimed, what would you 
do if you were in my place ? 

Count Rosen smiled enigmatically. ^^Mr. 
Carlson,’^ he replied, I have no credentials. 
I have been sent by our foreign office to study 
the situation in the South Seas. At Fiji I re- 
ceived a letter to go to Ukula. I am here. 
Advice without responsibility is not good. 
You must decide for yourself, for you alone 
are responsible for your acts to our govern- 
ment. I can, however, show you,” he added 
earnestly, how the situation will develop if 
you continue to act in harmony with the 
other consuls in upholding the decision, if it 
is against Kataafa. The natives will arm and 
fight. The Kataafa warriors are in vastly su- 
perior numbers and will soon win a victor3\ 
The sailors of three nations will be landed to 
fight the victorious side. With their superior 
guns and training many innocent natives 
must be killed. It would then be a general 
war, the whites against the natives.” 

“ And if I refuse to stand with the others ? ” 
the consul asked earnestly. 

That will greatly simplify everything,” 


48 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

the count replied. ‘'The Kataafa warriors 
would declare him king. The Panu natives 
in such great inferiority of numbers cannot 
resist except with the aid of the sailors, and 
that could not be given as long as you refuse 
to join. The treaty distinctly stipulates that 
action may be taken unanimously. There 
would be no war. The next mail from home 
would bring the recall of this partial judge. 
Kataafa would remain king, and then he 
must soon seek annexation to our Herzovinia. 
I hope to see our flag hoisted over the Kapuan 
Islands. And of course,^^ he added, “ you 
will get all the credit. The order of the 
Black Eagle will be yours.^^ 

The consul’s face was now fairly beaming 
upon this kind prophet. 

“ My mind is made up,” he said. “ I shall 
refuse to be used by those who have only self- 
ish aims. I shall write and refuse to agree 
with the other consuls.” 

Count Rosen smiled triumphantly as he 
rode his pony along the main road of Ukula. 

“ Carlson has been here too long,” he said 
to himself. “He thinks there’s nothing be- 
yond his narrow horizon. His lonesome life 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


49 


has made him timid ; he needed stirring to 
life. Herzovinia’s aims must be kept always 
before us. Our statesmen decided years ago 
to own these islands. Our money is invested 
here and they are a link in our colonial chain. 
A war I a little bloodshed I What does it mat- 
ter?” 

At the Kapuan firm’s store the count dis- 
mounted, giving his pony in care of a native. 

Klinger, the manager, met him at the door- 
step. No word was spoken until they reached 
the office in the rear of the store and the door 
closed behind them. 

I see in your face you are successful,” 
Klinger said as the count took the proffered 
chair. 

Everything so far has been wonderful,” 
the count exclaimed. ‘‘Judge Lindsay will 
give the decision to Panu, Kataafa will revolt, 
and Carlson will refuse to do anything. The 
hands of our friends the enemy are tied.” 

“ I too have news,” Klinger said. “ Kataafa 
has bought all the guns coming in the ‘ Talofa.’ 
Also he has answered Judge Lindsay’s letter, 
that he cannot agree to give his word to re- 
main peaceful if the decision is against him. 


50 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

as he considers the right to be king is his, 
and he has already been acknowledged king 
by one power. What do you think of that ? 
he asked delightedly. 

I saw Kataafa to-day and he says he 
is anxious for annexation to Herzovinia/^ 
Klinger continued. The Americans, you 
know, have acquired title to land in the har- 
bor of Tua-Tua on the island of Kulila. That 
must be broken up.’' 

The count nodded. ‘‘ Go ahead, you have 
a free rein. And now what about the where- 
abouts of our friend Captain ‘ Bully ’ Scott?” 

I am looking for him daily,” Klinger re- 
plied. He is bringing enough guns to arm 
every Kataafa warrior. All day long I have 
been getting receipts from the natives for guns 
to be delivered.” 

Always an eye for business,” the count 
exclaimed in half jesting disgust. You 
merchants own these poor natives body and 
soul.” 

“ What would you have us do ? ” Klinger 
answered defensively. I have spent many 
thousands of dollars upon these rifles. I am 
taking great risks in getting them here, for if 



THRKK AMKRICAN OKFICKRS WliRH STANDING IN 'THK ROAD 




V. ’1 


''■-I 








»V| 


^ <■* 


^ V' * ► t 

. ^ Vi* 


^ ijJ* 5 •■ . - . * ' 


% . ’ 'fc ^ ’i. 

' •^ ^ • i'-* 


*=4 


t^i‘ 




r-’ti 


Vr w~. ,- • 


•4. 






• « \. ' >, 


V > \ . 

. ' >7* ' V'' 

/. ^ c>^ >• 

3 ' ' . ^ •i ^ w*; 

I?--/ JB»-. • . 1? ,1 ■' 


» ' r' - 




T” i** ■ "* XS»’ » '->' v' V?”*^' ’i' r .» 

•• ’ \-aMnnt^' *■ ‘ • ‘ 1 * *■• ''i.. ’>• • . /v , * ’* iJ *^Kk 


!f:-v - _ J## 

hi -, *' ^> 'jk* - 1.' ’ '* -iv ^ *■ •i'fl 



. ..,r : .-tj- ^ 

■■■ ■' 4 ;;'- • *' ■" <«vef ■ . "■ 


r* ' -V’ 

‘■'jd 




- • 





T'litfitffffr' »• Ml 



IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


51 

either of the war-ships seize them they will be 
confiscated under the treaty, and I have no 
redress. And, count,’’ he added, “ you know 
it is all for our country.” 

Count Rosen nodded his head, but his steel 
gray eyes looked squarely into those of the 
manager of the Kapuan firm until the latter’s 
fell in quick embarrassment. The count 
knew that the man’s natural cupidity was a 
large measure of the driving force stimulating 
his patriotic enthusiasm. 

“ There’s nothing to do but wait,” the 
count said as they reached the door of the 
store. 

Three American officers were standing in 
the road at the front. 

The American commander will have to be 
handled carefully,” the count said in a low 
voice to Klinger, as he turned his back upon 
the officers. He’s a fine type ; I can see it 
in his face. He’d make a stanch friend, but 
a difficult enemy.” This last to himself. 
Sentiment was wasted upon the selfish man- 
ager of a grasping firm. 

I must contrive to know him,” the count 
added aloud. 


52 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

The American officers had now continued 
along the road. 

DonT be too precipitate,” the count cau- 
tioned as he whistled to the native boy, hold- 
ing his pony^s bridle. 

The count mounted his pony, walking it 
slowly down the road. At the Tivoli Hotel 
he stopped and dismounted. Within a half 
hour he walked from the hotel, carefully j 
dressed in a spotless white linen suit and hel- i 
met. He turned his steps toward Matautu. 

He turned in at the American consulate | 
gate, and walked with an air of high bred i 
assurance up the steps of the porch. ! 

Mr. Lee arose to receive him, a frank smile | 
of cordiality upon his face. ; 

“ Count Felix Rosen.” The visitor pro- ^ 
nounced his name slowly; there was the i 
smallest of accents. “ I have come to pay I 
my respects,” he said quietly. We tourists 
often forget our social duties.” 

“ It - is I who should apologize, Count 
Rosen,” Mr. Lee exclaimed, introducing the 
visitor to his daughter and Commander 
Tazewell. You have been in Ukula for 
several days, and I should have called 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


53 

upon you and bid you welcome to our little 
island/’ 

“ Truly, ”sir, I should not expect you to take 
so much trouble,” the count returned suavely. 

I am but a globe-trotter, as you say in 
America. I have no aim, no business. I 
go where I may be amused.” 

The count accepted the cup of tea offered 
him by Miss Lee and sipped it meditatively. 
He felt the awkward silence and hastened to 
relieve it. 

My time here is likely to be so short,” he 
added, that I hope if there must be war 
among the natives they will wait until after I 
can explore the islands. In my few days I 
have ridden miles and have been everywhere 
charmed with the natural beauty of the coun- 
try and the charming hospitality of the na- 
tives.” 

“ We also, count, are hoping that there will 
be no war,” Mr. Lee replied. “ And if your 
consul will stand with the British consul and 
myself it can be averted.” 

So I ” the count exclaimed surprisedly. 

Does Mr. Carlson then desire a war ? Some- 
times I lose all patience with my stubborn 


54 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

countryman. It is very strange/’ he added. 

I lunched with him to-day and he seemed 
aggrieved that you and the British consul 
would not support him to prevent a war.” 

Commander Tazewell had been carefully < 
studying the speaker’s face. He read there 
only disinterested amusement over the situa- 
tion. What business could this cultured 
Herzovinian have with Klinger ? He de- j 
cided to endeavor to find out. ' 

Most of the disturbances among the na- 
tives,” Commander Tazewell said quietly, 
are brought about by the merchants. Arms, 
you know. Count Rosen, are merchandise 
upon which an enormous profit is realized. 

A war, though, is required to create a market. 

I believe that Mr. Klinger could allay your 
uneasiness over the possibility of a war more 
certainly than can either of the consuls.” 

The count raised his eyes slowly to the 
speaker’s face. Their eyes met and for a mo- 
ment each gauged the other. The count 
shifted his gaze first ; a faint suspicion of a 
fiush had come under his tanned cheeks. 

** Klinger has been good enough to arrange 
some trips for me into the interior of the 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


55 


island/^ the count explained quickly. ‘‘ I 
was arranging details with him for a trip 
to the Papasea/ the sliding rock, when you 
passed his store.^^ A smile of delight spread 
over his handsome face as he suddenly asked : 
“ Can't we make up a party for that trip ? I 
should be charmed to play host. But," he 
added, “ I suppose with you it is an old 
story." 

Mr. Lee declined for himself. The uncer- 
tainty of the situation demanded his con- 
tinuous presence in Ukula. 

After some discussion it was arranged that 
the party start the next morning. Alice and 
the midshipmen returned in time to be in- 
cluded, together with Commander Tazewell 
and Miss Lee. 

I cannot express to you the honor you 
have done me in accepting my invitation," 
the count exclaimed, as he bade good-bye. 

This morning I was a lonesome stranger, 
and now I am rich in friends." 

“ Who is he?" Commander Tazewell asked 
the consul as his straight figure passed out of 
sight down the road. 

’ Papasea — A waterfall. 


56 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Mr. Lee shook his head. 

Some well connected Herzovinian of the ' 
smaller nobility, I suppose,^' he replied. His 
consul called upon him almost at once after 
he arrived on the last steamer from the South, j 
A title carries a great deal of dignity with it.^^ | 

He is certainly very fine looking,’^ Miss 
Lee said admiringly. 

And knows how to talk,^^ Phil added. 

“ I believe he is a past master in the art of 
talk,^^ Alice said pointedly. ‘‘ And the worst 
of it is we know what he says and not what 
he means.^^ 

All laughed at the girl’s quaint mode of 
expression. | 

“ Call me silly and a rebel all you please,” 
she added turning upon her sister, who at 
once denied even the thought of any such 
accusation, ** but I am and always will be sus- 
picious of a Herzovinian in Kapua. Any- 
where else he may be honest and mean what 
he says, but here, no 1 ” She shook her head 
vigorously. 

While the two midshipmen with Com- 
mander Tazewell were returning in the cap- 
tain’s gig to the Sitka,” Phil spoke of the 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


57 

sailing vessel they had seen from Alice’s 
** lookout.” 

“ Probably it isn’t Captain Scott’s ‘ Talofa,’ ” 
he added deprecatingly. “ It was too far away 
to see anything but the tops of her sails.” 

Commander Tazewell listened earnestly. 

“ ‘ Bully ’ Scott is usually on hand where 
there is a chance for his nefarious trade in 
guns,” he replied. Miss Alice Lee may have 
no real grounds for her belief that it is the 
‘ Talofa,’ but that young girl is more than 
usually clever for one of her age, and her 
father tells me she is worshiped by the native 
women, to whom she is a veritable admin- 
istering angel. Tuamana’s daughter, Avao, 
is her particular friend. You know,” he 
added, “ in Kapua, the women are the tale 
bearers ; no bit of interesting news escapes 
them.” 


CHAPTER IV 


CAPTAIN “ BULLY ” SCOTT AND HIS MATE 

Captain ‘‘Bully’' Scott sat comfortably on 
the combing of the after deck house and gazed 
toward the high mountain ranges of the 
islands of Kapua. The land had been in 
sight all day, but the fitful breeze was hardly 
enough to hold the “ Talofa’s ” great expanse 
of canvas out taut against the sheets. Yet 
even the light breeze drove the schooner 
faster than the captain wished to travel. 

“ Bring her up another point,” he directed, 
in a well modulated, almost cultivated voice. 

The helmsman, a Fiji Islander, a strapping 
bronze skinned native, naked except for the 
loin cloth of tapa, eased down his helm until 
the great sails flapped idly. 

“ Mr. Stump,” the captain called down the 
hatch. 

A middle-sized, wizened man stuck his head 
up above the deck in answer. 

68 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


59 

Mr. Stump, 141 thank you to invite our 
passengers down to their staterooms and put 
the hatch cover on and lock it,^' Captain Scott 
'Said politely. ‘‘ It’ll be dark in another half 
hour, and then well ‘ bear up ’ and run in to 
close with the land.” 

Benjamin Stump nodded his head in reply 
and turned on his heel to go forward. This 
was a daily occurrence. Captain Scott had 
learned to secure his human cargo at night. 
A mutiny that came near ending fatally to 
him had taught him this lesson. 

“ Oh, Stump I ” Captain Scott raised his 
voice to be heard above the lapping of the 
water and the noise of shaking canvas. I 
hope our disagreement at Suva^ is all for- 
I gotten by now. You canT afford to fall out 
with me. Stump,” he added menacingly after 
! the man had returned and lolled against the 
I shrouds of the main rigging. There’s that 
little affair at the Ellice Islands and the deal 
in Tahiti ; and besides. Stump, you know 
that black boy on our last manifest didn’t 
I; really fall overboard.” 

Stump’s knees shook imperceptibly while 

* Suva — A town in the Fiji. 


6o A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


his thin claw-like fingers worked convul- 
sively. His uncouth mind had not forgotten 
the matter. He had remembered it, lived 
with the remembrance every day of the 
thirty since leaving the Fijis ; and had 
nursed his desire for revenge against his 
captain and benefactor. 

“ Captain Scott, you hadnT any call to do 
what you did,’^ he said doggedly. ‘‘ Those 
people were my friends, and righteous people 
too. They believed the story I told ’em. , 
They gave me human sympathy, and I was , 
downright sorry I wasn’t what I said I was. j 
I was afeared to tell them the truth. They 
took me to prayer-meetings and prayed for 
my soul and one of the young ladies begged 
me to go home to my old parents and be for- 
given.” 

Captain Scott suddenly leaned back in his 
seat and roared with uncontrolled laughter. 

You impious rascal ! ” he exclaimed. 

‘‘ Do you suppose I could permit you to im- 
pose upon my friends with any such tales ? 

I picked you up in Shanghai, do you re- 
member? You either had to go with me 
or to the consular jail for being too light 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


6i 


fingered with other people^s money. You 
told me your parents were dead ; and besides, 
that young lady was getting too sorry for you 
for both her good and yours/' 

Stump's weasel eyes flashed angrily. 

“ You might have split on me differently," 
he said. That girl’s accusing eyes hurt me 
every time I think of it." 

Captain Scott stifled his merriment. 

“ I'm really sorry, Stump," he said. You 
and I have been together a long time, and 
sometimes maybe I don't understand you as I 
should. Sentiment is new to you. This trip 
is going to give us a rich haul, and I'm going 
to give you an extra hundred dollars just to 
square your injured vanity." 

Captain Scott watched the lean figure as it 
ambled forward. He saw him herd together 
the score of black Solomon Islanders, brought 
to sell into slavery on the plantations of the 
Kupuan firm. After all had descended into 
the dark stuffy forehold. Stump, with the 
help of a couple of the Fiji crew, put on the 
hatch cover and locked it. The only air for 
the prisoners was admitted through two small 
ventilators in the deck. 


62 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


Stamp's acting queerly this trip," Captain 
Scott said thoughtfully to himself. Appears | 
to be considering jumping the game. It won’t 1 
do," he exclaimed. Pie knows too much 
about yours truly. Nice gratitude, I call it, 
after I saved him from a Chinese prison." 

Stump walked aimlessly aft and leaned in- I 
dolently against the rail. His face wore a 
frown. 

“ What in blazes is the matter with you, 
anyway ? " Captain Scott exclaimed. Your 
face has been as long this trip as a Fiji 
widow’s. You know me well enough by this | 
time to understand that sort of grump don’t 
go with me. If you don’t cultivate a little 
more pleasantry. I’ll have to dispense with 
your company, no matter how necessary it 
has been." 

Stump gained a measure of confidence in 
the knowledge of war-ships in the harbor of 
Ukula, not over twelve miles distant. The 
very tops of their lofty spars could indistinctly 
be seen against the dark green background 
of the island. 

‘‘I have been considering cutting out this 
here kind of life," he replied. “ That girl in 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


^3 

Suva made me hanker after going back .to my 
own folks. I haven’t heard of them for nearly 
ten years.” 

A sinister look came into Captain Scott’s cold 
gray eyes. Stump was not only a useful man, 
but he shared too many of the schooner’s dark 
secrets. A way must be found to shake these 
sentimental longings loose from Stump s mind. 

“ Some day,” he returned suavely, we’ll 
make a trip with the ‘ Talofa ’ up to ‘ Frisco ’ 
and turn over a new page in our life. You 
are just down on your luck now. Stump,” he 
added kindly. That will all pass away 
when you get ashore among your old cronies 
on the beach at Ukula.” 

In Stump’s mind a battle was being waged. 
He was not naturally a bad man, but was 
weak in character. He had run away from 
home when he was only a lad, and the years 
he had spent upon the sea had only brought 
him lower in the human scale. Hard knocks 
and brutality had been showered upon him. 
He was by nature shiftless and lazy. No one 
had ever taken the trouble to show him the 
error of his ways. Captain Scott had used 
him because he could bend him to his will. 


64 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

The many unlawful acts he had committed 
were at the instigation of his benefactor. 
Stump was not a coward. He had proved 
his fearlessness during many fights with the 
savages of the black islands to the southward 
where the Talofa ” had gone to steal the in- 
habitants to sell them in the labor markets of 
the South Seas. Captain Scott he did fear. He 
feared his cold, calculating but nevertheless 
diabolical temper, backed by a physical 
strength almost superhuman. Ever since 
leaving Suva, Stump had been brooding over 
his misdeeds. Now he must finally make up 
his mind. He w^anted to get clear of the life 
he now hated. He wanted to be free of the 
fear of being arrested and put behind prison 
bars. He wanted to part forever from the 
man he so much feared. He was not entirely 
ungrateful, nor did he harbor extreme revenge 
against Captain Scott. Yet if he opposed him, 
he must, to succeed, betray him into the 
hands of the law even if by so doing he ar- 
rived there himself. 

After dark the Talofa was put under 
more canvas and headed upon a compass 
course set by the captain. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 65 

An hour later Captain Scott and his mate, 
Stump, stood again together near the wheel. 
There were no lights except a dim lantern set 
in a deck bucket. 

Stump, the captain said pleasantly, 
how’d you like to be captain of the 
‘ Talofa ^ ? ’’ 

The mate glanced up in surprise. 

You^ll have to be taught navigation,^’ the 
captain added. That’s most all you need. 
A little chart reading and practice in picking 
your way among the reefs.” 

‘‘ I navigated the ‘ Pango ’ from the Ellice 
Islands to Strong Island,” Stump reminded 
him. 

So you did,” Captain Scott replied. 

Well, maybe you’ll do,” he added, after 
a slight pause. He took the lantern out of 
the bucket and held it over the chart of the 
Kapuan Islands. Then he handed the lantern 
to Stump. 

'' Hold this,” he directed, ‘‘ and I’ll give 
you a lesson in navigating.” 

With parallel rulers, dividers and pencil, 
the captain laid down a line from a position 
he had made on the chart ; then he trans- 


66 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


ferred the line with the parallel rulers to the 
compass printed on the chart, and read the 
compass direction of the line. 

There’s where I figured we were at dark,’’ 
he said to the attentive Stump. There’s the 
entrance to the reef at Saluafata, and that’s 
our compass course. Southeast, I make it.” 
Then he stepped off the distance with the 
dividers. “ Fifteen miles it is.” He glanced 
over the side and then up at the slack canvas. 
“ I guess we’re making about four knots, so 
about eleven o’clock we should be hearing the 
surf on the reef.” 

Captain Scott took the lantern and again 
placed it within the bucket. 

I reckon I can navigate,” Stump said to 
himself. High hopes came into his mind, 
and if Captain Scott could have read them he 
would not have been so sure of winning back 
Stump’s friendship. The mate’s thoughts had 
at first been upon Suva, and his desire to 
go back and square himself with the people 
before whom Captain Scott had humiliated 
him. Especially, Stump had wanted to tell 
the young girl who had tried to make him a 
better man that she had done him some good. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 67 

Once the captain of the ^^Talofa/' he could 
try to be a better man. That in accepting 
such a position in command of a vessel owned 
by Captain Scott, he would be unable to cast 
off his old life, did not occur to him. In fact 
Stump did not consider as crimes the many 
acts they had committed, and were commit- 
ting. To Stump a thing was a crime only 
when the perpetrator was caught in the act 
and put in jail. Stump knew that he owed 
his immunity to Captain Scott. Once in 
Suva without the captain, Stump thought 
he could square himself with the girl, and 
incidentally get even with Captain Scott. 

As he took the lantern from Stump, Scott 
held it up for an instant and observed his 
mate’s face. What he saw there did not 
seem to worry him. “I guess that offer will 
keep his tongue quiet,” he mused. With 
an American war-ship in port. Stump’s apt to 
meet some friends ashore and say too much.” 

“ Hold her on this course, Mr. Stump,” the 
captain said officially. “ I’m going to turn 
in for forty winks. You can call me at ten 
o’clock, and then get the crew all up on deck.” 
Stump grunted and leaned over to look at the 


68 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


compass. He saw the lubber’s point was on 
the course the captain had figured out from 
the chart. Captain Scott descended the ladder 
to the cabin. 

Stump suddenly took up the lantern and 
placed it on the covered chart table. With 
the dividers he measured off a distance on the 
black line the captain had drawn and then 
with the rulers he took off a course to another 
point on the island. 

‘‘ South by east,” he exclaimed in an under- 
tone. “Twelve miles to Ukula harbor. We 
could do it in two hours at this speed.” 
He glanced aloft. The canvas was drawing 
well, the booms lying about three points on 
the lee quarter. The wind was at east north- 
east. The ship was heading southeast, and 
therefore about two points “ free.” South by 
east would bring the wind one point abaft the 
weather beam. 

Stump, after satisfying himself of the feasi- 
bility of his suddenly conceived plan, pro- 
ceeded to put it into execution. Picking his 
way across the sleeping forms on the deck, he 
made his way forward to the galley, where 
the blacksmith’s forge was lashed. That day 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 69 

he had been at work making a weld of wrought 
steel to replace a spreader for the topmast 
backstays. With this bar of steel in his hands, 
he glanced into the galley. It was empty, but 
the coffee kettle, still hot, was on the stove. 
As he poured himself a cup, he ran over in 
his mind the risk he was taking. His timid 
soul quailed. Had he the courage to carry 
through this bold plan of revenge? In the 
harbor of Ukula Captain Scott had said was a 
Yankee man-of-war. To bring the notorious 
Bully ’’ Scott into the arms of the law, red 
handed, with black boys and guns for the 
natives, would be a stroke of diplomacy which 
would bring fame to the name of Benjamin 
Stump throughout all the South Sea Islands. 
A better reward than the command of the 
Talofa ! Once Scott was behind the jail 
bars, convicted of a felony, all his black career 
would be told by those who would no longer 
fear to tell the truth. The girl in Suva would 
hear of it, and would believe her advice had 
influenced him to bring to justice this sheep 
in wolf’s clothing, the bold schemer who 
made others do his evil work. 

“Thinks I ain’t on to navigation,” he 


70 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

chuckled. “ Wasn't in an iron war-ship for 
nothing and helped the navigator to make 
magnets out of steel bars to fix his compass. 

I don't owe him anything," he added, 
when his conscience troubled him as he re- 
membered how Captain Scott had paid his fine 
at Shanghai. He's gotten his money's worth 
out of me, long ago. The score's on my side 
now. I'd rather go to jail anyway than to sail 
with him longer. I swore I'd kill him when 
I got a chance after he broke my arm with 
that belaying-pin. He can't prove nothing 
against me ; that Solomon Islander was acci- 
dentally drowned, and the other things he 

knows of Well, I'm sick of being 

treated like a dog, and that's the end of it." 

The warm coffee revived his waning cour- 
age, and determinedly he started aft to the 
wheel. He laid his steel bar against the rail 
and took his stand behind the helmsman. 

There's a pot of coffee on the galley," he 
said to Mata, the half-breed Fijian quarter- 
master. I'll mind the wheel while you get 
a cup." He had no fear that the man would 
refuse. 

Mata turned over the wheel to Stump with 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


71 

alacrity, and with a grunt of thanks disap- 
peared forward. 

Now was his chance. He was not quite sure 
that the plan would work. He did not under- 
stand the science of magnetic attraction. He 
was only following blindly what he had seen 
the American naval officer do some years 
before. 

His frame trembling with nervous eager- 
ness, he eased the helm spoke by spoke. The 
Talofa pitched and rolled more heavily as 
her bow turned farther from the wind. Then 
Stump was fearful lest the wind might be 
shifting and might catch the sails aback and 
jibe the heavy booms, thus carrying away the 
sheets. At south by east he steadied. A 
bright star almost directly ahead was just visi- 
ble along the line of the two masts. Disre- 
garding the compass he steered for the star, 
taking a last glance at the compass. It still 
read south by east. To reach out and secure 
the bar of steel was accomplished in a second. 
He put it alongside the binnacle. The com- 
pass swung slowly away and came to rest 
within a point of the old course. He raised 
the bar and brought it closer against the 


72 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

wooden binnacle. The course was within a 
few degrees of the one the captain had set. 
Releasing the helm for an instant he tied the 
bar securely to the binnacle. The sails shiv- 
ered and the mainsail gave one loud flap that 
brought Mata in sudden haste to his side. 

“ The breeze’s been hauling astern,” Stump 
said, ‘‘ and those booms are uneasy.” 

Mata took the wheel. Glancing quickly 
into the compass bowl, he saw the course was 
correct. 

“ I’ll ease off* the sheets ; it’ll make her lie 
easy,” Stump explained, as he hurried away 
to carry out his intention. He was filled with 
joyous apprehension — joyful at the success 
of his plan, but apprehensive that it would be 
discovered. He eased off the main fore and 
jib sheets until the sails were spanking full, 
giving more speed, then he walked, with ap- 
parent unconcern, back to the wheel. 

Getting in near the land, I reckon,” he 
said. “ Wind’s apt to blow different in there.” 

Mata seemed puzzled, but his untrained 
mind could not conceive that everything was 
else but natural. A sudden change of wind 
meant to him the approach of a storm, but the 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


73 

sky showed no evidence, nor did the barometer 
which he had read not an hour ago. 

As near as Stump could figure the schooner 
was now approaching Ukula harbor at a speed 
of nearly six knots. 

An hour passed. Then Stump grew restless. 
Taking off his shoes he tiptoed down the com- 
panion ladder to the cabin. All there was in 
darkness. He listened. He could hear the 
captain^s regular breathing. He was asleep. 
Turning to steal back his foot encountered 
an obstruction, and he fell heavily on the 
deck. 

** Is that you. Stump ? Captain Scott asked, 
suddenly awaking. Is it ten already ? ” 

** 'Tain’t much past two bells,^’ Stump has- 
tened to answer. ‘‘ Wind^s hauling to north- 
ward. I was a-going to tell you if you were 
awake.’^ 

The captain grunted. Stump waited in 
silence. No answer. The captain was again 
asleep. Stump moved, this time more cau- 
tiously, up the hatch. 

The night was dark. The sky, brilliant with 
stars, accentuated the shrouded deep. Unde- 
fined shadowy shapes above the southern 


74'^ A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

horizon Stump knew to be the high mountain 
range of the islands ofUkula. 

Within an houPs time lights made their ap- 
pearance. As time wore on more and more 
lights sprang up from the sea. Stump, despite 
the fear of his master’s vengeance, smiled 
grimly. These lights were in the town of 
Ukula and on board the anchored war-ships. 
The “ Talofa ” was being drawn as by a load- 
stone to its deserved retribution. 

The lights came nearer. Stump glanced 
anxiously at the clock inside the companion 
hatch. The hands pointed to quarter past nine 
o’clock. Now he thought he could hear the 
thunder of the surf beating upon the reef. 

Mata seemed wrapped in characteristic na- 
tive reserve. If he saw the lights ahead, he 
considered them not his concern. 

Fishing on the reef at Saluafata,” Stump 
said finally to relieve the tension on his own 
nerves. 

Mata gazed fixedly at the lights for nearly 
a minute. 

‘‘Ukula,” he exclaimed, nodding his head 
in that direction. “ More better you speak 
cap’n.” 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


75 

“ It can^t be Ukula,” Stump exclaimed, 
his voice feigning surprise at the suggestion. 

Big reef, plenty sharks. Cap’n Scott 
smell the channel, you no can see.” Mata 
gave his advice in short sentences. 

As the “ Talofa ” approached, Stump^s nerve 
began to fail him. To wreck the schooner 
was more than he contemplated, yet if Mata 
could recognize Ukula, Captain Scott surely 
would at the first glance and defeat the plan. 
To call Captain Scott now would end in put- 
ting the schooner about and steering out to sea. 
Stump then would have risked his captain’s 
anger for no end. The would-be navigator 
had been confident that he could find the 
narrow entrance between the reefs, but with 
the glare of lights in his eyes, his mind was 
in utter bewilderment. He was in momen- 
tary terror of hearing the roar of the surf 
under the Talofa’s ” bow and the grinding 
of her keel on the treacherous reef. 

‘‘Shark,” Mata exclaimed pointing to a 
monster black fin, traveling along near at 
hand to leeward of the schooner. 

Stump was seized with a sudden wild panic. 
His motor nerves became paralyzed. The 


76 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

confusion of lights and the ever increasing 
roar of the surf caused his knees to tremble 
and his heart to almost stop beating. A voice 
behind him, which a few minutes earlier would 
have brought terror to his soul, now fell like 
sweet music upon his ear. 

“ WhaPs the meaning of this, Mr. Stump 
Captain Scott^s tone, though quiet, betrayed 
great concern. Shorten sail, sir I ” he 
shouted. “ We must be nearly on the reef.^' 
Then of a sudden the situation dawned upon 
Captain Scott. Stump was energetically kick- 
ing the sleeping sailors to wakefulness, bawl- 
ing out his orders to ‘Met go the gear and 
“ man the down-hauls.” 

“ Great guns ! ” the captain cried aghast. 
“ IPs Ukula.” 

Mata grunted an affirmative. 

“ Bear a hand there.” Captain ScotPs voice 
could be heard above the thunder of flapping 
canvas. “ Douse everything. Get this speed 
off* her.” He glanced anxiously into the 
compass ; the schooner was on her course. 

“ Compass gone plumb crazy,” he exclaimed. 
“ YouVe got a jack-knife on I ” He turned 
savagely upon the helmsman, feeling for the 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


77 

knife usually carried on a lanyard about the 
waist, but Mata was not guilty of this great 
nautical misdemeanor. 

In but a few minutes the nimble crew had 
gotten all sail off the schooner, yet the fresh 
breeze still carried her toward the harbor. 

“ Mr. Stump, out on the bowsprit with 
you,^^ the captain ordered. He himself had 
gone to the forecastle, directing in his clear, far- 
reaching voice the helmsman at the wheel aft. 

A white, specter-like line suddenly ap- 
peared close aboard, ahead and to starboard. 

Captain Scott was now full master of the 
situation. To the left of the line of breakers 
was deep water. 

‘‘ Starboard your helm,^^ he cried. Then, 

Steady so.^’ The Talofa^s ” bow was head- 
ing between two long lines of surf, while ahead 
were the lights of a large vessel, and between 
her and the schooner. Captain Scott could see, 
was deep water. 

As they drew nearer the vessel took shape 
out of the darkness. 

‘‘ Ship ahoy,^^ a hoarse voice hailed the 
** Talofa.^' 

Captain Scott purposely waited a repetition 


78 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

of the challenge. He was thinking deeply. 
The silhouette of the war-ship bore nearly 
abeam. If he gave the schooner’s right name 
he would stand a better chance of weathering 
the visit from the war-ship which would be 
made when he anchored. Subterfuge would 
only lessen his chances. It had been too late 
when he had come on deck to put the vessel 
about and seek safety. The reef was too close 
aboard. Now, once inside the harbor, to turn 
and head out to sea would put his vessel 
under suspicion, and a search-light in combi- 
nation with a few shells wmuld bring him 
back. 

The ‘ Talofa ^ schooner from Fiji, Captain 
Scott in command,’’ he answered, loud and 
distinctly. “ What ship is that ? ” 

The United States Cruiser ‘ Sitka,’ ” came 
the answering hail. 

The shrill notes of a boatswain’s pipe on 
board the war-ship, followed by a deep 
throated call and a hurry of shod feet, came 
distinctly across the water. 

The ‘‘ Talofa ” forged slowly ahead. Her 
bow was swung to port as she nosed her way 
into the inner harbor. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


79 


‘‘Let go the anchor/^ Captain Scott cried 
out disgustedly, and as the chain rattled out, 
he quietly walked forward and directed the 
sailor tending it to “ haul to and secure.'^ 
Then he called in Stump, still sitting inert on 
the bowsprit end. 

“ A nice mess you've made of it," he said 
through shut jaws. Stump crawled in slowly, 
stopping just out of arm's reach. As agile as 
a cat. Captain Scott suddenly cleared the dis- 
tance and his strong hand seized the shrink- 
ing mate by the scruff of the neck. He shook 
him until his bones rattled. 

“ Out with it," he exclaimed. His voice to 
Stump had the tone of rusty files. “ How 
did it happen? What did you do to the 
compass ? " 

Stump saw no avenue of escape. The un- 
canniness of Captain Scott's intuition awed 
him to his resolve for truthfulness. 

“ A boat's alongside," Stump sputtered as 
his shifting and terrified gaze caught sight of 
a shadowy form in the water making the side 
of the schooner. The diversion was timely 
for the trembling Stump. Captain Scott re- 
leased his hold, but the guilty mate, off his 


8o A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


guard, received the full force of Captain 
Scott’s iron fist squarely under the jaws. His 
body bent limply backward and fell heavily 
upon the deck, where it lay motionless, while 
Captain Scott strolled unconcernedly aft to 
receive his visitors. 


CHAPTER V 

THE “ TALOFA ’’ IN UKULA 

After dinner all the officers of the Sitka/^ 
as was the custom, took chairs upon the 
quarter-deck. Phil and Sydney, having 
finished their unpacking, had joined the 
circle. The subject of conversation was the 
course of local events. All looked forward 
with ill concealed delight at the prospects of 
active service. 

These natives are great fighters,’^ Ensign 
Patterson exclaimed admiringly, “only they 
don^t know the rules of the game. A few 
hundred white men could hold their own 
against as many thousand.’’ 

“ Don’t bank too much on that argument 
if you are lucky enough to command a com- 
pany of sailors ashore,” Lieutenant Sargeant 
returned thoughtfully. “ The Herzovinian 
sailors some years ago were defeated and 
imany killed because their leader under- 


82 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


rated the soldierly ability of the Kapuan 
warrior.’^ 

It’s certainly a travesty on our civiliza- 
tion.” The doctor joined in the general con- 
versation. Here are three war-ships, each 
with a couple of hundred good rifle shots. 
There are probably all told ten thousand 
warriors in the islands. As far as I can learn, 
two of these war-ships are pulling for Panu- i 
Maflli and one for Kataafa. If we all three 
got together and told the natives to go peace- 
ably to their homes, and then if we proceeded 
to quietly decide to agree upon something — 
well, useless spilling of blood could be averted, 
at any rate.” 

The trouble with your argument is, i 
doctor,” Lieutenant Sargeant replied, that i 
it’s too far up in the clouds. Remember 3 
we’re all human and living on the earth . 
together. All three nations covet these j 
islands. Some day one will get them, so the ! 
question is simply which?” 

“Why should we be interested?” Phil in- 
quired modestly. “ We have no trade here, 
and but a handful of our countrymen live in 
the islands.” 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 83 

“And most of them/^ Lieutenant Sargeant 
replied, “are people one cannot be proud to 
acknowledge. But our real interest is to 
get a coaling station here. Tua-Tua is a fine 
land-locked harbor, and is on the steamer 
route from both San Francisco and Panama 
to New Zealand and Australia. Herzovinia 
may have all the rest if we can hold the 
island of Kulila with the harbor of Tua-Tua. 
That’s why we have a war-ship here.” 

“ What does England want out of it ? ” 
Ensign Patterson inquired. 

“ England,” Lieutenant Sargeant answered, 
“ is interested to see that Herzovinia does not 
grab too much. Through England’s help we 
may be able to get Tua-Tua; without it, 
against the Herzovinian diplomacy, we should 
get nothing.” 

“ The natives of Kapua stand to lose in any 
case,” Sydney remarked. “ I for one would 
like to see the natives remain independent, 
and hope that this will be the time when all 
hands * bust ’ in their calculations.” 

The captain of the British cruiser had been 
paying a visit to Commander Tazewell, and 
Phil, on duty as junior officer of the watch, 


84 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN i 

was called upon an hour later to see that the i 
English captain’s gig was manned for him at ( 
the gangway. 

The two commanders stood in the shadow 
of the poop-deck conversing in loW, serious 
tones. Phil had found that the boat was 
ready alongside and had advanced to report. 
The figure of a man, also in the shadow, his 
body bent forward in a listening attitude, 
caught his eye. Phil stopped, and at once 
the man drew back and walked silently 
away. Phil crossed over to investigate the 
identity of the evident eavesdropper. Sud- 
denly from the gloom of the deck the captain’s 
orderly appeared. 

“ Were you looking for me, sir ? ” the sailor 
said respectfully. 

Phil hesitated. He was on the point of 
denouncing him as an eavesdropper. 

** I thought I heard you call, sir,” the sailor 
added apologetically. I was on a message 
forward for the captain.” 

Yes, report to the captain that the 
English gig is at the gangway,” Phil or- 
dered. The midshipman decided he had con- 
fronted the wrong man. Did you pass any 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 85 

1 one as you came aft ? he asked as an after- 
thought. 

Yes, sir,’' the orderly replied readily. 

I “ Just there a man passed going forward. I 
1 took him for one of the electrical gang. He 
i came out of the cabin, I think.” 

The orderly crossed the deck, saluted stiffly 
and made his report. The two captains 
walked slowly toward the gangway. Phil 
; took his place to the left of the regular offlcer 
of the deck. 

‘‘ Good-night,” the Englishman said, his 
hand to his cap. You’ll find us ready when 
you say the word, Tazewell,” he added in a 
' loud aside as he briskly descended the ladder 
to his boat. 

Phil hesitated whether to tell the captain 
of his suspicions. The man might have been 
an electrician, as the orderly had said. Phil 
crossed over to the exact spot where he had 
seen the man stand and tried to strike the 
same attitude. An electric globe light fixture 
was above his head, but it was not lighted. 
He reached up and turned the switch. The 
! light did not burn. That was why the deck 
there was in shadow. The man must have 


86 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

been an electrician who was examining the 
fixture. The thing was so simple that Phil 
tried to dismiss the incident from his mind. 

What is that orderly^s name? he asked 
of the boatswain’s mate of the watch. 

Schultz,” Boatswain’s Mate O’Neil replied. 
** He’s a ‘ sea-lawyer ' ^ too, Mr. Perry. Ain’t 
worth his ration of ‘ salt-horse ’ ^ either.” 

Then why does the captain keep him as 
his orderly ? ” Phil asked. 

‘‘ Search me, sir, except he’s a good parrot 
for messages,” O’Neil suggested. An orderly, 
you know, sir, hasn’t any use for brains. He’s 
just telegraph wire.” 

Phil smiled at O’Neil’s analogy. 

Schultz,” he thought. I’d feel surer 
that it wasn’t he if his name had suggested 
some other nationality. But then there are a 
lot of such names in our navy.” 

Other and more stirring incidents drove 
Schultz from Phil’s mind. 

Phil and the officer of the deck, Lieutenant 
Morrison, were pacing the quarter-deck scarcely 
twenty minutes later. The older officer was 
one to whom the midshipman had immediately 

^ Sea-lawyer — A sailor socialist. * Salt-horse — Salt pork. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 87 

taken a great fancy. He was a man of strong 
character and even temper, and probably ten 
years the lad’s senior in both age and expe- 
rience. 

“ It looks as if the Kapuan volcano were 
going to erupt again, Mr. Perry,” he said in 
his quiet, thoughtful way. “ There’s been 
peace among the natives for nearly five years, 
and they are in prime condition to be stirred 
into a war. The triple government has suc- 
ceeded under a strong native king. The dead 
monarch, Laupepe, was really a highly edu- 
cated savage. Now there is only one native 
with sufficient influence to avert a war, and 
he is too partial to Herzovinia to be acceptable 
to either our country or England. You know 
we have our eye on Tua-Tua as a coaling sta- 
tion, and if Kataafa becomes king our oppor- 
tunity of acquiring that harbor will vanish in 
smoke.” 

'‘Do you believe there will be a war?” 
Phil asked eagerly. “ Will the sailors be 
landed to fight against the natives ? ” 

“ It’s been done before,” Lieutenant Mor- 
rison replied. “ It really seems a heartless 
thing to do, but that is the only means of 


88 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


enforcing your will on a savage. Force is the i 
only argument he understands. Kataafa has i 
established his government at Kulinuu Point, < 
you know, and sent out word to all the islands 
for his adherents to gather. It^s unlikely that i 
he will give in peaceably if the chief justice's I 
decision is against him. Of course it is no j 
secret who is supporting him in his attitude. 
The Kapuan firm under Klinger is his 
banker.^^ 

There's a sailing vessel just beyond the 
breakers, sir," the quartermaster on watch 
reported from the after bridge. She's not 
carrying lights and seems to be heading for 
the entrance." 

Both officers strained their eyes in an en- 
deavor to make out more plainly a dim shape 
which the quartermaster's trained eyes had 
discovered. Phil's thoughts went back at 
once to the schooner seen from Alice's Mis- 
sion Hill, far out on the ocean. 

Only a trading schooner," Lieutenant 
Morrison pronounced as he focussed his night 
binoculars upon the ill-defined silhouette of a 
large schooner under full canvas. ** By George, 
she's coming through in yachtsman's style. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 89 

Not a sheet started, in a stiff breeze too, and 
not five hundred yards from the reef. 

There I She shortens sail,’’ he exclaimed 
admiringly. “ Her skipper knows the harbor, 
that’s certain, or he wouldn’t be taking such 
chances.” 

The sailing vessel was plainly seen to take 
in all her sails almost at the same time, and 
the next minute she was in the narrow chan- 
nel between the barrier reefs upon which the 
sea was breaking heavily. 

Can it be the ' Talofa ’ ? ” Phil asked ex- 
citedly. Captain ‘ Bully ’ Scott’s ship ? ” 

Lieutenant Morrison had sent word to the 
captain of the arrival of a strange sail, and now 
he waited her nearer approach to “ hail ” her. 

Twice the lieutenant’s hail of inquiry was 
ignored. The schooner was now abreast, her 
speed materially decreased, yet still traveling 
smartly through the water. 

The ' Talofa ’ schooner from Fiji, Captain 
Scott in command.” The answer was bold and 
distinct. 

‘‘By Jove! How did you guess it?” the 
lieutenant exclaimed. Then he answered the 
“ Talofa’s ” inquiry. 


90 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN I 

Commander Tazewell had come up from p 
below and stood at the side of the officer of m 
the deck. 

Let Mr. Perry board her/' he ordered v 
quietly, and as the officer of the deck moved I 
away to give the boatswain’s mate the order 
to call away the running boat, Commander ' 
Tazewell gave Phil some instructions as to i 
his conduct to the captain of the merchant 
ship. 

“ Scott disclaims American nationality,” he 
said. “ I hear he now flies the Herzovinian 
flag. You must go on board under the im- 
pression that he is an American and therefore 
under the control of our consul while in the 
harbor. Ask him of what his cargo consists. 

I must leave the rest to your good judgment.” 

Commander Tazewell waited until he heard 
the rattle of anchor chain as the schooner 
anchored, then returned to his cabin, while 
Phil took command of the boat. 

‘‘ To the schooner,” he said, turning to the 
sailor in the coxswain’s box. ‘‘ Is that you, 
O’Neil ? ” he exclaimed in some surprise. 

Yes, sir. I happened to be handy, so Mr. 
Morrison told me to get in. The regular cox- 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


9 * 


swain wasn’t on deck,” O’Neil replied. “ I’ve 
been hearing of this fellow ‘ Bully ’ Scott 
ashore. All the natives say he’s bringing 
arms for the Kapuan firm, to be sold to 
Kataafa. These natives are like women; they 
can’t keep secrets ; it ain’t in them.” 

Why does he come into Ukula, then ? ” 
Phil asked. 

“ Oh, that’s like ‘ Bully ’ Scott. He could 
have taken them anywhere else, but he en- 
joys doing something unexpected,” O’Neil 
answered admiringly. 

He has probably then already landed his 
guns,” Phil said, disappointedly. “ Of course, 
that’s the explanation. His guilty cargo is 
no longer on board to convict him.” 

O’Neil steered the boat alongside the 
schooner’s sea ladder, and Phil swung him- 
self over the low rail. Everything was in 
darkness around him. 

Bring that lantern here, you lazy black 
rascal,” a big, hearty voice called, and from 
the darkness Phil saw take shape a figure 
that he could have avowed to be that of a 
Puritan father or a missionary bishop. A 
tall man, elderly, dressed in dark clothes, a 


92 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

flowing gray beard sweeping his expansive 
chest. The lantern, brought quickly by the 
black rascal,’' showed a handsome and benev- 
olent countenance. 

I am delighted to see you, sir,” he said 
courteously and in a voice so reflned as to 
fairly startle Phil. 

“ Are you the captain ? ” the lad stammered, 
as he accepted the proffered hand. 

At your service, sir. Captain ‘ Bully ’ 
Scott is the name by which I’m known in 
these waters.” 

Phil took a firmer grip upon himself. How 
much easier he would have found his task if 
Captain Scott had been in appearance the 
pirate he had pictured him. 

My captain. Commander Tazewell, of the 
cruiser ‘ Sitka,’ sends his compliments and 
wishes a little information. The usual board- 
ing information, you know.” 

“ Walk aft, sir,” Captain Scott requested 
politely. You are welcome to the informa- 
tion,” he continued as he placed the lantern 
on the deck table between them, but I take 
it, Commander Tazewell supposed my ship 
was sailing under American colors.” 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


93 

Phil hesitated how to reply. The benevo- 
lent eyes were upon him. 

I can't say as to that," the lad replied 
slowly, “ but the general impression I got was 
that you were an American citizen." 

The lantern shed a dim light over the nar- 
row deck space. The native sailors were 
busily furling the massive sails. Phil heard 
the rhythmical sound of oars in their row- 
locks ; other boats were approaching the 

Talofa." He heard the scraping of a boat 
alongside and the heavy breathing of a man 
climbing up the ship's side. Captain Scott had 
left the midshipman to investigate the new ar- 
rivals. He had made as yet no reply to the 
young officer's insinuating remark. 

Why on earth did you enter the harbor? " 
he heard the newcomer exclaim as he swung 
his leg over the rail. Phil recognized the de- 
cidedly foreign accents of Klinger's voice. 

Aha I " Phil thought. Not so innocent 
after all." 

Scott answered the question in a strange 
tongue, and Phil saw Klinger glance quickly 
in his direction. 

Phil's eye as he attentively listened had 


94 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

been fixed upon the compass binnacle near 
him. He noted a bar of iron jammed closely 
against it and apparently tied in that position. 

Queer manner of correcting a compass/^ 
he thought. 

The two men at the gangway continued to 
talk. Phil recognized the language to be 
Kapuan, of which he could not understand a 
word. 

‘‘To-morrow morning, then, I shall be 
ashore,^^ Captain Scott said finally in English. 
“ When will my cargo be ready ? ” 

“ IPs ready now at the plantations,” Klinger 
answered also in English. “You’ve got to go 
for it.” Then he lapsed again into Kapuan. 
After a few more minutes the man again 
climbed down the schooner’s side and into his 
boat, then Captain Scott walked aft to join 
Phil, while Klinger’s boat pulled swiftly toward 
the shore. 

“ I’m under contract with the Kapuan firm,” 
Captain Scott said pleasantly. “ That was the 
manager, Klinger. He is a very disagreeable 
fellow, and I shall be glad to finish my business 
with him and be off.” 

Phil saw there could be nothing further 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


95 

learned from Captain Scott, yet he was firmly 
convinced from Klinger's remark that some- 
thing had miscarried. There were a number 
of questions, however, usual in boarding an 
arriving vessel, which he proceeded to ask the 
captain. 

“Under what flag are you sailing? " Phil 
inquired. 

“ Herzovinian," Captain Scott replied 
readily. 

“ You have no contraband on board ? " the 
midshipman asked suddenly, his eyes riveted 
upon the sea-captain's face. 

Captain Scott's benign smile returned. 

“ Young man, there's no longer any profit 
in firearms. — Is that why your captain was so 
prompt to send his officer aboard ? " he asked, 
laughing as if he enjoyed the joke immensely. 
“ And besides, with the entire island available 
for a vessel of the ‘ Talofa's ' draft. Captain 
Scott would not be likely to sail into Ukula 
with a cargo of arms ; not while there are three 
consuls ashore, and as many war-ships at anchor 
in the harbor. My cargo consists of cotton 
cloth and canned stuffs for the ‘ firm,' and I 
return to Fiji with a load of ‘ copra.' " 


96 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

“ What is that bar of iron alongside the 
compass?’^ Phil asked curiously. He was 
firmly convinced that Klinger and Captain 
Scott were partners in some unlawful trade, 
but for the life of him could notsee how he could 
drag from this benevolent host, albeit pirate 
and smuggler, information upon which action 
could be taken. 

Captain Scott eyed the bar of steel. Phil 
thought he discerned a slight start, at least a 
hesitancy in his manner. 

That,^^ the captain replied, ‘‘ is one of my 
mate’s clever ideas in correcting the compass. 
I don’t know where he learned it, but it seems 
very effective.” 

Phil called to his boat, thanked Captain 
Scott, and was soon returning to the 

Sitka.” 

After he had gone Captain Scott tore the 
steel bar savagely from the compass. Then he 
walked forward to the forecastle. His sailors 
had about finished stowing the sails. 

” Stump,” he called. He glanced about the 
deck. There was no one there. He picked 
up his mate’s hat from the spot where the man 
had fallen under the blow from Captain Scott’s 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


97 

fist. He turned toward several natives who 
were on the point of going below, their work 
finished. 

“ Find Mr. Stump, he ordered anxiously. 
“ Look for him at once.’^ He himself hurried 
about the ship, seeking him in every dark 
corner ; but Stump could not be found. 

The ungrateful dog I he cried in a fearful 
rage. Captain Bully Scott now showed his 
true colors. He raved and stormed. The natives 
cowered away from him. The steel bar in his 
hand was waved above his head menacingly. 

If I ever get him on board here again I’ll 
smash him into an unrecognizable blot on the 
deck,” he raved. ‘‘ He’s gone I He brought 
the ‘ Talofa ’ into Ukula with this bar of steel I 
He’s probably boasting at this minute how he 
did it.” He shook his fist at the wardship, 
whose lights blazed brightly several hundred 
yards away. It’s a race with ‘ Bully’ Scott,” 
he exclaimed. ** You think you have me 
cornered. To-morrow, or even to-night, you 
will have the story from my sneaking mate. 
Then you will search and discover the arms ; 
but I’ll fool you yet.” 

A swiftly propelled boat swung up alongside 


98 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

the schooner. A tall man swung himself 
with no apparent muscular effort over the 
rail and stood in the darkness seeking some 
one on the schooner. 

Captain Scott, still beside himself with 
rage, spied the newcomer. His rage subsided. 
Again the benevolent expression returned to 
his face while a native quickly brought for- 
ward the lantern and revealed the face of 
Count Rosen. 

Has the American officer gone ? ” the 
count asked hastily, glancing covertly around. 

Captain Scott nodded. Asked if I had 
contraband and seemed satisfied when I told 
him if I had I should hardly have brought 
them into Ukula when there were other ports 
in the island free and open.^^ 

The cbunt^s face showed perplexity. Was 
this American merchant captain deceiving 
him and Klinger? ‘‘ Why did you come into 
Ukula? ” he asked. 

Captain Scott chuckled. ‘‘ A little strata- 
gem, count. You see, Klinger wrote to go to 
Saluafata, but the ‘ Talofa ' preferred Ukula. 
We have until daylight to land our cargo. 
The war-ship will not think we can do any- 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


99 

thing before morning. I told Klinger to send 
over his barges quietly at once.” 

The count was not satisfied. He did not 
share the optimism of Captain Scott. 

With a curt bow he returned to his boat 
and swiftly rowed toward the Herzovinian 
cruiser. As he stepped upon the deck, an 
ofiicer and several sailors of the watch met 
him. They saluted with deep respect. 

“ I wish to see your captain upon important 
business,” he announced. He was conducted 
at once to the cabin. 

He remained in consultation only a few 
minutes. When he returned accompanied by 
the captain, a war-ship’s boat was manned, a 
young officer in command. Count Rosen 
bowed graciously to the attentive captain and 
entered the boat, sending ashore his own after 
paying the helmsman liberally. 

The boat pulled close under the bows 
of the American cruiser, on its way to the 
schooner. The count noticed a war-ship’s 
boat ready manned at the gangway. From 
the schooner came faint sounds of men 
laboring. They had already begun to open 
the hatches. 


100 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


Half-way to the schooner a noise as of a 
swimmer caught the count^s attentive ear. 

‘‘What is that?'' he asked the young 
oflBcer. At the word of command the men 
stopped rowing. Scarcely fifty yards away 
appeared a man's head ; he was making rather 
feeble progress through the water. The boat 
was quickly brought alongside the swimmer 
and the man hauled on board. 

A lantern was held up to his face. It was 
pale and haggard. The man was almost 
exhausted. The count noticed that the 
swimmer’s face was much swollen and dis- 
colored, as if from a blow. Even in the 
tropical air his teeth chattered and speech 
was nearly impossible. The count took off 
his own cape and wrapped it about the trem- 
bling figure. Then the boat pulled for the 
schooner, several hundred yards away. 

The officer and three men scrambled on 
board. Two small lighters were lying along- 
side the “ Talofa," and a score of “ blacks " 
were making ready to discharge her cargo. 

The count asked a hurried question. The 
young officer in his party saluted and an- 
swered in the affirmative, pointing to a bundle 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


101 


under his arm. The boat waited until a flut- 
tering flag rose slowly to the peak of the main 
gaff. It was too dark to distinguish the 
markings, but the count knew that the situa- 
tion had been saved. The Talofa ** was 
under the protection of his navy’s flag. 

The count had hardly cleared the gangway 
before the “ Sitka’s ” boat rounded to under 
the schooner’s stern and shot alongside. 

“ If Captain Scott has sold out to his 
countrymen,” the count exclaimed to him- 
self, he will And it difficult to deliver the 
goods.” 

At the dock he alighted. The rescued man 
was supported up to the hotel between two 
sailors. 

Dry clothes were provided him and from 
his medicine chest the count administered a 
sleeping draught. Once snugly wrapped in 
blankets in one of the rooms of the count’s 
suite, and a native boy sleeping across the 
only exit, the count felt sure that the stranger 
would be on hand in the morning to explain 
the mystery of why a white man was swim- 
ming from the “ Talofa ” toward the Sitka,’^ 
his face bruised and himself half exhausted. 


102 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


It would be worth all the trouble he had taken 
to know. 

The count yawned. It was nearly midnight, 
and in the tropics one must be an early riser, 
for the heat of the morning sun does not con- 
duce to refreshing sleep. He dismissed the 
sailors who had aided him. Then he shut 
his door and threw himself down on his couch 
to think. 

After several minutes, he rose and penned 
two notes. Sealing them, he called one of the 
attendant natives. 

“ Take this one at once,^’ he directed ; the 
other,*^ he added to himself, ‘‘can wait until 
early to-morrow morning.^^ 

The native bowed and disappeared upon his 
errand. 


CHAPTER VI 


THE “ TALOFA's CAKGO 

Phil, upon his return to the “ Sitka, re- 
counted to his captain everything that had 
occurred during his visit to the suspected 
schooner. 

“ I am confident, sir,^’ he ended, that 
Captain Scott has arms on board, and further, 
that Klinger is in much concern that he has 
brought them openly to this harbor when he 
might have landed them elsewhere.^' 

Commander Tazewell commended the mid- 
shipman for his energy. “ It^s a difficult ques- 
tion to settle,^^ he said. ** I have no proof of 
Scott’s nationality. He was born in San 
Francisco, they say, of Irish-Scotch parents. 
He has no right to sail under the Herzovinian 
flag unless his vessel is owned by people of 
that nation or he himself is a subject of that 
country.” 

The commander paced his cabin for sev- 
103 


104 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

eral minutes thoughtfully in silence. Upon 
his shoulders great responsibilities rested. 
Every act must be carefully considered. 
Where other nations were so intimately con- 
cerned, especially in the irritable political 
atmosphere of Kapua, where every white 
man’s hand seemed against his white neighbor 
and the poor, innocent native is but the in- 
strument upon which the selfish desires are to 
be perpetrated, ill judged acts had best be 
avoided. 

“ I can’t see that we can do more now, Mr. 
Perry,” he added in finality. ‘‘ I shall have 
the officer of the deck keep his weather eye on 
the ‘ Talofa ’ during the night.” 

As Phil rejoined the officer of the deck, six 
bells were striking. The Talofa ” was in 
darkness except for her single anchor stay 
light. The night was quiet. The sea breeze 
had decreased in force. 

It was not long before the watchers on the 
American war-ship discovered that the two 
canoe shaped barges of the Kapuan firm were 
being poled out toward the anchored schooner. 
When this was surely noted and reported to 
the captain, he ordered the boat be held ready 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


105 

and for Phil to stand by to return and in- 
vestigate. . 

Probably getting ready for the morning/^ 
Lieutenant Morrison suggested. 

“ If there are arms there/^ Phil replied, 
‘‘ and I am inclined to think there must be, 
Captain Scott will either try to unload to- 
night or else he will leave them in his holds 
until he arrives at a safer place.’' 

Faint sounds of creaking tackles and the 
noise of opening hatches came across the 
intervening water. 

They are going to unload to-night,” Phil 
exclaimed. ‘‘ What a splendid nerve that 
fellow Captain Scott must have.” 

The startling news brought Commander 
Tazewell on deck. 

Have the gig manned,” he ordered quietly, 
and let Mr. Perry take the whale-boat and 
investigate what is going forward there. I 
must break the ice between us and the Her- 
zovinian commander. I cannot stand idly by 
and see such an outrage committed.” 

Once more, with O’Neil in the coxswain’s 
box, Phil was heading for the Talofa.” He 
had barely cleared the “ Sitka’s ” side when 


io6 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


another boat came out of the darkness ahead, 
crossed the whale-boat's bow and sheered 
alongside the schooner. 

From the Herzovinian war-ship," O'Neil 
exclaimed. 

Phil's pulse quickened. The situation was 
growing acute. 

“ If it comes to a fight," he said excitedly, 
** we are two to one," pointing in the direction 
of the British cruiser, “ but a fight here would 
plunge three great nations into war." 

It's only a bluff, sir," O'Neil sized up the 
situation sagely. “ Those fellows are the 
cleverest dodgers you ever laid eyes on. 
They can fight all right, there's no denying 
that fact, but their cleverest dodge is to play 
politics. I've seen them do it against the 
' chinks ' in China, and against the dagos in 
South America. When a Herzovinian officer 
goes too far the king with his right hand 
gives him a hook in the solar plexus, and 
then, to soften the medicine, with his left 
hangs the order of the red tailed eagle around 
his neck." 

Phil laughed nervously. “ What do we do 
to our officers who overstep the bounds of 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


107 

international etiquette ? ” he asked, thinking 
of the predicament in which Commander 
Tazewell found himself suddenly involved. 

That’s easy to answer, sir,” O’Neil replied 
readily enough. “ He gets the solar plexus 
blow from the man at the ^ top,’ and unless 
he’s popular with a few big newspaper editors, 
usually dies an official death. Now Admiral 
Benham, when he belayed that revolution in 
Brazil some years ago, was on the point of 
getting the ‘ hook,’ when a friend of his gave 
him a great ‘ pipe off’ in the New York papers. 
He made the admiral a Farragut and an 
Abraham Lincoln spliced together. The 
^ hook ’ was quietly stowed away for future 
use.” 

As the “ Sitka’s ” whale-boat was steered 
alongside, the foreign boat shoved off. Phil 
peered eagerly through the darkness. He saw 
an erect figure in white in the stern sheets. 

“ Looks for all the world like that Her- 
zovinian count,” he exclaimed excitedly. 
O’Neil strained his eyes to see, but the boat 
was rapidly being swallowed into the night. 

Phil noted the two big cargo canoes along- 
side the schooner, while he saw a score or more 


o8 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


of figures moving about on the deck above 
him. He was on the point of climbing the 
ladder when a voice from above in broken 
English called to him to halt. 

“ No one is permit to enter/^ the man said. 
Phil saw that it was a Herzovinian sailor. 

“ I would like to speak to your officer, if 
there is one there, Phil said haughtily. 

‘‘What do you want?^^ was asked gruffly. 
“ This vessel is chartered by the Herzovinian 
government, and it is not permitted to 
visit.’^ 

Phihs anger blazed into flame. For the 
fraction of a second he was on the point of 
leading his men up to forcibly capture the 
schooner, but the cool, restraining hand of 
O’Neil, an old friend frequently encountered 
by this impetuous youth, brought second 
thoughts to ward off a rash act. 

“ Steady, sir,” O’Neil whispered. “ There’s 
a big flag flapping up there. Can’t tell for 
sure, but I can guess that it’s the man-of-war 
flag. We’ve made them show their hand ; 
don’t spoil it by getting yourself in trouble.” 

Phil sank back into the boat. His foot 
had been on the lower rung of the sea ladder. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 109 

May I inquire what you are unloading ? 
he asked. 

There were indistinct whispers from above. 

“ Furniture for our consulate/’ came the 
answer after some delay. 

You are not unloading guns for Kataafa, 
then ? ” Phil retorted angrily. 

There was no reply. The sailor continued 
to block the rail above where Phil was stand- 
ing. 

** Shove off, O’Neil,” he exclaimed. ** If we 
stay here longer, I couldn’t resist the tempta- 
tion of pitching the whole lot of them over- 
board.” 

“ Excuse me for saying so, Mr. Perry,” 
O’Neil apologized as the sailors rowed 
back to their ship. “ You’ve got to learn 
caution when you’re playing against those 
fellows. They are up in diplomacy. They 
live on it, and to beat ’em you’ve got to for- 
get you’ve got a temper. It ain’t at all nec- 
essary ; in fact, it’s a superfluity.” O’Neil 
was fond of using big words, which he always 
accented on every syllable, as if by so doing 
their vague meaning would be more readily 
grasped. 


no A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

When Phil returned Commander Tazewell 
was on the point of embarking to visit the 
Herzovinian war-ship, but after listening to 
the startling intelligence brought by Phil he 
at once decided that a visit at this time of 
night would be barren of results. Kataafa 
would probably obtain arms for his warriors 
through the Kapuan firm. A higher power 
than the Herzovinian commander had so 
ordained. The fact was, however, worth 
knowing. Plans must be made to meet this 
new development. He might send trusty 
men ashore to spy on those who were unload- 
ing the “ Talofa.^^ 

Just then a native canoe ranged alongside, 
while the paddler held up a letter. The 
quartermaster went down to receive it ; it 
was for Commander Tazewell. 

The captain opened it eagerly. The hand- 
writing was unfamiliar. 

“ My dear Commander Tazewell,” he read 
in perfectly written English. He had already 
glanced at the bottom for the name and had 
seen “ Your obedient servant, Felix Rosen.” 
He continued to read : I crave a thousand 
pardons, but an opportunity has arisen for 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


1 1 1 

me to take a cruise about the Kapuan Islands 
in a schooner. She is now unloading. The 
captain of our war-ship was kind enough to 
come to my aid and direct the work. I be- 
lieve there is some government freight among 
the cargo. I hope to get away in the morn- 
ing, so our trip to ‘ Papasea ^ must only be 
postponed. I have also excused myself to the 
ladies.” 

Commander Tazewell as he finished uttered 
an exclamation of bewilderment. He handed 
the letter to Lieutenant Morrison and then to 
Phil. 

Phil read the letter, while his indignation 
increased at every line of the carefully worded 
explanation. He was on the point of con- 
demning the entire crowd of schemers when 
his glance fell upon the eager face of the cap- 
tain’s orderly, Schultz. 

“ Well I ” Commander Tazewell exclaimed. 

They’ve had the last word. There’s no get- 
ting behind that letter.” 

He turned to Lieutenant Morrison, stand- 
ing expectantly waiting to hear what would 
be the next move. You may secure the 
boats for the night,” he said. 


CHAPTER VII 


THE KAPUAN FIEM 

Carl Klinger had been sitting in his office 
at the Kapuan firm’s store when a loud knock- 
ing aroused him from his reveries. He rose 
quickly to open the door. 

'' What do you want? ” he inquired roughly 
in Kapuan as he threw open the door. A 
native, much out of breath from running, 
confronted him. Klinger saw it was one of 
the pilot’s boat-crew from the pilot station on 
Matautu Point at the entrance to the harbor. 

‘‘The ‘Talofa’ coming in through the en- 
trance,” the man replied. “ Captain Svenson 
send me to tell you quick.” 

“ How do you know it’s the ‘ Talofa ’ ? ” 
Klinger asked incredulously. He could not 
believe that Captain Scott would be so fool- 
hardy as to enter Ukula harbor with his 
cargo. Twenty Solomon Island natives to 
work on the plantations, actually kidnapped 
from their homes, beside several thousand 
112 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


^^3 

Snyder rifles with millions of rounds of am- 
munition constituted the greatest part of the 
Talofa’s cargo. Had '' Bully Scott gone 
mad ? 

No other but Captain Scott could find the 
entrance to the harbor on a night like this/^ 
the man replied positively. Klinger noted 
the utter blackness of the night. He was 
enough of a sailorman himself to understand 
the dangers attending the navigation of a 
vessel so large as the '' Talofa.^^ Even the 
pilots preferred to wait until daylight before 
bringing a vessel through the treacherous 
coral reefs. 

Wait/^ he ordered. Then returning to his 
desk he wrote several pages of a letter, sealed 
and addressed it, then gave it to the native 
messenger. 

Take this to the Tivoli Hotel, he in- 
structed. Find Count Rosen and give it 
into no other hands.’^ 

From the porch of the store he gazed upon 
the harbor, but the darkness shrouded the 
vessel for which his anxious eyes were search- 
ing. His mind was sorely troubled. Bully 
Scott was not a character to pin one’s faith to. 


114 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

That hardened pirate went where either his 
fancy led him or where the greatest amount 
of coin awaited him. The guns had already 
been paid for with Klinger's money ; only 
the freight charges were due. The Solomon 
Islanders were Scott's own venture. The one 
balanced the other. If he should betray the 
Kapuan firm by permitting the war-ships to 
confiscate them as contraband, then the pres- 
ence of the blacks would be known and must 
convict the pirate in any court of the South 
Seas. Nationality could not protect slave 
trading, although it might the importation 
of arms. The Talofa " was sailing illegally 
under Herzovinian protection. Count Rosen, 
while in Fiji, had arranged for that with 
Scott. A word from Klinger would cause 
Scott to be arrested straightway and taken 
before the chief justice. The penalty for slave 
trading was at least ten years in a penal 
colony. 

‘‘ He may have discharged both the slaves 
and the guns," he exclaimed. Then he ap- 
parently realized that this was impossible, for 
he added aloud, Couldn't have done that, 
or I should have heard of it by now." As he 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


115 


still gazed seaward he saw the lights of a war- 
ship disappear one at a time, and knew that 
the schooner was then passing between the 
man-of-war and himself. 

He called loudly to arouse some of the 
native help who lived in houses back of the 
store. 

A native finally appeared. 

“ Get the boat boys,” Klinger ordered hur- 
riedly. “ I shall require them at once.” 

The schooner anchored only a few hundred 
yards from him before the sleepy natives had 
launched his boat. Klinger paced the sand 
impatiently. He was consumed with anxiety 
for the safety of his guns. Thirty thousand 
dollars was to be the profit upon them. And 
besides, the decision of the chief justice might 
be given at any moment. Kataafa must have 
these guns before the decision was rendered, 
for that was required to carry out the coup 
de main ” which must throw the Kapuan 
Islands into the lap of his country. 

Angry and bitter at the man who had 
played fast and loose with his plans, Klinger 
climbed the '' Talofa’s ” side and met the 
culprit face to face. 


ii6 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


Klinger’s first question was more forceful 
than elegant. Captain “Bully” Scott only 
smiled in his urbane style and answered the 
question in Kapuan. 

“ Hold your tongue. There’s an American 
naval officer standing aft by the compass.” 

Klinger saw by the dim lantern’s light the 
sheen of a white duck uniform. 

“ What’s he doing here ? ” he asked suspi- 
ciously. 

“ Only a matter of natural curiosity,” Scott 
replied. 

“ Tell me why you didn’t follow my in- 
structions,” Klinger asked. “ Have you the 
guns on board ? ” 

“ I have everything that I started out to 
bring here,” Scott returned, “and what’s more 
I’m going to land everything as snugly as 
a down East whaler in winter quarters.” 

Klinger felt much relieved. The calm 
confidence of the man impressed him. 

“ How ? ” was all he could ask. 

“ Send off your cargo lighters as soon as 
you can,” Scott explained. “ Get the count 
to ask for a few sailors from your war-ship to 
stay here and prevent the English or Ameri- 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


117 

cans from watching us. The count is then 
to charter the ‘ Talofa * for a pleasure trip 
around the group of islands, starting as soon 
as we are unloaded. We shall unload part of 
the cargo to-night, at once.^^ 

“ I don’t dare to take the guns ashore 
here,” Klinger exclaimed. We can’t keep 
the knowledge away from these prying 
natives.” 

“ Just leave that to me. They don’t go 
ashore here ; that’s my plan,” Captain Scott 
replied soothingly. You do as I tell you. 
That’s all you need worry about. Does the 
count know we are in?” he asked. 

1 sent him a note as soon as I learned it,” 
Klinger answered. I don’t yet see what was 
your object in coming here. Saluafata was 
wide open.” 

** All you’ve got to figure on,” Scott said 
quietly, “ is that I’m here. Say something in 
English now to throw that young cub naval 
officer off the scent and go hurry off those 
lighters. If you see the count tell him to 
come off here or go and get those sailors 
first.” 

Klinger’s mind was relieved of much of the 


1 18 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


strain of uncertainty, yet he felt far from sure 
that Scott's plan would succeed as easily as 
the optimistic Scott imagined. He had not 
entirely acquitted Scott of the charge of 
perfidy. 

The two men then spoke in English in 
regard to the return cargo of the Talofa," 
and parted apparently to meet again in the 
morning. 

As Klinger rowed ashore he met Count 
Rosen going out to the schooner. The two 
boats stopped alongside each other. Klinger 
hurriedly outlined Scott's plan as far as he 
had learned it. 

I’ll drop aboard just to satisfy myself that 
he isn't betraying us," the count said to him- 
self as the two boats went their several ways. 

As the count left the Talofa " and rowed 
toward the Herzovinian war-ship, he was 
nearly convinced that Scott was playing fair, 
but upon his return after picking up the white 
man swimming toward the American war- 
ship, distrust of the pirate again appeared 
strongly in his mind. 

Just before dawn Klinger saw the last one 
of the many boxes brought ashore from the 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


119 

schooner carried and piled upon the porch of 
the store. The twenty new slaves brought by 
Scott, for whom he had paid a handsome sum 
of money to the schooner’s captain, had been 
set to work unloading, and they were now on 
their way under native guard to the Vaileli 
plantation. 

The boxes landed were of all sizes, and most 
of them were left unopened upon the porch 
of the store. Klinger stationed two of his 
boat boys as guard, and then turned in upon 
the small bed in his office. 

“ Mighty queer proceedings,” he exclaimed 
as he closed his tired eyes. But I guess the 
count can handle the situation.” 

When Count Rosen awakened the next 
morning, his first act was to open the blinds 
and glance out upon the harbor. Everything 
was peaceful and serene ; the Talofa ” lay 
snugly at anchor. The firm’s lighters were 
alongside the dock in front of the store. It 
was low tide and the fringing reef was peopled 
with natives gathering the many edibles, 
turtle, crayfish and a variety of shell-fish, that 
form a great proportion of the Kapuan diet. 
The count entered the adjoining room ; the 


120 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

memory of the man picked up from the water 
the night before had suddenly recurred to 
him. The room was empty. He called 
loudly for his native boy. 

‘‘ Where is the stranger ? he asked. 

‘‘ Gone out for a bath/^ the boy answered 
innocently, showing his white teeth in a 
childlike smile. 

“ Bring him back at once,” the count com- 
manded. Tell him I wish to see him.” 

The boy hastened on his errand, jingling 
several pieces of silver he had acquired from 
the very stranger whom he was seeking. 

The count dressed hastily and himself took 
up the search for the missing man. 

On the beach in front of the hotel he en- 
countered his boy quietly sitting in the sand, 
his gaze upon the panorama of the bay. 

Where is he ? ” the count exclaimed, much 
annoyed at the boy^s indifference. 

“ Afraid he’s not here,” the boy acknowl- 
edged. 

If a look could kill the native would have 
died on the spot. 

It was evident that the stranger had sought 
other protection. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


121 


Much annoyed at losing this man, whom 
he believed might have given him informa- 
tion of value to hold over the head of Captain 
Scott, he turned his steps toward his consulate. 

Mr. Carlson was drinking tea on his porch 
when the count arrived. 

I came to tell you,” the count said con- 
descendingly, that I am taking a trip on that 
schooner anchored in the bay. Klinger dis- 
charged the cargo last night. It was all for 
the Kapuan firm.” 

The consul should have been consulted first 
before discharging cargo, but he knew that to 
hold his place as consul he must always meet 
the demands of Klinger. 

I^d like to have you give me the clearance 
papers,” the count continued. “ She will go 
to the plantations for copra and then return 
here. She^s now in ballast.” 

Carlson called his native clerk and told him 
to prepare the papers. The count was named 
as supercargo for the trip. 

After receiving the clearance papers the 
count did not linger at the consulate. 

“ Remember, Mr. Carlson,” he said as he 
rose to go, “if the chief justice decides not 


122 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


to acknowledge Kataafa as king, you have 
agreed to refuse to stand with the other consuls 
to uphold that decision. The eagle, he 
added, “ is a coveted decoration.^^ 

The consul blushed with pleasure and smil- 
ingly nodded his fat head vigorously. 

Having eaten his breakfast and packed up 
sufficient clothes to take with him in the 
Talofa,^^ the count strolled to the store. 
Klinger having been up all night was yet 
asleep in his office. The count seated himself 
on the porch and sent word by one of the na- 
tives standing guard over the freight from the 
schooner. 

Klinger appeared shortly. 

You did a good night’s work, I see,” said 
the count. 

Klinger nodded sleepily. 

“ Has Captain Scott a white man in his 
crew ? ” the count asked. 

Yes, of course. Stump,” the manager re- 
plied, opening wide his eyes. I remember now 
I didn’t see him on the schooner last night.” 

^‘What does this Stump look like?” the 
count asked. Klinger described him ac- 
curately. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


1^3 

‘‘ That's the very man," the count exclaimed 
in alarm. “ He deserted the schooner and 
tried to swim to the American war-ship. I 
picked him out of the water nearly drowned, 
and he slept at the Tivoli Hotel last night. 
He's now loose in Ukula, and may spoil every- 
thing unless we can stop his tongue." 

Klinger, however, did not seem greatly 
alarmed. 

“ It's odd that Scott didn't speak of it, but 
I'm sure he can do no harm," he replied 
quietly. “ Stump is a peaceful, simple soul. 
Hasn't sense enough to know how to harm any- 
body except himself. We are sure to get the 
arms to Kataafa, and the ^ black ' boys are 
now at Vaileli plantation." 

What are you going to do with these more 
or less empty boxes?" the count suddenly 
asked, tapping upon them with his cane, ap- 
parently satisfied over the matter of Stump. 

Leave them right here until I again hear 
from you," Klinger replied. ‘‘ They'll arouse 
every one's curiosity and divert attention from 
the ^ Talofa.' " 

The count nodded. ^‘But not without a 
guard," he said pointedly. “ You must see 


124 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Carlson and have him order the wardship's 
captain to send a file of sailors to spend the 
night at the store. That will help us a great 
deal, and," he added, don't be too secret 
about it." 

“ I understand," Klinger answered know- 

ingly- 

‘‘ I'll be off in the ‘ Talofa ' this forenoon," 
the count said, glancing out on the bay. 
** There doesn't seem to be much breeze, yet it 
will be enough, I dare say, for the * Talofa ' 
to clear the entrance reefs," 

The count was on the point of taking his 
departure. Whoever comes ashore with the 
sailor guard should thoroughly understand 
what is expected of his men," he continued. 

Klinger reassured him, and as he watched 
the commanding figure of the count disappear 
down the road, the manager smiled in perfect 
enjoyment. They didn't make any mistake 
when they sent him to Kapua," he exclaimed 
admiringl3^ 

Several hours later Klinger watched the 
Talofa " beat cleverly against a light head 
wind out of the harbor. He watched the swift 
schooner, under a full spread of canvas, sail to 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


125 

the eastward until the point of Matautu, with 
its high cliffs, shut her off from view. 

So Stump’s deserted that old pirate Scott 
at last,” he said to himself amusedly. ‘‘ When 
thieves fall out,” he quoted. ** I wonder where 
the simpleton is at this minute. — I rather like 
him,” he added thoughtfully, and if I could 
find him I’d be inclined to shield him from 
that hypocrite of a sea-pirate.” 

A native came briskly along the road ad- 
vancing toward Klinger, a letter held out to 
him. Klinger took it, opened and read. 

‘‘ If Stump turns up after I am gone lock 
him up. I will explain when I return. 

Scott.” 

Klinger tore the note into small pieces, 
strewing them on the ground as he walked 
rapidly toward the center of the town. 

At the municipal building he stopped. 
Several native policemen lounged about on 
the ground or squatted upon rude wooden 
benches. 

“ Hey, Johnny Upolu I ” he called, and a 
tall, finely muscled native, attired in a blue 


126 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


cotton lava-lava ^ and helmet, hurriedly drew 
on his blue policeman’s coat over his naked- 
ness. 

You know Stump, mate of the ^Talofa’ ? ” 
he said. The chief of the municipal police 
smiled knowingly. He’s been up to mis- 
chief and the consul wants him taken up.” 

Johnny smiled proudly. He was a strong 
partisan of Kataafa, and was only too eager 
to show his friendliness to the papalangi, 
who were backing his favorite chief. 

“ All right, Missi Klinger,” he replied in a 
strictly businesslike voice. I’ll get him.” 

Klinger smiled his satisfaction and passed 
on his way. 

At the consulate his reception was none too 
cordial. Carlson disliked the ascendency 
which this manager of a commercial firm had 
over one occupying the office of representa- 
tive of his government, especially as Klinger 
made no attempt to soften this evident fact 
by any “ finesse ” whatsoever. Klinger openly 
accused the consul of being soft-hearted, and 
too friendly with the English and Americans. 

“ I must ride to Faleula planation to-night,” 

* Lava-lava — Loin cloth. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


127 

Klinger said brusquely after he had seated 
himself. I haven’t had time to unpack and 
stow away some valuable cargo just received 
from the * Talofa/ and I want a guard of 
sailors from the war-ship to protect the store 
during my absence.” 

Carlson glanced at Klinger in open-eyed 
surprise. 

‘‘What will come next?” he exclaimed. 
“ Sailors to guard your store from robbers I 
Who are the robbers ? ” 

Klinger shrugged his shoulders contemptu- 
ously. 

“ Maybe your friends the English and 
Americans,” he said calmly. “ I have asked 
you for a guard. I know the business of the 
firm better than you do. That’s what I’m 
paid for.” 

The consul bit his lips in suppressed rage. 

“ Is this another one of your tricks,” the 
consul exclaimed, “ to further mortify me ? ” 
He had in mind only too vividly another 
occasion where Klinger had demanded sailors 
to guard his property and then had hoisted 
the flag at the municipal flagstaff, telling all 
the natives that his country had annexed the 


128 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

islands. The flag remained flying only until 
the next mail arrived, when the consul was 
severely reprimanded by his government and 
was forced to haul down the flag and rehoist 
the Kapuan ensign in its place. 

“ I want about a dozen sailors,’^ Klinger in- 
sisted. If you need a little leg stiffening, ’’ 
he added cruelly, '' I don't mind telling you 
that Count Rosen approves, even suggested 
the action." Klinger had sized up his hearer. 

‘‘ That puts another aspect on the question," 
Carlson exclaimed, much mollified by the 
mention of the count's concurrence. When 
do you require these sailors ? " 

“By four o'clock this afternoon," Klinger 
replied, “ and I forgot to say I told the chief 
of police in your name to arrest and hold one 
Stump, a deserter from the ‘ Talofa.' " 

“ Stump I Why, he's English or American ! " 
Carlson exclaimed alarmedly. “ I'm having 
enough trouble without borrowing more." 

“ Another suggestion of the count," Klinger 
said quietly. “ Please send a written warrant 
to Johnny Upolu at once." 

“ Oh, well, then, that's all right," the con- 
sul replied, again changing his tone of voice. 



“l WANT ABOUT A DOZKN SAILORS ” 


i 



^ . 1 % 








•. i I 




Y 


/V* ^, j- r-M 




^ X 






■- v •^' * ijp 

* • « 1^ r *|rP ^ • *w 

■.f '. V . *K 

1 - ■- ‘ v‘ *'■ 


^ t 








. *4 

■■■ 

fPI^ 


• > * / «’ 


’f 


I tp ^ 




SW:: 


•kl 






I * 


'/.' -I 


■HBI 

r^Bi£ 










At\ 


« • A ^ 


..O'-#* 




-. I 


T • 




C 






1 * 




«* 






,►* 




■ e^flr r* 




;k- 


xrt* 




» ♦ 


T ^ 7 


ra • 

^■'B 

•'"■■• vv^ 


- X / 1 ^ * ‘ 




■wur J’ 




‘1 


'/i T X' ' 

t > # r ' > ' ' 


, _ _ h 


-ji- ><*'■'< 






Av ' ' .< 

■‘if '■ . 'i 


. 1^1 




k * 


J. » • 


b> .V*- 




Ml 


A* 





# .' 


^i^'‘ ■ - ' 





1 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


129 

“ The count, Klinger, is a very brilliant diplo- 
mat and I^m sure would not suggest anything 
which would get me into trouble.^^ 

I dare say,’^ Klinger said with a smirk. 
“ The difference between you and the count 
in diplomacy is that he knows what he 
wants.^^ 

Carlson turned very red, but upon second 
thoughts appeared not to notice the implied 
insult. 

With a curt good-morning Klinger took his 
departure. 

“ Why do they send such mountains of 
ignorance and conceit to manage our political 
affairs?'^ he complained. He little reckoned 
that a wise government had sent Carlson to 
act as a check upon Klinger. The radical 
Klinger and the conservative Carlson gave 
the exact mixture required. 

At exactly four o'clock the sailors arrived. 
Klinger took aside the petty officer in charge 
and in detail laid down for him the course he 
was to follow during his absence. 

Then he mounted his little pony and turned 
its head toward Kulinuu, the seat of govern- 
ment of the uncrowned king, Kataafa. 


130 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Arriving at the king's house, he entered 
and was ceremoniously received. 

Kava was made and all the chiefs were 
gathered to drink. 

Klinger talked for nearly an hour, explain- 
ing and directing. Then he rose and bade 
a ceremonious farewell. Accompanied by 
several mounted natives he departed, and in 
the gathering darkness took the trail leading 
back of Ukula and toward the eastward, while 
Faleula, where he told Carson he was going, 
lay in exactly the opposite direction. 


CHAPTER VIII 


AVAO, TAPAU OF UKULA 

The morning following the arrival of the 
schooner, Phil and Sydney were on deck 
early. The Talofa ” was still at anchor. 
The canoe barges were lying alongside the 
dock at the store of the Kapuan firm. Her- 
zovinian colors were flying on the schooner. 
Phil had given his friend a full account of the 
perplexing happenings of the night before. 

“ If the schooner brought guns where are 
they now?^’ Phil asked. 

Sydney shook his head. ** Ask me some- 
thing easier,’’ he replied. ** I’m not good at 
conundrums.” 

After morning quarters and drill the mid- 
shipmen dressed for a visit ashore. This was 
only the second day of their arrival and each 
was full of eager interest to explore. Their 
shipmates poked much good-natured fun at 
them for their strenuosity. 

Hitting the beach before lunch ? ” the 
131 


132 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

doctor inquired with mock gravity. I'm 
afraid I'll have to examine your sanity." 

After landing they walked along the main 
road toward the Kapuan firm's store. As 
they passed, the portly figure of Klinger could 
be seen within the doorway, while on the 
porch a score or more of large boxes were dis- 
played to view. A glance at the barges lying 
at the wooden dock showed them to be empty. 
The cargo had been discharged during the 
night. 

The ^ Talofa’s ' getting up anchor," Sydney 
suddenly exclaimed. 

The schooner's mainsail had been set and 
the crew were plainly seen heaving around 
the capstan, w^eighing the anchor. 

‘‘ The count is ofiP on his cruise about the 
islands," Phil said. “ I wonder," he added 
thoughtfully, if those boxes really do con- 
tain arms ? " 

Very likely," his companion answered, 

but come on. You can't look through their 
wooden sides." 

At the house of Chief Tuamana, Avao met 
them with a demure smile of welcome on her 
comely face. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


133 

“ Missi Alice is here/^ she cried out to them 
joyously as she took each by the hand and led 
them into the cool shelter under her father’s 
roof tree. 

The midshipmen glanced about for Alice. 
The big room was deserted, but from behind 
the tapa curtain came much merry laughter, 
and finally Alice appeared dragging with her 
two very shy young native girls. 

a We’re going to make Kava Fa’a Kapua,”^ 
she said as she seated herself native fashion, 
“ and then we’re going out to ‘ Jumping Rock ’ 
for a swim. If you care to go we shall be de- 
lighted to have you join us,” she told the 
midshipmen. 

Avao brought out a small piece of kava 
root, holding it out for Alice to inspect. 

“ I’m the alii,” ^ Alice said. I’m supposed 
to judge if the root is of good quality before 
the Tapau chews it.” 

Chews it I ” Phil exclaimed. “ I thought 
it was to be a drink.” 

So it is,” Alice replied, thoroughly enjoy- 

* Kava Fa’a Kapna. Kava — A drink something like oat-meal 
water. Fa’a — Native custom. 

* Alii — Chief. 


134 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

ing the depth of PhiPs ignorance of the 
Kapuan custom. Avao is the ^ Tapau ’ ; she 
will chew the kava root ; look 1 she ex- 
claimed admiringly. 

The midshipmen turned their eyes toward 
Avao. Her cheeks were already bulging as 
she sat stoically ruminating the root while 
one of the other girls fed her from time to 
time an additional sliver. 

For fully fifteen minutes Avao was busily 
engaged in reducing the root to a pulpy mass 
which finally she held in her hand and then 
put into the kava bowl beside her. 

Next came the washing. Pure water was 
poured carefully over the mass and Avao 
daintily cleansed her hands and then grace- 
fully squatted before the bowl. 

While one girl poured water slowly into the 
bowl, Avao kneaded the material vigorously. 
The liquid soon began to assume a greenish 
tinge, and the midshipmen involuntarily shud- 
dered at the idea of drinking the concoction. 

** Do you know, kava never agrees with 
me,^^ Phil said in an aside, in order not to 
hurt the feelings of their native friends, espe- 
cially in the morning.^’ 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


135 

I never could see anything in it either/’ 
Sydney answered. I’d much prefer a lem- 
onade or a drink of cocoanut milk.” 

Alice overheard the remarks and smiled 
wickedly. “ This is probably the last real 
cup of kava you’ll get,” she said. “ The 
chewing has gone out of fashion since the 
fomais^ have taught the Kapuans about the 
spread of germs. We got this up especially 
for your benefit.” 

“ It was awfully good of you,” Phil ac- 
knowledged miserably, “ but really I don’t 
believe I need any kava this morning.” 

Avao was now working a strainer^ to and 
fro in the liquid. The grace of her motions 
was delightful to see and elicited much ad- 
miration from the midshipmen. Finally, 
with a last fleck of the strainer, she dropped 
it into the bowl and clapped her shapely hands. 

All present took up the clapping. It was 
the sign that the kava was ready to be 
served. 

The midshipmen dreaded the ordeal. I 
feel like a kid about to be given a dose of bad 
medicine,” Sydney whispered. 

^ Fomai — Doctor. * Strainer — Made of vegetable growth. 


136 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

One of the attendant girls then arose with 
hipu ^ in hand. She held the cocoanut shell 
cup over the bowl, while Avao squeezed the 
liquid into it from the strainer. The mid- 
shipmen were amazed at the charm and grace 
in every movement. Each time the strainer 
was squeezed the cup bearer swung the cup 
in a circle. She then faced about and, with 
the cup held at the level of her dainty chin, 
directed her dark eyes toward Phil. 

“ I^m it,” he groaned. 

Alice, bubbling over with mischief, ex- 
claimed : “ A cup of kava for Mr. Perry.” 

The next second the cup of greenish liquid, 
after a graceful underhand curve, as the girl 
bent her knees, was held before the discon- 
solate lad. 

'' Cheer up,” Sydney exclaimed. ‘‘ Hold 
your nose and shut your eyes and sheUl give 
you something to make you wise.” 

Phil took the cup gingerly. To his horror 
it was nearly full to the brim. 

'‘Must I drink it all?” he asked Alice 
nervously. 

" If you don't, I am afraid Avao will look 

* Hipu — Cup. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


•37 

for another ‘ felinge,’ ” she replied teas- 
ingly. 

“ Count for me, Syd,'' Phil said, “ and when 
you see the folks at home, say I died game.'^ 

He calmly swallowed the contents without 
drawing breath, and handed the cup back to 
the girl. 

‘‘Thanks awfully, no more just now,^^ he 
said laughing, happy the ordeal was over. 

“ What^s it like? Sydney asked. 

“ More like drinking slate pencils than any- 
thing else I can imagine.^^ 

Sydney drank his, shuddering slightly at 
the bitter taste. All the others, including 
Alice, drank as if they thoroughly enjoyed it. 

“ You get accustomed to it,^’ Alice ex- 
plained. “The Kapuans drink it as we do 
coffee or tea.^^ 

After kava was over the lads found that 
native ponies had been provided by Avao, 
and within a half hour the cavalcade started. 
A dozen or more of Kapuan men brought up 
the rear on foot, carrying many kinds of fruit 
and edibles wrapped in banana leaves. 

Alice and Avao led the procession, while 
the midshipmen came next. They trotted 


138 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

along a sylvan path for about a mile, then in 
single file through the wet ‘‘ bush/' 

“ It was lucky for us we happened along," 
Phil said to Alice as they halted to admire a 
great banyan tree close to the path. 

“ It was only by accident I am here, too," 
she answered. Tuamana, Avao's father, and 
all the chiefs loyal to Panu, are in council at 
the ‘Jumping Rock.' The girls are taking 
their feast to them." 

“ Oh I " Phil exclaimed. “ Maybe they will 
not be glad to see us." 

“ The Kapuan is always delighted to have 
papalangi at his feasts," Alice assured him ; 
“ especially as they know the Americans are 
very friendly to Panu's claim to the throne. 
The Kataafa chiefs might not be so cordial if 
we dropped in on them." 

The two midshipmen were amazed at the 
sight when the place chosen for the council 
had been reached. A score or more of war- 
riors were found squatting in the grass near 
the huge rock over which the Vaisaigo stream 
plunged. A large pool of dark water below 
the falls was thus kept filled, and where the 
solid stream curved and fell the blackness 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


J39 

was changed to white foam and iridescent 
spray. 

They found the council was over. The 
business having been finished the chiefs were 
ready to eat and then after a time bathe in 
the deep pool beneath them. 

Tuamana made the midshipmen and Alice 
sit beside him, and all the best things to eat 
were pressed upon the visitors. 

‘‘ Tm glad there’s no more kava,” Phil said 
in an aside to Alice. 

After the feast, consisting of roast young 
pig, yams, breadfruit, roast chicken and 
many kinds of tropical fruit, Tuamana called 
Avao to him. The father talked to his 
daughter fully fifteen minutes. Phil noticed 
that both were serious and solemn. Alice 
had meanwhile risen and wandered away 
with two of her Kapuan girl friends, to 
gather the many variegated flowers and leaves 
so plentiful in the virgin forests. The lads, 
left to themselves, eyed in wonder the warrior 
chiefs seated now in small groups ; some were 
motionless, a look of deep contemplation upon 
their intelligent bronze faces, while others 
talked, but with the same solemn expression. 


140 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Each wore the fighting head-dress of human 
hair, standing above a band of gleaming pearl- 
shell knobs clasped around the forehead. In 
the center of this marvelous, barbaric creation 
of a head-dress and to add picturesqueness and 
color, a bunch of long red feathers plucked 
from the boatswain bird waved in the breeze, 
while in the middle of each forehead, reflect- 
ing the sunlight as it Altered through the 
dense foliage above them, was a small mirror. 
About their necks were hung necklaces of the 
scarlet pandanus fruit. About their waists 
and hanging half-way to their knees were 
tapa and mats of finely woven grass. Below 
this their only covering, the indigo tattooing, 
was visible above their knees. Every warrior 
when he reaches manhood must submit to the 
old women tattooers ; they cover the would- 
be warrior with their intricate designs from 
the waist to the knee, and to refuse to be 
tattooed is considered by a Kapuan a crime 
against manhood. 

Many of the warrior chiefs, as they arose 
to cool themselves in the icy cold waters of 
the Vaisaigo, stopped and shook hands with 
the two officers. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


141 


They seem to think there is a tacit un- 
derstanding between them and ourselves,” 
Phil said to Sydney as one chief after shaking 
hands brought his fui ” ^ to his shoulder as 
if it were a gun and took aim at an imaginary 
enemy. “ I wonder if there is,” he added 
thoughtfully. That chap’s sign language 
either means you are going to furnish him a 
gun, or that he and we are going gunning to- 
gether after the same human game.” 

Avao, after being dismissed by her father, at 
once took Phil and Sydney by the hand, as is 
the Kapuan custom, and led the lads to the 
side of the pool. 

In a few minutes the deep pool was a lively 
scene; men and women were jumping one 
after another from the top of the rock, full 
thirty feet, into the deep pool below. 

After one or two jumps the lads decided 
that to watch the sport was more interesting 
than engaging in it. The icy cold water was 
deliciously refreshing but soon chilled them 
to the marrow. 

I see the reason for the plentiful use of 

* Fui — A bunch of long horsehair on the end of a short stick — 
used by Kapuan chiefs to fan away the flies. 


142 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

cocoanut oil/' Sydney chattered as they 
donned their clothes. “ The natives are in 
the water most of the time, either in the 
ocean or in one of these mountain streams, 
and the water flows off them like off a duck's 
back. We with our unoiled dry skins get 
the chill from evaporation." 

“ I'd rather have the chill," Phil replied, 
shivering to keep Sydney company. 

“ What is the reason of this meeting, any- 
way?" Sydney asked. “Has it a mean- 
ing ? " 

“ I have an idea," Phil said, “ that Tuamana 
was displeased with Avao for bringing us. 
Did you notice that as soon as Alice Lee was 
led away by her two girl friends, the chief 
called Avao to him ? I think he was laying 
down the law to her." 

“ I think you must be wrong, Phil," Sydney 
replied shaking his head. “ Every one seemed 
so glad to see us." 

“ The Kapuans are noted as the most 
generous and friendly nation in the world," 
Phil returned. “ It's almost a religion with 
them. To hurt a stranger's feelings by rebuke 
or inhospitality is something rarely known to 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


H3 

have happened. But come on,” he ended. 

I see our party beckoning us.” 

They clambered up the side of the ragged 
rock and were soon where their ponies were 
tethered. 

Alice called the midshipmen to her side. 

It’s unfortunate for you that we came,” 
she said, but her eager, excited face showed no 
sign of sorrow. 

I thought so,” Phil exclaimed. ‘‘ What is 
it, though ? ” 

The council has prepared a ‘ tonga-fiti ’ ^ 
on the Kapuan firm, and you two American 
officers having been here at the council, 
Klinger will not believe you are innocent.” 
Alice could not keep back her joyful smile. 
** Klinger will probably say you put the 
Kapuans up to it.” 

What are they going to do ? ” both lads 
asked in one breath. 

They have heard of the landing of the 
guns for Kataafa from the ^ Talofa,’ ” she replied 
excitedly, “ and to-night they are going to 
break into the store if necessary, open the 
boxes and seize the guns. They say that this 


' Tonga-fiti — A native word for a stratagem. 


144 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

is the only way they can overcome the great 
advantage in warriors that Kataafa has over 
Panu, their choice for king. Then they are 
to turn the guns over to Judge LindsayJ^ 

‘‘ Gee I Phil exclaimed. What a box for 
us to be in. Who told you? Avao?^^ he 
asked. 

Alice nodded. Tuamana gave her a severe 
scolding and told her to say nothing, but of 
course you know women, and Kapuan women 
in particular, would die in keeping a secret, so 
she confided in all of us while you were in 
swimming.^^ 

‘‘ What are we going to do ? ” Sydney asked 
after they had mounted their ponies and were 
riding slowly down the steep bush trail. 

I wish Avao had kept her secret,’' Phil 
replied, annoyed. Knowing this we must 
take our information to Commander Tazewell 
at once ; but don’t say anything before Miss 
Alice. She is too thoroughly Kapuan to un- 
derstand our reasons.” 

Sydney readily agreed. 


CHAPTER IX 


o’neil's opinion 

Say, Jack,^^ Bill Marley exclaimed, as he 
and Boatswain’s Mate Jack O’Neil, both sailor- 
men from the U. S. S. Sitka,” ambled slowly 
along the beach road of Ukula, where are 
we going to get off in this row everybody seems 
to think is going to start when Judge Lindsay 
tells Kataafa to climb down from his tinsel 
throne and take to the tall timbers ? ” 

Jack O’Neil posed before his shipmates as 
an oracle upon Kapuan affairs. He had sur- 
vived the wreck of an American war-ship in 
the great hurricane nearly ten years before, 
and had lived in Ukula many months until 
relief ships could come from the United States. 

I don’t just know, Bill,” he replied 
thoughtfully. “ These Herzovinians always 
did mix things up so that it was only a guess 
what was going to happen next. You see,” he 
added confidentially, the Kapuan firm has 
145 


146 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

annexed about all the land along the coast, 
and in the valleys of this and other islands, 
and owning all this land they don^t like to 
‘ kowtow ^ ^ to a brown king with a topknot of 
false hair on his cranium, and a grass mat 
slung careless like about his waist line. Kapua 
for the Herzovinians is what they want, and 
they’ve had that idea stuck in their heads for 
a good many years.” 

‘‘ Well,” replied Marley, ‘‘ what do we care? 
Haven’t we got enough land on our hands ? 
Look at all the bad lands out west there in the 
states which we haven’t got no use for, and 
then all the land in the Philippines that our 
little brown brother is fighting us to keep for 
himself. Ain’t we got enough trouble without 
stirring it up way down here south of the 
equator ? ” 

What do you know about politics ? ” O’Neil 
exclaimed severely. Come on into Mary 
Hamilton’s shack, and we’ll get her to 
‘buscar’^ some nice green cocoanuts, and I’ll 
tell you a little Kapuan history that’ll put you 
wise to this intricate situation. I can only tell 

' Kowtow — Chinese word for hnmhling oneself. 

* Buscar — Sailor and soldier slang to hunt for. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


H7 

you, Bill,’’ O’Neil added playfully, ** but I 
can’t give you the brains to understand.” 

Marley smiled good-naturedly. “ I don’t 
know as you’re so all fired smart,” he replied. 

When I’ve wasted as many years as you 
have, I suppose I’ll know almost as much 
as you do.” Marley was nearly ten years 
O’Neil’s junior. 

Go to it ! ” O’Neil exclaimed admiringly. 

You ain’t entirely dead, are you ? Don’t be 
a music box all your life. Bill, that’s my 
advice to you. Play yourself sometimes. 
There’s nothing like a little friendly argu- 
ment to keep the brain well greased up. 
Now you know, or you ought to know at 
any rate, that a gun that ain’t worked every 
day will get all gummed up. That’s the way 
it is with our brains if they ain’t worked. I 
was afraid,” he ended, your head had drawn 
a sweetbread instead of a brain.” 

Mary Hamilton welcomed them to her 
home. Both sailormen apparently were old 
friends of this accomplished woman. In spite 
of her name she was not a papalangi.” Old 
Captain Alexander Hamilton, whose record in 
the islands was good but not entirely spot- 


148 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

less, had taken Mele to wife some fifteen years 
before, and not many years after this happy 
event, sailed his small trading schooner out 
of Ukula harbor never to return. Some had 
said that Alex was living happily in the 
Fiji, but Mele, or Mary, as most every one 
called her, believed that he and his vessel 
had met disaster in a big storm at sea. Mary 
had finally remarried, this time to a chief of 
her own race. Captain Hamilton had owned 
considerable property in Ukula, all of which 
had come to Mary ; so despite being a widow, 
she had been sought by many powerful chiefs. 
Mary was a linguist. She spoke both English 
and Herzovinian fiuently and was as popular 
with one faction as with the other. 

“How’s it for a couple of cocoanuts?” 
O’Neil asked. 

Mary nodded graciously and called loudly 
in Kapuan for the fruit. 

Several girls came shyly forward and 
hospitably attended to the comforts of their 
guests. Mary sat on her mat facing the 
squatting sailors, and smilingly watched 
them quench their tropical thirst with the 
refreshing juice, drunk from the green cocoa- 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


149 

nut itself, out of a small hole cut dexterously 
in the soft shell by two strokes from a heavy 
knife used for the purpose. 

Mary and I can tell you lots of history 
of these islands that never has been written 
in books, O’Neil said proudly after he had 
smacked his lips and thrown the empty 
cocoanut shell among others in the corner of 
the house. Mary’s present husband was 
fighting once with Kataafa against the Her- 
zovinians. How’s he going to fight this 
time ? ” O’Neil asked suddenly. 

Mary put a shapely finger to her lips. 

I figure that he’s got to go against his old 
chief. Mary Hamilton’s husband never could 
fight against the Americans.” O’Neil’s voice 
was persuasively commanding. 

Mary shook her head and patted her sailor 
friend affectionately on the shoulder. 

Fa’a Kapua,” she replied. “ Husband 
maybe fight on one side, wife still stay friend 
with other side.” 

“ That’s the Kapuan custom all right,” 
O’Neil hastened to say, but that ain’t the 
kind of friends we’re looking for. We want 
you and the old man too on our side ; for. 


150 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Mary, we’re going to be on the right side. 
We ain’t looking for land. We ain’t swiping 
native property and refusing to give it back. 
But hold on,” he added interrupting himself, 
I promised to give Bill here a lesson in 
Kapuan history. You correct me, Mary,” he 
said, “ if I wander from the truth. In 
spinning yarns these days if you just tell 
things that happened and don’t invent 
some, your audience’ll go to sleep before your 
eyes. 

The king that just passed over to the 
* happy fishing grounds,’ ” O’Neil began, “ was 
a long time ago, when first made king, no 
friend of the Herzovinians, so they kidnapped 
him and sent him into exile. A native chief 
named Samasese was put in the ‘ chair ’ by 
our friends in the Kapuan firm, and this 
same chief Kataafa then declared war on 
Samasese. Kataafa licked the king’s army 
through the town from one end to the other. 
I saw the fight ; — went along with ’em, and 
had to make a hundred yards in ten seconds 
flat, getting to cover when the Herzovinian 
war-ship opened fire on Kataafa’s warriors. 
If she hadn’t come to Samasese’s help, Kataafa 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


*51 

would have run him clean over the point of 
Kulinuu into the sea. 

Those certainly were warm times. Eh, 
Mary ? O’Neil exclaimed enthusiastically. 
“ We had a skipper named O’Malley in com- 
mand of the old corvette ‘ Wyoming.’ Steven- 
son, the great writer, was living then in that 
big bungalow you can see on the hill back of 
the town, and he got lots of good material for 
his books out of the way O’Malley handled 
the situation. 

O’Malley didn’t care who was king, only 
he didn’t cotton to the high-handed way the 
Herzovinians were running things and asking 
nobody’s consent,” the sailor continued, his 
Irish blue eyes sparkling with joy at the 
remembrance. “ Samasese was ‘ treed ’ at 
Kulinuu and Kataafa with several thousand 
warriors was surrounding him. There was 
an American beachcomber named Blacklock 
who owned a house just outside of the Sama- 
sese lines. One night a party of natives from 
Kulinuu broke into his house to get some 
grub to eat. They scared Blacklock nearly 
into a fit. The same night he got on board 
the ' Wyoming ’ and told a horrible story of 


1 52 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

brutality to O’Malley. The American com- 
mander landed his sailors the next day and 
encamped at the outraged house. The ‘ Wy- 
oming’ anchored in a position to shell the 
Samasese forts at Kulinuu. O’Malley, then, 
all day long wagged his Irish tongue as if it 
was mounted on a swivel and run by a six 
cylinder gasoline motor. All Ukula said 
that at sunrise the next day, unless Samasese 
dug out of Kulinuu O’Malley sure was going 
to use the king’s camp for his annual target 
practice. 

“ The next morning there wasn’t anything 
alive at Kulinuu except dogs and pigs. 
Samasese skinned out during the night, and 
was landed by a Herzovinian war-ship’s boats 
down the coast there about six miles.” 

O’Neil took a deep breath and brushed an 
insistent fly off his forehead. Kataafa 
wasn’t a bit frightened at Herzovinia,” he 
continued admiringly ; he’s a great fighter. 
Bill, I can tell you, and if we get into a row 
with him there’s going to be something doing. 
Kataafa then got a good start and went up 
against Samasese good and hard. A sad 
thing for old ^ Kat.’ Some of his warriors 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


153 

tore down a couple of painted Herzovinian 
flags and used them for ‘ lava-lavas/ The 
outraged commodore swore vengeance and de- 
clared war on the spot. Kataafa had to run 
and get his men into a fort before the Herzo- 
vinian sailors attacked him. He was just 
about snugly fixed when a war-ship came 
trailing along close to the reef to bombard 
this fort and the native town all around it. 
Just behind this ship came O’Malley's ship, the 
‘ Wyoming,’ and the game old Irishman was 
on the bridge. He wore riding leggins, a 
sign that he was going to surprise somebody, 
and an angelic smile was spread all over his 
face. When the Herzovinian ship stopped 
and began to lower her gun ports and run 
out her guns for business, we followed suit. 
I thought we’d be on the reef, sure. O’Malley 
ran the ^ Wyoming ’ inside the other war- 
ship and hung there between her and Kataafa’s 
fort. 

“ The other ship made all kinds of foxy 
moves, but O’Malley covered the plate all the 
time. 

It was nearly sunset when we heard a 
voice pipe up from the other ship. Every- 


1 54 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

body knew it was the commodore who was 
talking. 

< I’ni going to open fire on my enemy in 
that town yonder in about five minutes. 
Kindly chase yourself.^ O’Neil glanced at 
Mary for a few seconds. Those weren’t the 
exact words, maybe, but that was what was 
meant, anyway. 

“ Captain O’Malley’s smile got bigger. He 
took off his white helmet and waved it en- 
couragingly. 

** ^ Go ahead,’ he returned. * I’m in the 
front row and have paid for my ticket. 
Money won’t be refunded at the box office 
this time.’ ” 

What happened ? ” Bill Marley exclaimed 
eagerly. Did you have a scrap ? ” 

“ Did we have war with Herzovinia ten 
years ago ? ” O’Neil asked contemptuously. 
“ No I of course we didn’t, or even you’d ’a’ 
heard of it. 

“ The other ship gave up the game at sun- 
set and we followed her back to Ukula,” 
O’Neil continued after Marley’s interruption 
had been settled. 

A few days later the commodore tried a 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 1 55 

new stunt : to disarm the natives this time. 
The Herzoviiiians landed at night on the big 
plantation of Vaileli. The Kataafa warriors 
got news that they were coming from some 
women in Ukula. Til bet/' he said insinu- 
atingly, that Mary Hamilton can tell you 
who the women were." 

Mary smiled. “ I was blamed," she replied. 
** My second husband was with Kataafa and I 
arrived a few hours before the sailors landed." 

O’Neil nodded. Yes," he said, “ and there 
was an American who also was accused by 
the other side of carrying the news. Anyway, 
the Kataafa warriors attacked the Herzovinian 
sailors. Surprised them, killed about twenty 
and wounded twice as many. It was an awful 
shock to us all, and showed us we had been 
playing too close to a playful volcano. Such a 
thing had never occurred before. We thought 
the natives would not dare to raise their 
hands against the whites. 

“ I was on board another ship then ; the 
‘Wyoming’ had gone home to be paid off," 
O’Neil continued after an impressive silence. 
“ The worst of it all was that the heads were 
cut off the poor sailors. It gave us all cold 


156 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

shivers. We had thought the Kapuans were 
just good-natured children, and we found 
them heartless, brutal savages. — Excuse me, 
Mary,’^ he apologized. “ Ihn not inventing 
now. That’s the plain truth. When your 
people get really excited you ain’t civilized. 
You’re a lot of Apache Indians on the war- 
path. 

“ I don’t know what would have happened 
if the hurricane hadn’t come at that time. 
We found ourselves all on the beach and our 
ships wrecks. Over a hundred or more sailors 
were drowned, and the natives, both Kataafa 
and Samasese, came and risked their lives 
many times to save us out there clinging to 
the wreckage. Mighty near every man saved 
owed his life to the natives. That sort of 
patched things up. We lived ashore for sev- 
eral months, and every one was as friendly as 
you please. You wouldn’t have known there 
ever had been a war. 

Lots of things, I reckon,” he added finally, 
have happened since I have been away, but 
what makes me laugh is to see the Herzo- 
vinians falling all over themselves to make 
friends with this Kataafa, and we, who were 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


157 

his best friends then, falling all over ourselves 
to call him all the bad names we can think of. 

“ It all goes to prove, Bill, and you can take 
this from me without any sugar,'' O'Neil ex- 
claimed, that friendships among natives are 
only good business deals. There ain't no senti- 
ment mixed up in it. 

What's all that row about out there?" 
O'Neil suddenly exclaimed, rising and going 
in haste to look out. He saw several native 
policemen grasping firmly a thin white man 
who was protesting vigorously. 

‘‘That's Missi Stump," Mary Hamilton cried 
aghast. “What is Johnny Upolu arresting 
him for? " 

“ I'm going to find out," O'Neil said de- 
terminedly. He did not like to see a white 
man in the clutch of the natives. To O'Neil's 
mind it lowered all the whites in the eyes of 
the Kapuans to permit such a thing as this. 

Before Johnny Upolu and his two assist- 
ants could recover from the onslaught, the 
big sailor, followed closely by one a little 
smaller but as impetuous, had attacked their 
captive, and the policemen were sitting in the 
sandy road. 


158 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Johnny scowled darkly. A crowd had 
gathered, and like all crowds the Kapuans at 
once sided against the officers of the law, and 
were making insulting remarks to the dis- 
comfited chief of police. 

What do you mean by arresting an inno- 
cent man?'’ O'Neil exclaimed when Johnny 
Upolu had risen to his feet. “ What's this 
island coming to, anyway? Now, you just 
beat it." 

Johnny coaxed a smile upon his face. 

“ Got a warrant," he said, producing a large 
certificate and showing it to O'Neil and the 
crowd. 

O’Neil glanced contemptuously at the offi- 
cial paper. He could not read a word, but he 
recognized the design of the seal. 

Take that out to Kataafa at Kulinuu," 
O'Neil said. That don’t go here. You’ve 
got to have either a lion or another breed of 
bird on your warrant to do business with us.” 

O'Neil considered the matter settled. His 
arm linked under that of Stump, they reen- 
tered the house. The chief of police did not 
follow. An American sailorman on liberty 
was, to his mind, a dangerous object to meddle 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


J59 

with. It was a kind of explosive mixture 
which might go off upon contact. 

O’Neil had never met Stump, but he sized 
him up as accurately as if he had been per- 
sonally acquainted. 

“ You’re from the ‘ Talofa,’ ” O’Neil said as 
Mary called for more cocoanuts and Stump 
composed his ruffled garments. Why ain’t 
you in her now? She’s off on a pleasure 
cruise with a foreign nobleman.” 

Stump wagged his head knowingly. “ The 
‘ Talofa ’ ain’t the breed to go on any pleasure 
cruise,” he answered. “ ‘ Bully ’ Scott’s got 
something on board that he didn’t just like to 
put ashore in Ukula. I’ve been hiding in the 
‘ bush.’ I saw her go, so I started to find our 
consul to get my rights.” 

Who’s been abusing you except Johnny 
Upolu ? ” O’Neil asked. Your countenance 
does look as if it had met a hard round object. 
Who did it ? ” 

'' ‘ Bully ’ Scott,” Stump replied bitterly. 

But I’m quit of him now. He’ll never get 
me on his ship again if I can help it.” 

“Stop swinging all over the compass,” O’Neil 
said rebukingly, “ and steady down on some 


i6o A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

course. We want to hear what you got to 
say.’^ 

Stump laughed a mirthless laugh. That’s 
what I did,” he exclaimed. I steered her 
into Ukula when old man Scott thought he 
was heading straight for Saluafata. Fixed 
the compass, you see. Oh, it’s a great trick.” 

O’Neil began to understand. So Scott 
didn’t intend coming in here last night? ” he 
asked. 

‘‘Not he,” Stump declared joyfully. “He 
was loaded with ‘ blacks ’ and guns.” 

“That’s where you’re dead wrong, then,” 
O’Neil explained, “ for he has landed every- 
thing and a foreign count has hired the 
schooner.” 

Stump gazed in wonder at the speaker. 

“ You don’t seem to know ‘Bully ’ Scott,” 
he said. “ Them guns are in the schooner, 
and he’s going to land them to-night at Salu- 
afata.” 

“ Come with me,” O’Neil commanded tak- 
ing Stump by the arm. “ You ought to 
know if any one does. What we’ve got to do 
is to put our captain wise at once. Is Scott 
an Englishman?” O’Neil asked. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS i6i 

“ Not he I Stump exclaimed. He^s an 
American. Comes from ^ Frisco * ; and the 
‘ I'alofa * was stolen at Hongkong from a 
Chinaman. 

As they passed Klinger’s store, Stump 
stopped to eye the boxes still piled on the 
porch of the store. 

He shook his head as he continued behind 
the two men-of-war’s men. “ Nope, them guns 
must be on the schooner,” he said to himself. 

At the landing they met the two midship- 
men, who had returned from their picnic and 
were waiting to return to the Sitka.” 

O’Neil explained the situation. 

Johnny Upolu had followed his liberated 
captive at a safe distance, and now seeing the 
two officers, respectfully approached, holding 
out the warrant to Phil, and indicating Stump 
with his finger. 

The lad examined it carefully. 

What has he done?” Phil inquired. 

This warrant must be respected, anyway.” 
He turned to Stump. I’ll see the captain 
at once, and you being an American, he will 
ask to have you released if you have com- 
mitted no crime.” 


i 62 a united states MIDSHIPMAN 


Johnny Upolu put his hand on the pris- 
oner's shoulder and led him quietly toward 
the jail. A few yards had been traveled when 
Stump stopped and called. 

May I speak to you a moment, sir, in 
private ? ” 

Phil joined him, and the policeman moved 
away a few feet. 

Keep these here things for me," he said. 
“ You can show 'em to your skipper." 

Phil received a package of soiled letters and 
put them into his pocket. 

Upon arrival on board the midshipmen 
went at once to Commander Tazewell’s cabin. 
They found him deep in thought. 

I have j ust left the consul’s house," the com- 
mander said after waving the lads to seats. Pie 
tells me all the natives believe that the guns 
have been landed. The Herzovinian consul 
a few days ago said he would help to prevent 
a war, and to-day he writes to the American 
and English consul that he must reserve his 
decision until Judge Lindsay has given his 
judgment. Kataafa was summoned by Judge 
Lindsay to appear before him at one o’clock 
to-day and he deliberately waited two hours 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 163 

before he appeared, a Kapuan way of showing 
his independence. It all looks ominous,'' he 
added ruefully. 

Phil began at once to tell of the native coun- 
cil at Jumping Rock and the tonga-fiti " de- 
cided for that night. He also called in O’Neil, 
who had been waiting outside the cabin, and 
that worthy told in picturesque language the 
story of Stump. 

‘‘ Here are some letters this man Stump 
gave me, and said 1 could show them to you, 
sir,” Phil said after O’Neil had completed his 
narrative. 

Commander Tazewell examined the much 
soiled and torn correspondence, while the 
lads and O’Neil waited in silent interest to 
learn of their purport. 

These corroborate the very thing I have 
been anxious to prove,” Commander Tazewell 
exclaimed joyfully. Scott’s a full fledged 
American. He cleared from Suva in the Fiji 
under the American flag. There’s the paper,” 
handing to Phil an English colonial document. 
“What’s this? — a clipping from an English 
paper,” he added wonderingly. “ Schooner 
‘ Ta-Li ’ stolen by a Yankee pirate.” 


i64 a united states MIDSHIPMAN 

Stump said Captain Scott had stolen the 
‘ Talofa ' in Hongkong,” O’Neil said quietly. 

Commander Tazewell glanced quickly over 
the remaining letters. 

“ Stump has brought us the evidence too 
late,” he said disappointedly, spreading out a 
letter on his desk. “ The guns are paid for,” 
he read aloud. Godfried and Company, our 
agents^ will load them upon demand from 
you. Remember, you take them to Saluafata 
at night and send word to me on arrival.” 
Commander Tazewell stopped reading, and 
gazed off wistfully. That was from Klinger 
to Scott. He’ll be unloading them to-night,” 
he added, “ unless they are already in the 
Kapuan firm’s store. If I’d had these letters 
this morning, I’d have sunk the ^ Talofa ’ be- 
fore I would have permitted her to leave the 
harbor, foreign flag and all, until after I had 
given the vessel a thorough search.” 


CHAPTER X 


RUMORS OF WAR 

Commander Tazewell and the midship- 
men dined that evening with Mr. Lee and 
his daughters. 

“ The evidence is all in, commander, the 
American consul said as the party sought the 
cool sea breeze on the ^^lanai,^’^ facing the 
harbor. The chief justice will probably 
render his decision in the morning.^^ 

Tazewell expressed his gratification. 

“ And the Herzovinian consul ? he asked. 
‘‘ Does he still refuse to help to prevent a 
war ? 

Mr. Lee^s face became grave. 

“ The three consuls held a meeting this 
afternoon after you had gone,^^ he said in 
reply. ^^The English consul and I uncon- 
ditionally agreed to support the judge's 
choice. Mr. Carlson seemed ill at ease. He 

* Lanai — A covered porch. 

165 


i66 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


could not be made to give a direct answer on 
any question, and all of a sudden he declared 
he had an important engagement and bolted 
from the room. We saw that he was under a 
serious mental strain.” 

I see,” Commander Tazewell said quietly. 
‘‘ Have you an idea what the decision will 
be ? ” he asked. 

Mr. Lee remained silently in thought for a 
moment. “ Personally no, but my confidants 
among the natives all say Judge Lindsay is 
against Kataafa. I know the judge to be an 
honorable and unbiased man,” he added in 
defense of his friend. That we Americans 
are inclined in our sympathies for Panu would 
have no influence with him at all. This un- 
impeachable testimony of the demand made 
some years ago by Herzovinia and Kataafa’s 
recent discourtesy to the court in keeping the 
judge waiting, besides practically refusing to 
agree to abide by the judge’s decision, may in- 
fluence a judgment against him.” 

Then Carlson must have received instruc- 
tions to uphold the judge’s decision, only in 
case it is favorable to Kataafa,” the com- 
mander said. Now that it appears to be 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 167 

going against him, he refuses to stand with 
you and your British colleague.” 

Mr. Lee nodded his head. “ That seems to 
be the one possible solution.” 

Commander Tazewell had given the consul 
that morning a full account of the Talofa.” 
Now he brought up the subject of the meeting 
of the Panu warriors and their “ tonga-fiti.” 

I had at first thought to advise Tuamana 
against any action by the Panu warriors,” 
Commander Tazewell said, “ but on second 
thoughts I decided it was better to keep my 
hands off and trust it to you. If those boxes 
landed from the ‘ Talofa ^ do contain guns, 
they ought to be seized, but not by natives, 
even though they say they will turn them 
over to the judge.” Mr. Lee nodded his 
agreement with the sentiment. 

“ As soon as I got your note telling me of 
the ‘ tonga-fiti,^ ” Mr. Lee replied, “ I went at 
once to Tuamana. I advised him against ac- 
tion. You see, commander,” Mr. Lee declared 
earnestly, a forcible entry into the Kapuan 
firm^s store will bring the Herzovinian sailors 
ashore to protect their property.” 

Good. I'm glad you saw Tuamana,” 


i68 A Ul^ITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


Commander Tazewell assured him. “ And he 
agreed to carry out your wish ? he asked. 

“ He listened very patiently and seemed to 
agree/^ Mr. Lee said. “ Then he told me that 
he now knew the guns were not at the store, 
but still on the ‘ Talofa ^ and were to be landed 
to-night at Saluafata.’^ 

That is what this man Stump also claims,^’ 
the commander exclaimed. By the way, 
thank you for your promptness in having the 
poor fellow released. O’Neil has him in 
charge on board the ‘ Sitka.’ ” 

While the consul and the commander dis- 
cussed the affairs of the nations, the young 
people had gone to the landing, where O’Neil 
had brought the sailing launch, its sails spread 
and flapping in the gentle breeze. 

Miss Lee had brought her banjo and Avao, 
who joined them, held an Hawaiian ukalele,” 
a small guitar with only three strings. As the 
sail filled and the launch gathered way, their 
young voices charmed the night with a variety 
of plaintive Kapuan songs. Several canoes, 
with both men and women natives, paddling 
lazily across the bay, joined in the songs. It 
seemed like fairyland to the midshipmen. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


169 

They sailed around the men-of-war in turn, 
serenading; then shaped their course for 
Kalinuu Point on the western side of Ukula. 

“ What do you know new ? Phil asked 
Alice during a lull in the music. 

“ That the guns are to be landed from the 
* Talofa ’ at Saluafata to-morrow, and that 
Kataafa leaves Kulinuu with all his people to- 
night,^^ she replied. 

Where did you hear this? he asked won- 
deringly. 

** Avao told me, but every one in Ukula 
knows it,^^ she answered. ‘‘ There's no diffi- 
culty learning secrets. No secrets are kept. 
The difficulty is to recognize a secret from a 
trick." 

“ What do you mean ? " Phil inquired, mys- 
tified. 

Alice laughed lightly thrumming the cords 
of the ukalele " Avao had relinquished. 

When you have a secret which you know 
wdll be found out before you can act," she ex- 
plained, “why, you deliberately spread a lot 
of rumors which will confuse your enemies. 
I have heard that the arms were to be landed 
at Vaileli, and that Klinger had said he was 


lyo A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

going there. That Kataafa was going to Salua- 
fata and also Melie. That the arms were al- 
ready in Kulinuu. That the arms were on 
the Herzovinian war-ship and would be given 
to Kataafa at Saluafata to-morrow, and that 
the arms were in the boxes on the porch of the 
Kapuan firm^s store.^^ 

Well,^^ Phil exclaimed, that is rather 
confusing. And . you decided that the arms 
would be landed in Saluafata?” 

Alice nodded. “ I was all this afternoon at 
the ‘ lookout ^ on Mission Hill,” she said. I 
saw the ^ Talofa ^ far out on the horizon, her 
hull invisible, only the top of her masts in 
sight. With this breeze she could have 
gone out of sight. She’s waiting for dark- 
ness.” 

“ And Kataafa is leaving Kulinuu to- 
night? ” Phil asked. 

I got that from Mary Hamilton,” she an- 
swered. “ Klinger’s wife is from Saluafata. 
Her father is the chief of that village. She 
came to Ukula this morning from the Vaileli 
plantation where Klinger ordinarily lives. 
She left in a canoe for Saluafata.” 

Phil gazed in wonder at the slim girl beside 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 1 7 1 

him. You’re a marvel,” he exclaimed ad- 
miringly. 

Alice smiled. I love to work things out,” 
she acknowledged. “ You men seem so in- 
capable, while the motives of the natives are 
really so easy to follow.” 

The boat was sailing near Kulinuu Point. 
Phil glanced across the intervening water. 

“ Let’s land and walk home,” he said to 
Alice. All agreed readily. 

A passing canoe was called alongside the 
deep draft launch and the passengers quickly 
transferred. 

“ All right, O’Neil,” Phil said. You may 
return to the ship. We’ll go back to town on 
foot.” 

They landed on the pebbly beach and 
walked across to the main street leading be- 
tween the double row of royal palm trees. It 
was a deserted village. Every one had de- 
parted. 

Avao found an old woman crooning in the 
corner of a house and asked her a question. 

The old hag recognized her and turned upon 
her fiercely. 

At the Kapuan firm’s store, on their way 


172 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

home, the party again stopped. Avao’s quick 
eye caught the gleam of metal from the porch. 
She deliberately walked forward until a chal- 
lenge brought her to a stop. Phil saw a 
Herzovinian sailor, gun leveled, walk toward 
the girl, who was standing stock-still several 
paces from the steps. 

The challenge had brought several more 
sailors to the door. Many natives, living in 
houses in the surrounding bush, quickly gath- 
ered, and their childish curiosity pressed them 
forward. Before five minutes had elapsed a 
crowd of nearly fifty warriors and maidens 
were surrounding the front of the store ; and 
as their number swelled, the crowd grew more 
bold and advanced toward the house. The 
sailors stood their ground with guns held 
ready. 

^‘This is awkward,’’ Phil exclaimed ex- 
citedly to Sydney. “ Something’s got to be 
done at once or we’ll have the ‘ tonga-fiti ’ after 
all. Follow me.” He advanced, pushing his 
way through the crowd. The midshipmen 
were in uniform, and the natives gave way 
readily before them. Phil had almost reached 
Avao’s side, when a loud report of a rifle 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


m 

discharged brought him to a stand. Several 
more shots were then fired in rapid succes- 
sion. The natives instantly backed away ; but 
when they found no one had been hurt they 
stopped and began talking and gesticulating 
wildly. 

Phil seized Avao by the arm and turned 
quickly back toward the road. 

From out on the water a rocket soared into 
the sky. 

‘‘ Well, of all the mysteries,” Phil exclaimed 
as they hurried back toward the consulate. 

I wonder if the guns are in that store after 
all?” 

At the landing the Herzovinian cutters 
were beginning to arrive as Phil and his 
party passed. They saw a company of sailors 
with two officers quickly form and move at 
double time up the road. 

The lads soon saw Commander Tazewell 
and the American consul hurrying toward 
the town. 

“ What has happened? ” Commander Taze- 
well demanded of Phil as they met. 

Phil breathlessly explained. I suppose 
the war-ship thought it was an attack,” he 


174 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

ended. “ But why are the guards there at 
all unless the guns are in the store and 
not on board the schooner? Kulinuu is de- 
serted/' he added. We landed there and 
walked home." 

“ Kataafa probably has the guns by now," 
Commander Tazewell said to the consul in a low 
voice which Phil could barely hear. “ Is this a 
plan to trick us into committing ourselves be- 
fore the chief justice's decision is rendered?" 

“ There's no need of our going further, com- 
mander," the consul said, nervously regarding 
his daughters with a fond eye and fearful of 
danger to them. Come back with me. We 
can talk more privately." 

A figure proceeding from the landing was 
soon recognized as the British captain. 

He was given a full account of the incident, 
and appeared very much relieved. 

When I heard the shots and the answering 
rocket from the war-ship," he exclaimed, I 
at once imagined that Kataafa was attack- 
ing Ukula. I have my men ready and the 
boats lowered," he added. “ Thought I'd come 
ashore to look about first. I was going to 
camp them in the British consul's yard." 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


175 

The party, with the exception of Avao, 
returned to the American consulate. The 
Tapau,’’ with an innocent smile and a 
cheery ‘^Talofa, Alii,’’^ slipped away by a 
bush'^ trail. 

What we need, Tazewell, the British 
captain declared as the lanai was reached 
and all were seated quietly, is information. 
We must send out scouts and find out where 
this Kataafa has gone and what that fellow 
Klinger is up to. Our mysterious count,” he 
added, is not out purely for pleasure.” 

I have been thinking over a plan,” Com- 
mander Tazewell replied. This Captain Scott 
is an American citizen and is sailing under 
the Herzovinian fiag. His mate. Stump, who 
deserted him, has given us evidence that he 
came into Ukula with ^ blacks ’ for the Kapuan 
firm and guns for Klinger. All circumstances 
seem to show that we shall find everything 
we are searching for at Saluafata. That’s the 
Herzovinian port, leased to their government, 
and I dare not send there to arrest him. But 
I can send a party by land to observe and 
bring us news.” 

‘ Talofa, Alii— Good-night, sir. 


176 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

'' Right-oh I '' the British captain agreed. 

I think I’ll send my steam pinnace to fish 
along the edge of the reef toward Saluafata. 
There’s rare fishing there. Have you ever 
trolled for these big Kapuan bonitos, using 
pearl shell hooks?” he asked. I have a 
lieutenant who is keen on it.” 

Preparations were made at once for an 
early start on the morrow. The distance to 
Saluafata by trail was about fifteen miles, 
and by water scarcely ten. A code of signals 
was decided upon to facilitate communication 
between the American land party and the 
British steam launch. Mr. Lee took upon 
himself the supply of ponies. The two mid- 
shipmen and O’Neil were selected by Com- 
mander Tazewell to go. 

ril send them openly,” Commanfier Taze- 
well said, as the naval officers rose to take 
their departure from the consulate ; in uni- 
form, of course.” 

Alice Lee endeavored in vain to win her 
father’s permission to go along with the mid- 
shipmen. “ I may be able to help them,” 
she declared. “ I know the trail and speak 
Kapuan.” 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


177 


The midshipmen and O’Neil were on the 
dock at an early hour the next day. There 
they found three intelligent little ponies 
waiting them. Phil carried a sketch chart 
of the road to be taken. 

As they passed through the Matautu dis- 
trict of Ukula, they caught a glimpse of 
Alice’s wistful face gazing upon them from 
the porch of the consulate. She waved them 
a good-bye, while all three raised their caps 
in return. 

“ She’s a plucky girl,” Sydney exclaimed, 
^‘but I feel more free without a girl along. 
We can’t tell ; there may be a chance for a 
fight before we get back.” 

O’Neil chuckled. No fear,” he said. A 
Kapuan wouldn’t raise his finger against a 
naval officer. Unless,” he added grimly, these 
scheming white traders put them up to it.” 

The trail was none too good for their ponies 
and the going was slow. At the village of 
Tangali they stopped and got a black boy, a 
laborer on a near-by plantation, to gather for 
them a few green cocoanuts. The boy readily 
climbed a tall slender tree with the agility of 
a monkey. 


178 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

All he requires is a tail/^ Phil said as the 
black boy dropped the fruit into their hands 
and then came rapidly down to receive his 
reward. 

At the next village, Paulei, which was 
deserted, as was the former town, of all ex- 
cept old women and children, O’Neil pointed 
out the very spot where the American Captain 
O’Malley had tricked the Herzovinian war- 
ship in its attempt to bombard the Kataafa 
warriors nearly a decade ago. 

“ He knew to the king’s taste how to handle 
a foreigner, and they all liked him for it too,” 
he exclaimed admiringly. 

The Irish have a way with ^em,” Sydney 
said, smiling broadly. 

“ Not at all, sir,” the sailor replied. The 
joke apparently passed him by without notice, 
except for a comical deprecating glance at its 
author. ^‘He couldn’t be bluffed and was al- 
ways on the job. If it hadn’t been for him 
the Herzovinian flag would be flying over 
these islands to-day.” 

‘‘ Maybe it would be a good thing,” Phil said, 
and Sydney agreed quickly, to lead O’Neil on. 

“It ain’t the islands, sir; that ain’t what’s 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


179 


making me want to see the foreigners get left/^ 
O’Neil explained. It’s the way they go 
about trying to get ’em.” 

I suppose, O’Neil,” Sydney interjected, 
that you think it would have been more 
gentlemanly and in keeping with the dignity 
of a great country to just take them and let 
the British and Americans like it or lump it 
as they pleased.” 

‘‘ Exactly so, sir,” O’Neil declared. “ That’s 
the way I figure it ought to be done.” 

That’s because you’re Irish, O’Neil,” Phil 
told him jokingly. The Irish always seize 
the government. When they can’t control it, 
they’re against it. The nation that gets these 
islands,” he added, desires to be right before 
the world. To do so she must have a very 
good excuse to seize them. All three nations 
would be glad to take an option on the 
group, but when one appears to be gain- 
ing ground, the other two combine against 
her.” 

That’s it exactly, Mr. Perry,” O’Neil ex- 
claimed. But Herzovinia is gaining among 
the natives. Even though they are taking 
their land, they are making money for the 


i8o A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


natives. The Americans and English are 
standing in the way of Kapuan prosperity.'' 

If one nation owned these islands by 
itself, it could make them a paradise," Sydney 
exclaimed enthusiastically. I have never 
seen such magnificent country in my life. It 
seems a natural garden, and back there on the 
mountains," he added, glancing toward Mount 
Lautu with its crater-shaped summit, they 
say are the finest and most valuable hard 
wood trees in the world." 

“ You may be sure," O'Neil confided, Her- 
zovinia is going to get this island. A states- 
man, way back in the eighties, wrote that in 
his note-book and every one of them ‘ savvys ' ^ 
the plan and is pulling for it. If we just set 
our eyes on the other island, Kulila, with the 
harbor shaped like a shoe, called Tua-Tua, 
and give up our share in this one, England 
would have to pull stakes and get out." 

Both midshipmen laughed. We might 
have known O'Neil would be against the 
English," Sydney said. 

“ What has England ever done for the 
Irish ? " O’Neil replied defensively. 

* Savvys— Understands. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS i8i 

The three horsemen crossed two fair sized 
streams, stopping to allow their ponies to 
plunge their hot noses deep into the cool 
mountain water. From the next hill the 
harbor of Saluafata opened out before them. 

“ There’s the ‘ Talofa,’ ” Sydney cried joy- 
fully. They searched the ocean for the steam 
launch, but the land and trees shut out the 
view to the westward. 

‘‘ Hark I ” O’Neil exclaimed. They listened. 
From below them the faint music of singing 
came up to them. There’s where the people 
are, down there,” he added. 

^‘War canoes,” O’Neil said pointing. The 
beach was hidden by the foliage, but as O’Neil 
spoke several large canoes had suddenly ap- 
peared, being propelled swiftly alongside the 
anchored schooner. 

Phil urged his horse onward. 

‘‘Excuse me, sir,” O’Neil exclaimed nerv- 
ously. “ Those glasses you have there,” in- 
dicating a pair of ship’s binoculars Phil wore 
slung over his shoulders, “ will give us all the 
information we want without going any 
further into the lion’s mouth.” 

Phil gazed upon the sailor in surprise. 


i 82 a united states MIDSHIPMAN 


^‘Do you think there is danger in riding 
down there ? ” he asked. 

O’Neil hesitated. That depends/’ he an- 
swered thoughtfully. 

Upon what ? ” Sydney insisted. 

“ Upon what the white men who are fixing 
this show intend doing,” the sailor said. 

“ We can’t turn back now,” Phil declared. 

It would look as if we were afraid.” 

O’Neil nodded. I guess you’re right, Mr. 
Perry,” the boatswain’s mate replied grimly. 
He knew from experience the danger in ap- 
pearing before an army of armed warriors, 
who have been keyed to the highest pitch of 
savage excitement. 

The three horsemen urged their steeds for- 
ward and descended the hill road leading 
down to the populous town of Saluafata. 


CHAPTER XI 


HIGH CHIEF KATAAFA 

Klinger, after leaving Kataafa and his 
chiefs at Kulinuu, took the trail leading be- 
hind the town of Ukula. He desired if pos- 
sible to keep his movements secret, although 
he felt sure that before long it would be unnec- 
essary. The movement of the Kataafa war- 
riors by both land and sea must be seen by 
the natives of the other faction. 

As he gave his pony his head, he dwelt 
happily upon the success that had so far at- 
tended his efforts. 

The manager and his native companions 
stopped at every village en route. They 
found the warriors collected ready to hear 
his words. Then after he had ridden on, the 
entire village made ready to follow afoot or 
in canoes within the barrier reef. 

It was long past midnight before he reached 
the village of Saluafata. His native compan- 
ions left him, and he entered a large native 
183 


i84 a united states MIDSHIPMAN 

house built off by itself overlooking the bay 
and but a few hundred yards from the beach. 

A native woman, comely and dignified in 
European costume, met him at the door. 

' Talofa’s ’ not in ? ’’ he asked in Kapuan. 

On the table a cold supper was waiting 
him. After eating, he stood for several min- 
utes gazing upon the dark waters of the bay. 

Don’t wake me until the schooner anchors,’^ 
he said to the woman who was then clearing 
away the remnants of his meal. *‘My bed 
ready ? I’m dead sleepy.” 

After Klinger had gone to his room the 
woman took her master’s clothes and pro- 
ceeded to the little stream a few hundred 
yards up the beach. There she began to 
wash the soiled garments. As the day 
dawned the settlement commenced to awaken 
from its slumber. Fishermen launched their 
canoes, paddling out to the reef to seek for 
shell-fish. Native woman after woman ap- 
peared, squatting down in the shallow brook 
to cleanse her own and her husband’s slender 
wardrobe. A babble of musical voices rose 
above the noise of the brook and the distant 
thunder of the surf on the reef 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 185 

“ Missi Klinger come?'" asked one woman 
as she noticed in the early morning light the 
clothes being washed by Klinger’s wife. 

Fanua nodded joyfully. She was very proud 
of being the wife of the manager of the Kap- 
uan firm. She was a comely woman, much 
younger than Klinger, but the first bloom of 
youth had vanished. There yet remained a 
certain charm of movement. Every gesture 
was full of grace, the effect of her long train- 
ing as the Tapau^ of Saluafata, where, 
until Klinger married her, she had led the 
village in all its dances and processions. 

The throng of women continued to increase. 
All plied questions to the smiling Fanua, who 
answered them all good-naturedly. 

When would Kataafa arrive? What was 
going to happen ? Had the chief justice said 
who was to be king ? Could they go ahead and 
build their new house ? Was there to be war ? 
Would the islands be taken by Herzovink? 

The women of Kapua are the source of all 
gossip. Nothing can be kept secret from their 
intelligent intellects. Nor can any of them 


' The Tapau is the leader of the dance called the Siva-Siva,that 
requires much grace and dexterity. 


i86 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


keep a secret an instant. It is their stock in 
trade. As they washed, as they beat out the 
tapa cloth, as they wove the sennit string 
from cocoanut fiber, as they gathered the 
thatch for the roofs of their houses, or as they 
swept clean their houses and adjoining space, 
their voices were always raised to gossip with 
their nearest neighbors. Nothing missed their 
watchful eyes. News travels fast. An inci- 
dent happens in one village and in an in- 
credibly short time the news has been passed 
from house to house and village to village 
until the whole island has buzzed with the 
knowledge. 

The sun had been up several hours when 
the “ Talofa crawled slowly through the 
narrow entrance to the harbor, between the 
reefs, and anchored scarcely a stone^s throw 
from the shore. 

The rattle of her chain awoke Klinger. He 
arose at once. Fanua was at work preparing 
breakfast. He watched in silence from the 
window. He saw a boat lowered and shortly 
shove off for the beach. It grounded in front 
of his house. He waved a greeting. The 
count and Captain Scott stepped ashore. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 187 

Fanua welcomed them at the door with the 
musical Kapuan salutation “ Talofa, Alii,” and 
then hastened away to finish preparing the 
breakfast with her own hands, a duty never 
entrusted to another. 

“Your wife?” the count asked. Klinger 
nodded, but his hasty flush told plainly that 
the acknowledgment was a slight mortifica- 
tion before this superior gentleman. 

“ I'm here for life,” he replied, as if he 
deemed it necessary to explain. “ Kapua is 
no place for a woman of our race to live, and 
I needed a companion. I was lonely. Fanua 
is a queen, in spite of her brown skin.” 

The count put out his hand in ready sym- 
pathy. Klinger took it gratefully, and no 
more was said. 

“Did you get that hound, Ben Stump?” 
Captain Scott asked eagerly after a short 
silence. 

Klinger nodded. “ The chief of police was 
after him. He'll be found unless he left 
Ukula.” 

“ He took with him some papers,” Scott 
explained. “ I didn't find it out until a few 
minutes before we sailed, and the count would 


i88 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


not wait. Have you any one you can trust to 
send back to get them? If the American 
man-of-war captain reads them before I get 
clear of these islands, it's all over with me 
and the ‘ Talofa.' " 

‘‘ We'll have you clear in short order now," 
Klinger encouraged. “ Have you break- 
fasted ? " 

The count and Scott declined to partake of 
the tempting food set before them. Klinger 
ate hurriedly, his wife serving him, while the 
count and Scott walked to the door, from 
whence they looked out upon the increas- 
ingly busy scene. The village of Saluafata 
was being invaded from all directions by the 
followers of Kataafa. They were arriving by 
road, long lines of almost naked warriors and 
half clad women, and the beach was already 
crowded with the canoes of those who had 
come by water. Each village as it arrived 
selected its own spot for preparation. 

Klinger soon joined his companions. Such 
gatherings of the natives were old stories to 
both Klinger and Captain Scott, but to the 
count the sight was one of absorbing interest. 

Kataafa himself and his more important 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 189 

chiefs were in the “ Malae/’ or public square 
of the village, when the three papalangi ar- 
rived there. 

The greeting between the wily old Kapuan 
rebel and the count was ceremonial to an ex- 
treme. Klinger had previously made it plain 
that this papalangi was the special am- 
bassador of his great nation beyond the sea — 
a nation which was much more powerful than 
both England and America put together. 

The would-be king made the count sit next 
to him, and then the ceremony of kava drink- 
ing was begun. This solemn custom of pre- 
paring the root and mixing the kava can 
never be dispensed with at any ceremony in 
which the Kapuans take part. To omit it 
would be a grave ceremonial blunder. 

Kataafa and his important chiefs and their 
women sat under the spreading branches of 
an umbrella tree, whose horizontal boughs 
covered with dark green foliage gave shelter 
from the scorching sun to nearly two hundred 
men and women. The warriors sat in serried 
ranks, close to their chosen king, while the 
women fringed the edge of the densely packed 
crowd. 


igo A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

The various villages formed their companies 
where they had camped upon arrival, and 
very soon they could be heard approaching. 
Faint singing was heard in the distance, be- 
coming stronger as the groups advanced. At 
last the war chant burst out in all its barbaric 
melody. The maidens led, two abreast, their 
Tapau in front, dressed in her most elab- 
orate creation of fine mats, tapa and girdles of 
sweet-scented grass. Her skin, shiny with 
oil, resembling soft satin, and her locks pol- 
ished to the deep bluish black of the raven’s 
wing. Upon her head rested grotesquely the 
Tapau head-dress of human hair and shells 
of pearl. Around her throat were string after 
string of shells and beads. Following the 
maidens came the warriors, each carrying a 
staff to represent a rifle. 

As each village arrived they danced wildly, 
keeping time to their quick, inspiring chant, 
the women, led by their graceful Tapau, sway- 
ing from side to side in perfect time, while the 
men brandished their wooden guns, in panto- 
mime of battle. 

Then the villagers with a sudden burst of 
throaty sound, resembling the final roar of a 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


191 

wave dashing upon the reef, deposited their 
food offerings and withdrew to their appointed 
places, from where they would take part in the 
great “fono,’^^ called by their candidate for 
king. 

Count Rosen gazed in undisguised admira- 
tion upon this wonderfully drilled assemblage. 
All were now sitting immovable on the ground, 
their deep lustrous eyes turned in the direction 
of the inner Qircle of chiefs, where sat their 
calm leader. ^ 

After several minutes of impressive silence 
a chief rose to his feet and struck the attitude 
traditional to the Kapuan of one who wishes 
to be heard. He carried a fui ” of white 
horsehair in his right hand, while his left 
rested upon the knob of his orator’s staff. 

He talked for nearly fifteen minutes, while 
the multitude listened in breathless attention. 

“ He is Kataafa’s talking man,” Klinger 
whispered to the count. He has told them 
that vou are here to help crown their chosen 
king.” 

Captain Scott was becoming restless. These 
native '' fonos ” he knew were often long drawn 

^ Fouo— Native council. 


192 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

out affairs. He was anxious to be free, to sail 
away from the Kapuan Islands. He did not 
relish being stopped by an American war- 
ship. 

“ CanT you cut this short ? he asked 
Klinger. 

Klinger shook his head. 

‘‘ There’s no danger,” he assured Scott. I 
have spies out, and when they bring me news 
of any movement which may threaten us, 
there will be time enough. The Kapuan can- 
not be hurried in his deliberations. We must 
be sure these people are all on our side before 
we give them the means to accomplish our 
purpose.” 

‘^How about my pay for carrying your 
guns? ” Scott asked. 

Klinger nodded. ** I have your check in 
my pocket,” he replied quietly. Then he rose 
to speak to the assemblage. His words were 
eagerly heard by the chiefs, and after he had 
finished the talking man in a loud liquid voice 
gave Klinger’s meaning to the crowd. There 
was a murmur of disapproval from several 
quarters. Chiefs arose at many points in the 
crowd, their talking men beside them. It was 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


193 

considered undignified for a chief to speak for 
himself. 

Klinger’s placid face remained calm. The 
count showed plainly his anxiety, while Cap- 
tain Scott smiled grimly. 

“A little previous, I’m thinking,” Scott 
said,* shaking his head knowingly. 

“ What did you say to displease them ? ” the 
count demanded of Klinger. 

‘‘ I told them that for the support we should 
give them they must refuse to trade with any 
one but us, and that Herzovinia would hoist 
her flag at Kulinuu to protect them from the 
anger of the English and Americans.” 

Is that all ? ” the count exclaimed. 

Klinger hesitated. ** I also said that land 
claims of our people must be acknowledged by 
the king before the arms were given them.” 

The count showed great displeasure. 

“ What land claims? ” he asked. 

All claims,” Klinger replied. The Kap- 
uan firm holds many miles of land claimed 
by English, American and Kapuans. The 
firm cannot give this land up.” 

The count bit his lips. 

‘^It must be now exacted as a condition. 


194 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

count/' Klinger declared insistently. To 
give in upon any point would be considered 
by the Kapuans a sign of weakness." 

'' You have delayed the thing unneces- 
sarily," Captain Scott growled. ‘‘ They'll 
argue this point for hours." 

Klinger was obdurate. 

'‘The harbor of Tua-Tua is one of our 
claims," he said to the count in an under- 
tone. " The American government succeeded 
in leasing some land there for a coaling sta- 
tion. That is the purpose of this condition. 
The Americans must leave that harbor." 

The count appeared puzzled. 

“ After we have taken over the islands," he 
said, “ then we could ask the American gov- 
ernment to give up their lease." 

" I have lived among these people many 
years, count," Klinger explained determinedly. 
“ The island of Kulila, in which is Tua-Tua, 
is for the most part loyal to Panu-Mafili. 
After Kataafa becomes king, he must bring 
that island under control. We must help 
him to take the warriors across the straits 
and supply him arms and ammunition to 
fight successfully against Chief Moanga, who 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


195 

is a very formidable warrior. Otherwise we 
shall not control all of the islands.'' 

While the fono " was still in progress a 
messenger arrived with information of an 
important character. 

Kataafa heard the messenger in silence. 
He did not show by a single muscle that 
the news displeased him. 

‘‘The chief justice rendered his decision 
this morning," Klinger told the count in a 
whisper. “ He has decided that Panu- 
Mafili is the king of all Kapua, and all 
who take up arms against him are declared 
rebels." 

The news had a quieting effect upon the 
natives after Kataafa's talking man had given 
it to them in his loud, eloquent words. 

“A lucky strike," Captain Scott exclaimed. 
“Now I think they will agree." 

Kataafa, through his talking man, gave his 
word that all the conditions made by the 
Herzovinians were accepted. 

The white men rose and left the council. 
The temper of the people, as they passed out 
among them, was again happy. Smiles and 
hand-shakes met them on every side. The 


196 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

war shout was begun and thundered out in 
perfect time. 

'' Kataafa Tupu-e-Kapua ^ — ah I 

The people had declared their willingness 
to be declared rebels, and undertook to defy 
the chief justice. 

Klinger’s face shone with delight. The 
first move was successful. Only one more 
was necessary. Kataafa holding Ukula, while 
the few weak bands of loyal natives were 
driven into the bush by his well-armed co- 
horts, all the enemies of the Kapuan firm 
would be confounded. So long as our con- 
sul has the backbone to hold out against the 
other two consuls,” he said aloud, under 
the treaty no action can be taken by the war- 
ships. Kataafa, with nearly five thousand 
fighting men, can take Ukula and establish 
solidly his claim to the kingship.” 

Captain Scott shook hands with Klinger 
and the count. This check I’m giving you,” 
Klinger said insinuatingly, “ is subject to re- 
call if I find you have not played square. You 
understand.” 

Scott smiled sadly. You see, count, what 

* Kataafa is the kiug of Kapua. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


197 


it is to have enemies who constantly defame 
one’s character. Have I ever acted in any 
other way but square with you?” he asked. 
The count shook his head. 

“ I haven’t examined the guns nor checked 
them over,” Klinger said by way of explana- 
tion. I hope they are as you represent.” 

Scott bowed and walked quickly to the 
beach, where his boat and crew were waiting. 

The fono ” was breaking up. The natives, 
by villages, were marching down to the beach ; 
their weird chants could be heard on all sides. 
Great war canoes, paddled by as many as 
forty warriors, were swiftly launched, and 
sent across the water to the “ Talofa,” where 
they ranged alongside, tier upon tier. Kataafa, 
with half a dozen veteran chiefs, dressed in 
white shirts and lava-lavas,” their fly-flaps 
or fouis held over their right shoulders, 
marched slowly down the street. The high 
chief stopped at the steps of Klinger’s house. 
He now talked without his talking man, but 
in Kapuan, and to Klinger. 

Kataafa has taken the advice of his white 
friends. They tell him now there can be no 
war. Kataafa loves his people ; he loves his 


ig8 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

enemies/^ As he spoke his left hand played 
nervously with a little golden cross on a fine 
gold chain slung about his neck. If he be- 
lieved there would be war he would go away. 
But the ‘Alii papalangi’^ know best, from 
their greater wisdom. Kataafa does not un- 
derstand papalangi thoughts. He under- 
stands only Kapuan. You tell him to go to 
Ukula and make himself king in house of 
Laupepe, who is dead. Very well ; Ka- 
taafa will go, trusting that all you have said 
will be true.” 

Klinger listened, greatly touched. All that 
he had told this honorable old warrior Klinger 
believed would come true. No other con- 
tingency, he thought, could possibly arise. 
Kataafa could march unopposed into Ukula 
and make himself king. The English and 
Americans could not land their men to op- 
pose unless the Herzovinian consul also agreed 
to this action, and Carlson had given his word 
to the count. There might possibly be a few 
shots exchanged, and the foreign war-ships 
might feel called upon to land guards to pro- 
tect foreigners and their property, otherwise 

* Alii papalangi — White chiefs. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


199 


the war would be only a skirmish. Then 
Kataafa, as king, could go to the count or the 
consul and ask for the protection of the Her- 
zovinian flag. That would mean the annexa- 
tion desired for so many years and always 
prevented by the jealous English. 

‘'If it comes out differently than I have 
told you,’' he replied gravely, “ I shall be 
greatly surprised. I have told you exactly 
what I believe, and have kept nothing back.” 

Kataafa seemed satisfied. He smiled and 
bowed ceremoniously. 

Several natives came suddenly down the 
road, holding up their hands and shouting 
loudly : 

“ Papalangi I ” 

Klinger ran out into the roadway to get a 
clearer view. Several hundred yards up the 
crowded thoroughfare, moving slowly through 
the native groups, were three American naval 
men on horseback. They came straight 
toward him ; passed him without sign of 
recognition, but doffed their caps in answer 
to Kataafa’s greeting and rode out upon the 
beach of Saluafata. 

Almost at the same instant Captain Scott, 


200 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


on board the Talofa/^ was much perturbed 
at the sight of an English war-ship^s launch 
that had suddenly appeared at the entrance 
to the harbor. 

One of the riders on the beach produced a 
big red flag which he had been carrying and 
began calmly waving it, regularly. Then 
another flag of similar color was shown in the 
launch. The sailor, sitting quietly on his 
horse, speedily sent a flag signal. Having 
finished, he waited until the flag on the 
launch was waved in return. Then the three 
horsemen rode leisurely along the beach, ap- 
parently but little interested in the marked 
activity before their eyes. 

Klinger and the count were dumbfounded. 
The high chief^s countenance was greatly 
perplexed. 

Klinger- knew only too well the significance 
of that signal, and the old warrior had made 
a shrewd guess at the message conveyed. 

A single word from Klinger, and those 
three men might never return to Ukula. 

Klinger saw at once the great danger in 
which the Americans had put themselves. 
He called loudly, “ Fanua, Fanua.^' 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


201 


His native wife appeared, smiling and 
bowing gracefully. He spoke to her in 
English, a language which Kataafa did not 
understand. Go to those papalangi,” he 
ordered huskily. “Tell them if they don’t 
ride back, away from Saluafata, at once, I 
cannot be responsible for their lives.” Fanua 
obeyed without question. Klinger watched 
her reach their side and saw them stop and 
turn their horses’ heads — then, apparently, 
calmly consider the message brought them. 
Many warriors had gathered ; their attitude 
seemed to Klinger to be growing every min- 
ute more hostile toward the intruders. 


CHAPTER XII 

SMUGGLED ARMS 

As the Americans had ridden their ponies 
through the throngs of natives in the street 
of the town of Saluafata, the cheery '' Talofa, 
Alii had been conspicuous by its absence. 
Instead PhiFs interested glance was met upon 
all sides by haughty and sullen stares from 
the dark-eyed natives. 

“ They^re up to some mischief,’’ O’Neil 
whispered, “ and they don’t like our being 
here. That’s sure.” 

The road or street led now along the sea 
beach. The schooner Talofa ” lay anchored 
a few hundred yards distant. Nearly a dozen 
long narrow-flanked war canoes hovered near 
or alongside. 

Guns,” Sydney exclaimed excitedly. 
‘‘ Look, they are being passed down by hand 
into those boats alongside.” One very large 
canoe manned by nearly forty naked savages 
had just shoved off from the schooner. Its 
202 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


203 

crew was singing a stirring song, keeping per- 
fect time with their paddles as they propelled 
the canoe slowly down the beach. 

“ They’ve blackened their faces,” O’Neil 
declared anxiously. You know what that 
means? ” 

Phil nodded, his heart beating rapidly, and 
a thrill passed through him at the thought. 
To blacken the face was a declaration of war. 

Ride straight on,” Phil commanded, as 
they suddenly made a turn, in following the 
street which now ran at a sharper angle 
toward the beach, and saw before them 
Klinger and the count surrounded by natives 
in chief dress. I can see the British launch. 
She’s just at the reef near the entrance to the 
harbor.” 

There’s Kataafa himself,” O’Neil ex- 
claimed excitedly in a low voice. The old 
man with white hair and moustache.” 

The midshipmen gazed upon him in awe 
mixed with admiration. They had not seen 
him at such close range before. They saw a 
man straight and sturdy, despite his sixty 
odd years of age. His countenance was not 
fierce as they had expected to find it, but in- 


204 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

stead benevolent and kingly. Every other 
face turned toward them showed upon it only 
too plainly distrust, anger and resentment, 
but the high chief Kataafa alone simply 
smiled a welcome and as they drew near said 
Talofa, Alii, Meliti.” ^ 

All three horsemen doffed their caps. 

Talofa, Alii, Kataafa,’^ Phil returned. 

‘‘ Call up the boat, O’Neil,’^ Phil said ; his 
voice was unsteady. “ Say Kataafa has guns, 
and warriors have blackened their faces.’' 
They were now on the sandy beach close to 
the water. 

O’Neil drew from his stirrup leather the 
red wigwag flag which he had brought along 
for the purpose of sending news quickly back 
to Ukula by the steam launch. He began at 
once to wave it over his head and scarcely a 
second elapsed before a similar flag appeared 
in the bow of the tiny launch nearly a mile 
away. 

They were on the job,” Sydney exclaimed, 
while O’Neil went to work rapidly to send 
the signal given him a moment before by 
Phil. 


^ Meliti — Native for American. 



HE HEGAN AT ONCE I'O WAVE I'l 






^IriJ ^i%lP 


vi 




J :V*> \ ^ 

■ *- ' ♦ 

i'i. < 


. V 


» » 


^ r^X 4 ^uy - ^ 




t 'l -V^i ’- 


k/X^ I 
^ •" 


%< 



■ * v' . » 

‘'■K5 

# 

. ! *• . 


F' ^ . 



- ^'^*'r 

1 - -. ^1 






• •" K^J 


♦ < 








• T * . * 


'fW^ - , V* ‘ 

' . 

# ’ • - » . 


J t - 




*H ' 






k • 



i ' if ’it.* 


> 




f* 



•^Ibff - ^., t ■*, .'.»*•■ If( ■• ' 




‘-^* 


t\v>' 








-af.: -x*; 1 ^'*': 

ft* 


» 





' !ta • ■ ?**’• *'■ V'^. ' * * ^ 

^ •x- 'X.*. ,;;^i 

\l ^ 


I • 


♦ * ’ . l/ 






^\1i 


% . K ■-'' f. 
'. !•>/>'■ ^ ^'1* 
s ’W n * 









X- f 

^ ■» 


; f‘ 



i mTJ.rn • • 


•ft 

i.'tf 


.'-^ ■!: ’A l/l. ;;4 
*M-’'i jm^"' y 



IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


205 


Sent and received, sir,’^ he reported as he 
flourished the flag in a farewell signal and 
then calmly rolled it up, sticking it back into 
his boot leather. Then for the first time the 
sailor noted the menacing attitude of the 
people about them. 

A woman’s voice was calling them from 
the edge of the crowd. She was endeavoring 
to reach their side. 

“ Missi Klinger say you better ride back 
quick,” she cried, her handsome face ashen 
with fear for the papalangis. “ Come quick 
with me ; it might be death to stay longer.” 

Fanua put forth her most eloquent English. 
She had been educated at the mission school, 
but like most natives was shy in speaking 
a foreign language. She had taken Phil’s 
bridle rein, and now led his horse through 
the crowd while the other two followed. 

They won’t harm us,” O’Neil declared 
comfortingly, although he did not believe 
his own words. The signal has roused their 
distrust of us, that’s all.” 

We’re spies,” Sydney exclaimed. “ Is it 
unnatural for them to wish to harm us ? ” 

'' There’s no war, sir,” O’Neil said, “ so 


2o6 a united states MIDSHIPMAN 


we can^t be spies. And besides, we’re in uni- 
form.” 

'' Then under the laws of war,” the mid- 
shipman replied, they can take us prisoners.” 

“ The news will get through just the same,” 
O’Neil said gladly, and Commander Taze- 
well will have warning in time to carry out 
whatever plan he has decided upon.” 

Klinger had left his companions and had 
advanced to meet the returning Americans. 
He walked beside Phil’s horse, while Sydney 
and O’Neil pushed forward their ponies to 
hear. The manager’s face was the color of 
his white clothes. 

“ Don’t stop,” he warned anxiously. Even 
the king Kataafa could not hold his people if 
a fanatic should raise the cry to kill you.” 

Phil did his best to look haughty and un- 
concerned, but he could feel his knees tremble 
against his pony’s flanks. 

You’ve started your war, I see,” he mus- 
tered his voice to say, endeavoring to put into 
it a note of scorn and defiance. 

Klinger did not reply to the accusation. 

The Americans were not slow to obey 
Klinger’s directions. Count Rosen scowled 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


207 

darkly as they passed him. The chiefs gazed 
upon them with angry eyes. Even Kataafa 
no longer wore his welcoming smile, but his 
eyes were still mild and kindly. To Phil’s 
surprise the high chief fell into step alongside 
his pony and trudged silently beside them ; 
the other chiefs closed in after O’Neil and 
quietly followed. Fanua, the native woman, 
darted back to her house, upon the steps of 
which the count was left alone. 

Upon reaching the top of the hill, Kataafa 
and his chiefs stopped while the high chief 
waved a dignified salutation. “ Talofa, Alii,” 
he said. Klinger went on a short distance 
farther. He had by this time regained his 
self-control. The danger had passed. 

Tell your captain,” he said earnestly to 
Phil, that Kataafa has nearly every native 
in Kapua on his side. Tell him I say don’t 
let the English throw sand in his eyes. He 
has the one chance in his career to do some- 
thing for his country. If he throws over the 
English and supports us, Tua-Tua and the 
island of Kulila might be given to America, 
and Kataafa will be king without bloodshed.” 

I know nothing of my captain’s plans,” 


2o8 a united states MIDSHIPMAN 


Phil replied distantly, but I will deliver your 
insulting message. I hope to be able,’’ he added 
still haughtily, but with a forced smile, some 
day to repay your civility to us in Saluafata.” 
He saluted stiffly and put his pony to a trot. 

The Americans trotted their steeds until 
the little animals were breathing heavily from 
their exertions. Then Phil allowed his pony 
to walk. They were passing through a native 
village. Beyond the reef the first of the war 
canoes was in sight, and an occasional shout 
from an overwrought warrior as he paddled 
came distinctly to their ears. A curl of smoke 
at the entrance of Vaileli Bay in the general 
direction of Ukula marked the progress of the 
returning steam launch. 

It was nearly two in the afternoon before 
Phil and his party reached town. In the 
road before the British consulate they saw 
drawn up a company of British sailors, while 
on the lawn others were setting up their 
white tents. The British captain and his 
consul hailed them from the porch. 

‘‘ We were getting worried about you,” he 
called, waving a greeting. You see we’ve 
acted upon the information you secured.” 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


209 


Phil stopped and told the Englishmen 
briefly what they had seen, and then con- 
tinued toward the landing. 

Alice Lee spied the horsemen and ran out 
joyfully to meet them. 

“ I began to be frightened, she owned. 
‘‘ I am deathly afraid of a Kapuan when he 
blackens his face.’^ 

Phil could now smile easily, but he ac- 
knowledged that the sensation of being sur- 
rounded by a swarm of excited warriors, bent 
upon war, had not been a pleasant one. 

The midshipmen were brought into the 
consulate, while O’Neil continued to the 
landing. He had caught sight of the Ameri- 
can sailors marching up the road, and as he 
was in the landing detail, he feared some one 
might replace him unless he returned to claim 
his rights. 

Commander Tazewell and the consul were 
on the porch, and the consul’s daughters, 
looking slightly pale over the exciting news 
brought by the steam launch, which had ar- 
rived an hour earlier, led the newcomers 
forward to tell their story. 

‘‘The chief justice gave his decision a very 


210 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


short time after you left town/^ Alice told 
them breathlessly. “ The news was taken to 
Kataafa by a fast canoe. I watched it from 
my * lookout ’ until it went inside the reef off 
Vaileli.” 

Kataafa and Klinger must have known 
it when we saw them, then,^^ Phil said to 
Sydney. ** Klinger thought we knew it, too ; 
that’s why he gave us the message.” 

“ What was it ? ” Alice asked eagerly, over- 
hearing Phil’s aside. 

“ To cut loose from the English and join 
his country in supporting Kataafa,” Phil told 
her. ** He would like to see America disre- 
gard the chief justice’s decision.” 

That looks as if Klinger and his crowd 
were worried over the outcome,” Alice said 
thoughtfully, while the midshipmen nodded 
their heads in agreement. 

Mr. Lee seemed very uneasy while Phil as 
spokesman gave a minute account of their 
ride to Saluafata. He told of the hostile atti- 
tude of the warriors and Klinger’s fears for 
their safety, and he spoke admiringly of the 
old high chief Kataafa, who had acted as their 
personal body-guard until the edge of the town 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 21 1 

had been reached. Phil also did not hesitate 
to deliver Klinger’s message which he had 
haughtily scorned but agreed to repeat to his 
captain. 

Commander Tazewell listened gravely, but 
to outward appearance was unmoved. 

Klinger has shown us his game,” he said 
after Phil had ended. 

The midshipmen would not accept the invi- 
tation to stay longer. They were hungry and 
dusty after their long ride, and pined for a 
bath and clean clothes. 

As they proceeded toward the boat landing, 
they gazed admiringly at their sailors, pitch- 
ing tents, erecting shelters and making all ar- 
rangement for a protracted stay on shore. 
Lieutenant Morrison stopped them to hear the 
news they had brought from the Kataafa camp. 
The lieutenant was in command of the Ameri- 
can sailors landed to protect American lives 
and property that would be in grave danger 
when the rebels attacked Ukula. Ensign Pat- 
terson, a big raw-boned young man, with a 
happy, irresponsible disposition, but greatly 
loved by all for his generous nature and rash 
fearlessness, was Lieutenant Morrison’s assist- 


212 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


ant. He waved a joyful greeting from a mass 
of luggage, the assorting of which he was 
busily directing. 

It certainly looks like business,’^ Sydney 
exclaimed as they left the busy scene behind 
and arrived in sight of the landing, where they 
found a boat was awaiting them. 

They did not tarry long on the ship, but 
were soon again on their way ashore. 

As the midshipmen passed again through 
the American camp, half-way between the 
landing and the American consulate, they es- 
pied O’NeiTs soldierly figure mustering the 
guard to be posted for the protection of the 
west end of the Matautu district of the town. 
The English sailors were guarding the eastern 
end. 

The boatswain’s mate brought his men to 
attention, and gravely saluted the passing 
young officers. 

Lieutenant Morrison and Ensign Patterson 
were inspecting their position. A Colt gun 
commanded the main road and another the 
road leading inland along the Vaisaigo River. 
Temporary barricades were being built back 
of the camp, facing the bush, behind which a 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


213 


stand could be made if by chance the attack 
should come from that direction. This, how- 
ever, was unlikely, owing to the dense under- 
brush and the boggy soil. 

Phil and Sydney greatly envied the officers 
with the sailors. They were sure that there 
would be fighting soon, and very much feared 
that they would find themselves out of it. 
However, Commander Tazewell had shown 
the midshipmen that he trusted them and was 
willing to give them hazardous and important 
duty, and they had reason to congratulate 
themselves that the duty had been performed 
to their captain^s satisfaction. 

“What about Captain Scott and the ‘ Tal- 
ofa^?’^ Sydney suddenly asked. “ I thought 
the captain was bent upon capturing him.’^ 

Phil shook his head. “ I suppose he figures 
there are more important things for us to do 
than to chase the ‘ Talofa.' He’s landed his 
guns and gotten away by this time. Stump is 
still on board the ^ Sitka,’ eating his head 
off.” 

“ Captain Scott certainly played his game 
well,” Sydney declared. “ He’s a Yankee, all 
right. No one else would have been able to 


214 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN i 

get so handily out of the mess occasioned by 
Stump^s navigation/^ 

At the consulate they found only the con- | 
suhs daughters. 

‘‘ They are having a meeting to decide what 
is to be done/^ Alice told them. “ The new 
king Panu-Mafili and his chiefs just came to 
ask protection. They have scarcely five hun- 
dred warriors, and Avao says many of those 
are disloyal, and all their guns are old and 
rusty. They bury them, you know, during 
peace, so they won’t be stolen.” 

“ Imagine that,” Phil exclaimed, ** and in 
this damp soil. But where’s the meeting? ” 

‘‘At the house of the chief justice. The 
Herzovinian consul sent word he was ill and 
couldn’t attend,” Alice replied. “ Of course 
that means he won’t agree with anything we 
decide to do.” 

The meeting apparently did not last long. 
The midshipmen saw the young king, accom- 
panied by several chiefs, among them the 
loyal Tuamana, in company with Mr. Lee 
and Commander Tazewell, approaching. At 
the consulate gate the natives solemnly bowed 
and departed. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


215 

“ Kataafa has sent in word/^ Commander 
Tazewell told the lads, “that he will enter 
Ukula and reestablish his government at 
Kulinuu. The king, Panu, desires to abdi- 
cate to prevent fighting, and has asked our 
advice/^ 

“ And we advised him to yield,^^ Mr. Lee 
added. 

“ There's nothing else we can do," Com- 
mander Tazewell said sorrowfully. “ If we 
had sufficient force we could support him, 
because he is the rightful king; but two 
hundred sailors are not enough to hold the 
town, much less be able to seek for and attack 
the rebels, numbering many thousands and 
all well armed with new and modern 
rifles." 

“Then there will be no fighting after all," 
Phil exclaimed. And the evident disappoint- 
ment in his voice caused a general laugh. 

Commander Tazewell shook his head. 
“ Some of the chiefs, among them Tuamana, 
declared they would not submit, and would 
defend Kulinuu, but I believe when they find 
themselves outnumbered their ferocity will 
subside. We shall guard the Matautu district, 


2i6 a united states MIDSHIPMAN 


and I’ve sent word for all peaceful people to 
come here for protection.” 

The midshipmen were further told by their 
captain that Mr. Lee had given over a wing 
in his big house, and he was sending word to 
his steward to bring over a hand-bag of clean 
clothes, so the midshipmen scribbled a note 
to one of their messmates to send along a 
valise full of necessities. 

“ It will give my daughters and myself,” 
Mr. Lee said gratefully, a feeling of great 
security to house you under our roof, and I 
hope we can make up in our hospitality for 
the lost comforts you enjoy on board ship.” 

Phil and Sydney exchanged amused glances. 
Their little two-by-four cabin compared to a 
big, airy bedchamber on shore was certainly 
funny. 

The Herzovinian sailors that had been 
landed to guard Klinger’s store were now 
reenforced and camped near their own con- 
sulate in the Matafeli district of the town. 
A flagpole had been erected, and the Herzo- 
vinian flag floated alongside the Kapuan 
standard not far away at Kulinuu. 

“ One’s afraid and the other dare not,” Syd- 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


217 


ney exclaimed as he and Phil lounged luxuri- 
ously in the capacious wicker chairs in their 
big bedroom. ‘‘ Herzovinia thinks she isn’t 
strong enough to back Kataafa openly and we 
know we are not numerous enough to resist 
him.” 

‘‘ I don’t think the native enters into the 
question, really,” Phil declared. “ You see, 
Syd, a fight in which the white people might 
be arrayed on both sides would certainly mean 
a diplomatic rupture at home. That’s what 
the consuls and naval commanders are trying 
to avoid. Herzovinia is deeply involved in 
this game. Commander Tazewell hasn’t said 
so, but I believe he thinks that Count Rosen 
is really a diplomatic agent sent here to create 
an intolerable situation. His government is 
tired of this triumvirate control and wants to 
own Kapua herself.” 

I wish the English and Americans had 
taken the bull by the horns and sent word to 
Kataafa that if he attacked Ukula they would 
fire him out by force. I don’t believe then 
he would dare attempt it.” Sydney’s eyes 
flashed. 

‘‘ Those natives we saw to-day,” Phil re- 


2i8 a united states midshipman 


plied, didnT look as if they could be so 
easily intimidated. I believe the decision 
made is the best. We have a big cruiser 
coming with an admiral on board. When 
she arrives we may have strength enough to 
uphold the decision of Judge Lindsay. One 
nation has broken the treaty. Consul Carl- 
son, in refusing to help the other two consuls 
to uphold the decision, has shown that he is 
partial to Kataafa.^^ 

At dinner that evening nothing but Kap- 
uan affairs could be discussed. No one 
thought of anything else. The district of 
Matautu appeared like an armed camp. 
Hundreds of natives had arrived for refuge, 
bringing in all their valuables. The balmy 
air reeked with cocoanut oil, and the musical 
songs of men and women as they squatted 
under their hastily constructed shelters were 
heard on every side. The terrors of war rested 
lightly upon their childlike minds. To 
them war was only a festival, an occasion 
for song, dancing, kava drinking and visit- 
ing. 

Before eight o’clock that evening many 
wild rumors were brought into the camp by 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


219 

the women. Some of the refugee women had 
husbands on one side and some on the other. 
Among the Kapuans, women are neutral, and 
are free to go freely between the hostile 
camps. 

Alice and the midshipmen mingled with 
the natives in order to gather all the news 
brought in. All indications showed that 
Kataafa would be as good as his word, and 
would attack that night. 

The first part of the evening, however, 
dragged on and everything seemed quiet in 
the direction of the native town and Kulinuu 
where a few hundred loyal natives had under- 
taken unaided to uphold the rights of their 
chosen king against the attack of the rebel 
hordes. 

Suddenly the startling rattle of musketry 
drifted down on the light breeze from the other 
side of the bay. Shouts and cries of defiance 
and anger could be distinctly heard through 
the still night air. Kataafa had broken his 
sworn pledge made solemnly and in writing 
never again to resist the constituted authority 
of Kapua. Three hundred odd sailors of 
three great nations listened to the raging of 


220 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


the unequal struggle. Among savages, might 
is always right. There was no doubt who 
would be king of Kapua when the day 
dawned, Judge Lindsay and the treaty not- 
withstanding. 


CHAPTER XIII 


UKULA ATTACKED 

The midshipmen hastened to tell Com- 
mander Tazewell the thrilling news of the 
attack. They found him, however, on the 
porch fully dressed together with the consul 
and his daughters. 

“ I feel terribly concerned over Judge Lind- 
say,^^ Mr. Lee exclaimed while all listened 
tensely to the fearful sounds of combat coming 
so distinctly through the otherwise quiet 
night. The refugees huddling in the bush 
and among the palm groves were all hushed 
to silence, harking to the unequal battle 
raging nearly a mile away. He refused to 
leave his house to come to us. He thought 
his belongings were more precious than his 
life, and feared if he left his house it would be 
looted and destroyed.’^ 

There was no sleep for those at the Amer- 
ican consulate that night. The heavy firing 
was not, however, of long duration. Within 
221 


222 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


the hour it died away, except for an occasional 
shot. Then fires appeared at many points 
along the entire water-front of Ukula. The 
rebels were burning the houses of the loyal 
natives. 

The guarding sailors were alert, and al- 
though war parties appeared and came so 
near as to be challenged by the outposts, they 
stopped only to parley, and explained that 
the papalangi were safe and would not be 
attacked. They were seeking only the fol- 
lowers of Panu-Mafili. 

The light of day revealed much of Ukula 
in ruins. Stores and houses owned by Amer- 
icans and English had all been looted and 
the houses of the loyal natives were in ashes. 

Half-naked warriors, their hands and faces 
smeared with the life blood of their victims, 
their eyes rolling wildly in savage ecstasy, 
paraded the streets carrying on bamboo poles 
the gory heads of their victims. 

The Matautu and The Matafeli districts of 
the town were undisturbed. In the latter 
place lived the Herzovinian merchants and 
their consul. The Herzovinian sailors pre- 
vented the war parties from entering the 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


223 

Matafeli district. Over five thousand war- 
riors, unrestrained and unorganized, roamed 
the town and surrounding country, pillaging 
and firing their guns in savage license. 

Many shots had passed very close to those 
within the American lines, and as the morn- 
ing progressed the desultory firing became 
more frequent and dangerous. Several of 
the native refugees had been hit by stray 
bullets. 

While at breakfast news came from the 
British ship by signal that many refugees 
from the battle-field had swum off to the ships 
and been received on board ; among them the 
king Panu-Mafili and Chief Tuamana. 

An hour later Mary Hamilton burst in 
upon Mr. Lee excitedly with the startling 
intelligence that Judge Lindsay in his big 
house on the Malima road was besieged by a 
war party under Chief Tuatele, and that the 
excited natives were swearing vengeance upon 
the judge. Mary had stolen through the 
pickets during the night and had listened, 
hidden close to the camp of the rebels at the 
cross road leading to the judge’s residence. 

He must come in now, whether he wishes 


224 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN ^ 

to or not/^ Commander Tazewell declared. | 
l^m going to send a guard after him.” 

Lieutenant Morrison and twenty-five men ? 
were quickly assembled and departed to rescue j 
the chief justice. Phil and Sydney were per- 
mitted to go along. 

With their arms at the shoulder and 
bayonets fixed, the guard marched away, the . 
officers leading. Reaching the Malima road 
they turned inland. 

Hundreds of warriors carrying both guns 
and head axes made way for them without a 
thought of raising a hand to stop them. 

When they arrived in sight of the judge’s 
house, nestling among numerous fruit trees, 
and half hidden from the road. Lieutenant 
Morrison deployed his men into a single line. 
Then placing himself and the officers in front 
they advanced directly toward the low stone 
wall surrounding the grounds of the house. 

Phil noted as they approached that many 
of the trees had been destroyed, hacked al- 
most in two with sharp axes, or stripped of 
their fruit to appease the appetite of the 
hungry warriors. 

Suddenly the Americans were confronted 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


225 

by over a hundred natives who had no doubt 
been apprised of their coming. 

Lieutenant Morrison stopped to parley. 
Chief Tuatele walked forward, holding him- 
' self proudly erect. Mary Hamilton had gone 
along to interpret. 

The lieutenant explained his errand and 
ordered the rebel chief to withdraw from 
American property at once. The intimida- 
tion of the white man^s unspoken threat was 
sufficient. In spite of protest from his fol- 
lowers Tuatele obeyed, and the band of sailors 
entered the compound unopposed. 

The chief justice met the lieutenant on his 
door-step. His face was pale, but resolute. 
He refused to budge, and his plucky wife 
applauded his brave decision. 

I shall never turn my back upon them,’^ 
he exclaimed. A judge is answerable only 
to God. I have done my duty by my con- 
science.^’ 

Argument was of no avail. Lieutenant 
Morrison was in a quandary. 

A sudden shout of savage triumph broke 
from the rebels outside the compound. 

Tonga fiti, tonga fiti,” brought the argu- 


226 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


ment to an abrupt end. The judge's house 
was on fire. While the Americans had been 
attempting to persuade the judge to leave, a 
small party of rebels had stolen into the house 
from the rear. That end of the house was 
now ablaze. 

The judge and his wife were dumbfounded. 

All that we own in the world is in that 
house," the judge exclaimed, a dry sob in his 
voice. Phil and Sydney turned to the lieu- 
tenant inquiringly. Much could yet be 
saved. That officer understood the unspoken 
question. He flung a glance at the jeering 
savages. 

‘‘ Yes," he said, “ half of us go in and save 
all we can." 

Within a half hour the beautiful home was 
a heap of ruins, but on the lawn was piled 
nearly all the judge's possessions. His entire 
library, his most cherished possession, was 
saved. 

“ Lieutenant," the judge said as he and his 
wife gazed mournfully at the ruin of their 
liome, I'm afraid I must now change my 
decision and go with you. It should be rare 
for a judge to have to reverse his decision 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


227 

except on the occasion of new evidence, and 
in this case the evidence is only too evident.’^ 

The midshipmen, O’Neil and some of the 
sailors had dragged from the stable the judge’s 
carriage ; the horses were gone, stolen by the 
rebels during the night. 

We’ll load it up and come back for a 
second load,” Lieutenant Morrison decided 
as he saw the carriage was too small to carry 
everything. “ I’ll remain behind with half 
the men.” 

The sailors willingly manned the shafts 
and dragged the loaded carriage out of the 
compound. The natives gazed lustfully at its 
contents. Their blood was boiling for rich 
loot, and the silverware of the judge’s table 
whetted their appetites. 

Phil observed the sudden movement even 
before he heard Mary Hamilton’s cry of warn- 
ing, and a sharp command brought a dozen 
bayonets level with the advancing breasts. 

Tell them, Mary, if they come nearer I 
shall fire,” he cried out earnestly. In his 
heart he was terrified, for he knew that un- 
less the threat were heeded the Americans 
must be massacred. Once the Kapuan war- 


228 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


riors are aroused, they will kill until no enemy 
is left to resist them. The fate of the Her- 
zovinian sailors told him by O’Neil flashed 
into his mind, and the thought was far from 
comforting. 

Lieutenant Morrison, scarcely a hundred 
yards away, realized Phil’s danger, and 
quickly deployed his men to attack the 
enemy on the flank. No other solution but 
flght occurred to any one. A single gun shot 
must have been the signal for the battle to 
begin. 

Tuatele had seen the pantomime from a 
distance, and heard the excited harangue of 
the native woman Mary. She had been 
soundly berating her countrymen. 

I’d think they were gods,” he exclaimed 
in savage admiration as he watched the sailors, 
their guns at their shoulder and apparently 
calm, but I know they die and gods don’t 
die. But Kataafa order no kill papalangi 
sailors.” Then he raised his voice and gave 
an order to retreat, and the entire war party, 
uttering in unison a savage cry of defiance, 
suddenly turned away and quickly disap- 
peared into the bush. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


229 


The judge and his wife were hospitably re- 
ceived by Mr. Lee and his daughters, and 
their belongings when they all arrived were 
carefully stored away in the Lee home. 

At lunch time a flag of truce appeared, 
carried by a small party of natives approach- 
ing from the direction of the town. The guards 
went out to meet them and escorted them 
within the lines. 

A large white envelope was then handed to 
Mr. Lee. 

The consul eagerly broke the seal and read 
the contents ; his hands, holding the paper, 
shook with suppressed indignation. All 
waited anxiously to hear what it was that was 
so disturbing. 

It’s outrageous,” he declared as he handed 
the letter to Commander Tazewell. “ Kataafa 
has made Count Rosen his prime minister, 
and asks the consuls to recognize the new 
government. The letter’s in English, but 
signed by the rebel chief.” 

Commander Tazewell studied the letter 
thoughtfully. '‘Well, sir,” he said grimly, 
"it looks as if it was Hobson’s choice 
with us.” 


230 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

A footfall on the porch heralded a visitor, 
and the British consul was soon seated at the 
lunch table. 

Commander Sturdy has gone off to his 
ship to interview the natives who took refuge 
with him last night, he began hurriedly, his 
face unnaturally flushed with excitement. 
‘‘ Did you also get one of these imperti- 
nencies ? he exclaimed showing a crumpled 
letter in his hand, a duplicate of the one 
Commander Tazewell was still holding. 

Mr. Lee nodded. ‘‘ Yes,” he replied, and 
Commander Tazewell has cleverly showed me 
that we are confronted by a fact, not a fancy. 
Kataafa holds the power. He is the ^ de 
facto ^ government of Kapua, and if we don’t 
recognize it, anarchy and license will continue 
until we do.” 

‘‘ I hear Judge Lindsay has been burnt out 
and a fight between the rebels and your 
sailors was narrowly averted,” the British 
consul exclaimed. What are we coming to 
in Kapua? And it has all been brought 
about by these scheming mercenary mer- 
chants.” 

Mr. Carlson’s portly figure approaching by 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


231 

the path from the road dissolved the party at 
the lunch table. Miss Lee retired to look 
after Judge Lindsay and his wife. The latter's 
nerves had been greatly shaken during the 
trying ordeal through which they had both 
passed. Fanatical natives had surrounded 
their house during the night, threatening the 
judge hourly with death and torture. Only 
the iron will of the man in face of imminent 
danger, and a resolution that awed the sav- 
ages, prevented them from beginning an attack 
which once started must have ended in the 
death of the chief justice. 

The midshipmen and Alice adjourned to 
the garden out of ear-shot from the council of 
the representatives of the great Powers. 

'' There won't be any doubt of getting Mr. 
Carlson to agree upon recognizing the new 
government," Alice exclaimed heatedly. “ I 
suppose that’s what he came for." 

He must approve his own work," Sydney 
replied. '' There’ll be no chance for an Ameri- 
can or an Englishman, though, under this 
government." 

“It’s a nice travesty upon the sacred ness of 
treaties," Phil exclaimed in righteous indigna- 


232 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

tion. “ The great civilized nations sign a sol- 
emn treaty to direct the government of Kapua. 
A chief justice is appointed, confirmed by all 
three nations, to decide finally all questions 
arising among the natives. The consuls, rep- 
resenting the three Powers, are by the treaty 
bound to uphold the judge’s decisions, and to 
use their war-ships to enforce those decisions. 
A decision is rendered. One consul not only 
refuses to join in upholding it, but repudiates 
it openly.” 

Is it really as black as that ? ” Sydney 
asked thoughtfully, appealing to Alice. You 
know the natives. Whom do they want for 
king? ” 

Almost all want Kataafa,” Alice acknowl- 
edged. He is, as I told you, a god in the 
natives’ eyes. I can’t see why he cannot be 
king if his people wish it, but Judge Lindsay 
has studied the case for a month, and so 
decides.” 

^‘Of course,” Phil exclaimed, ‘‘ the war is 
all a put up job. I would, if I were able, in- 
dict for manslaughter every one of those 
responsible for this rebellion or who selfishly 
refused to avert it lawfully. It made me ab- 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


233 

solutely sick to see those ghastly heads on 
poles and know that for every one a life had 
been sacrificed to satisfy the selfishness of white 
men/* 

Some one/* Alice said reverently, will 
have to account for those deaths before the 
great tribunal some day.** 

They saw Mr. Carlson bow formally and 
leave the consulate. 

‘‘ It didn*t take long,** Sydney said as they 
watched him go, mopping his perspiring face 
as he passed through the gate and turned 
toward the town. 

Do you know,** Alice said thoughtfully, 
** he is a very kind-hearted soul. I feel very 
sorry for him, because he is now shouldering 
the bad deeds of others.** 

This short meeting of the consuls brought 
a temporary stability to affairs in Kapua. The 
three consuls now formally recognized the 
de facto** government nominally under 
Kataafa. The count was to be the prime min- 
ister ; adviser to the king. Judge Lindsay 
was to again occupy, if he would, the office of 
chief justice. The deposed King Panu-Mafili 
and his chiefs, if they would go to Kulinuu, ' 


234 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

and humble themselves before Kataafa, were 
to be permitted ashore, otherwise they must 
remain in the war-ships. 

This all the loyal chiefs refused to do, and 
for their safety the war-ships were forced to 
keep them on board. 

The next day Kataafa was formally crowned 
at Kulinuu, but no salute was fired in his 
honor. The morning after the coronation the 
midshipmen and Alice watched their sailors 
gather up their belongings and return on board 
their ship. 

They’ll be ashore again before very long,’’ 
Phil prophesied. The * Sacramento,’ one of 
our big cruisers, will be on the way here with 
an American admiral on board. I have an 
idea that he will not be content to see the 
islands get away from us without an argu- 
ment.” 

The town of Ukula was a sorry sight. 
Many valuable native houses were in utter 
ruin. Many stores owned by the white men 
had been looted. Empty cans were scattered 
about everywhere. Those canned delicacies 
of meats, soups and vegetables, much prized 
by the natives, had been consumed or carried 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


235 


I away. Tin goods in Kapua went by the name 
of ‘‘ peasoupee,” because the first cargo of 
tinned goods ever received in the islands was 
of the pea-soup variety. 

Armed natives were encountered on every 
hand, but their faces were no longer blackened, 
and the savage ecstasy of war had partially 
subsided. 

Phil stopped a smiling native and asked him 
by signs to allow him to inspect his gun. 
Alice spoke his own language to him, and the 
warrior proudly gave his cherished belonging 
I into PhiTs hands. 

IPs a brand new ^ Snyder,’ ” Sydney said as 
they both handled it ; “ but look, he has taken 
off the sight. Thinks it’s a useless ornament.” 

Probably is,” Phil replied. “ In bush 
fighting a sight is probably of little use 
unless the native is trained to use it intel- 
ligently.” 

The three walked slowly along the main 
! street. At the gate of the Herzovinian con- 
sulate in Matafeli, they saw Count Rosen. 
All were surprised to receive a cordial smile, 
as he raised his hat to Alice. 

“Look,” Phil exclaimed, “the boxes are 


236 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

still on the porch of the Kapuan firm's 
store." 

All had stopped to gaze upon the mysteri- 
ous boxes yet unopened. A crowd of natives, 
laughing and jostling each other, covered the 
wide porches encircling the store, and spilled 
over into the courtyard. 

What is the cause of their merriment?" 
Sydney asked. Alice had drawn near a group 
of native women who had stopped in front of 
the store to gossip together. They turned and 
answered her question by pointing to a large 
print pasted on the side of the house. 

The midshipmen could not curb their curi- 
osity and drew nearer to get a closer look. 

I call that a low-down, contemptible ad- 
vantage to take of friendly nations," Phil 
exclaimed, beside himself with indignation. 
What he had seen was a colored cartoon from 
an English paper representing Herzovinia 
kicking both Johnny Bull and Uncle Sam 
from off a tropical island into the sea. 

The conservative Sydney would have stayed 
his impetuous chum, but Phil, before his 
friend could realize his intention, had strode 
excitedly forward, pushing the yielding na- 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


237 

lives from his path. Sydney saw him take 
his penknife and deftly cut the picture from 
the house wall where it had been roughly 
pasted. Then calmly rolling it up, Phil re- 
turned and joined his astonished companions. 

What have you done ? Sydney exclaimed 
in alarm. They^ll consider it an insult.” 
But Alice answered the question, admiration 
I shining in her excited face. 

He has only prevented an insult going 
any further,” she said. 

They were about to retrace their steps to 
I Matautu when Klinger suddenly appeared 
I from the interior of the store. He glanced 
I first in amusement at the Americans, and 
t then up on the side of the house. The smile 
i faded. He asked a question of a native and 
j received an answer. His face became sud- 
denly pale with rage. His gaze fell upon the 
cartoon rolled up in Phil’s hand. Scowling 
darkly he advanced, one hand outstretched. 

You will please hand over that picture,” 
he ordered sharply. 

Phil squared toward the manager, holding 
: the picture behind him. 

i I decline to give it to you,” Phil replied 


238 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

in a voice he managed to hold steady. That 
is no place to display such a picture at this 
time.'^ 

Klinger was a man who had all his life 
governed with the overseer's whip. During 
his fifteen years in the South Seas his strong 
will had never been seriously thwarted. What 
he wanted he took, using force if necessary. 
He was a big man, somewhat inclined to 
stoutness, but the outdoor life he had lived, 
in the saddle for days at a time, riding over 
the plantations, had given a hardness to his 
added flesh. The person confronting him, 
who declined to give back his own property, 
was a mere youth. In his white flannels he 
sized up of much slighter build if a trifle 
taller than the angry manager. Personal vio- 
lence was far removed from PhiTs thoughts. 

Klinger, with a snarl of rage, was upon the 
midshipman before he could evade the rush. 
One of the manager's great hands reached 
for the lad's throat, while his other arm en- 
deavored to draw in and crush the slight 
boy against his massive chest. Sydney and 
Alice could only cry out in their surprise and 
alarm. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


239 


The next moment Klinger appeared to 
plunge head first into the roadway beyond, 
as if sprung from a catapult. The manager 
lay unconscious, a huddled heap of brawn 
and muscle, while Phil, very pale and trem- 
bling violently in apprehension, gazed upon 
his stricken foe. 

Jujitsu,’^ Sydney exclaimed admiringly, 
yet in alarm, as he surveyed the inert form of 
Klinger in the roadway. 


CHAPTER XIV 


COUNT ROSEN TAKES CHARGE 

The signal victory won by Kataafa and his 
warriors and the acknowledgment from the 
Powers increased many-fold his trust in the 
two papalangi, who had so ably advised 
him and supplied the necessary weapons for 
success. As the old chief surveyed the work 
of destruction, however, his heart sank within 
him. The fear of the war-ships and their 
thunderbolts, and a vivid recollection of the 
last war against the papalangi spurred him 
to consult that man of few words. Count 
Rosen, whom Klinger had said was vested 
with high powers from that great nation be- 
yond the seas, more powerful than both Eng- 
land and America. 

The English and Americans, he knew, 
would soon be crying aloud for retribution. 
Their property had been destroyed by his 
warriors. The life of the chief justice, an 
American, had even been endangered, and 
240 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


241 


his valuable house unlawfully burned. To 
Kataafa, the papalangi were terrible people. 
Those in Kapua he did not fear ; he had seen 
that they could be killed and beheaded as 
easily as men of his own race ; but the intan- 
gible nations that protected them, sending 
war-ships ‘‘ bursting through the clouds,” as 
the Kapuans express the slow approach of a 
ship coming up over the sea horizon — of these 
Kataafa stood in mortal fear. 

As the blood lust subsided among his war- 
riors, already gossip bared its disquieting 
head. Some said many war-ships of England 
and America would come and destroy, as if 
by a volcano, their beautiful islands. 

Kataafa with his trusted chiefs marched 
solemnly to the Herzovinian consulate at 
Matafeli. Count Rosen had taken up his 
abode in the consulate. He received the 
chiefs in silence, and sent word at once for 
Klinger to appear to act as interpreter. The 
count had that morning been appointed by 
the rebel king his prime minister, and the 
three consuls had acknowledged, in grudging 
terms, the '' de facto” government, as they 
pointedly expressed it. 


242 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Klinger did not appear and finally the 
native messenger returned with the informa- 
tion that Missi Klinger was very sick. The 
count excused himself to the chiefs, telling 
them to wait, and hurried away to see what 
was the matter. There on a low couch in the 
store office he found the manager, but just 
regaining consciousness. A white doctor was 
attending him, examining his entire body 
carefully for serious injuries. The story of 
the encounter with the Americans was told 
most graphically to the count by a number 
of native eye-witnesses, and each described 
the strength of the young David as greater 
than that of Sampson himself. The Kap- 
uans are well up on the Bible and glory in 
airing their knowledge. 

Klinger, when he came to himself, made a 
great effort to rise, thinking his antagonist 
was still before him, but the doctor’s strong 
hands, applying wet bandages to a very 
ugly contusion over his temple, upon which 
he had struck in his fall, held him quiet. 
The count had taken a seat at his side. He 
wore a displeased frown as he listened to the 
babble about him. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


243 

“ Clear them out, please, he exclaimed 
irritably. The women were sent away, all 
but Klinger’s wife, Fanua, who waited pa- 
tiently to be told what to do. 

Klinger at length sat up and gazed about 
him. He raised a hand to his aching head 
and felt the great bulk of wet dressing plas- 
tered by the doctor over his cut. Then he 
read the displeasure evident in the count’s 
face. 

They did me,” he exclaimed. ‘‘ One of 
them hit me with a black-jack.” 

“ You’ve made yourself the laughing stock 
of the town,” the count declared angrily. 

I’ve heard the story. It was simply science 
against unwieldy beef.” 

“I’ll show the young aristocrat,” the man- 
ager began to bluster, but the count cut him 
short impatiently. 

“You’ll just drop this thing where it is,” 
he commanded authoritatively. “ It was a 
childish piece of folly to put up that cartoon, 
and the youngster has my admiration. You 
should thank your stars you haven’t a broken 
neck instead of only a small cut in your hard 
head. He used jujitsu on you.” 


244 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Such words did not sound sweet to Klinger’s 
ears. He was unaccustomed to being taken 
to task thus wise, and the sullen expression 
on his face showed plainly his displeasure. 

** Get yourself in shape,” the count added, 
his voice less severe in tone. “ Kataafa and 
his chiefs have come to the consulate, and I 
won’t trust any of these professional native 
interpreters.” 

Klinger rose slowly to obey the summons. 
The count waited impatiently on the porch 
of the store. He was not slow in seeing that 
the encounter had hurt their cause. Any- 
thing that can be held up to ridicule by so 
much is seriously injured. For policy’s sake 
he would have liked to severely punish this 
young, athletic American. To do so would 
help the prestige of the new government in 
the natives’ eyes, but he feared that such high 
handed measures might injure the cause for 
which he was working by opposition from the 
Powers. 

When the count and Klinger reached the 
consulate the rebel chiefs laid before them 
the plan which they had been discussing 
among themselves. On request of the count, 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


245 


Kataafa so far transgressed the ancient 
Kapuan custom as to talk without the de- 
lay of speaking through the “ talking man/^ 
while Klinger readily translated his well 
chosen and eloquent words. 

He desired the count to be at the head of 
the government as governor. To take the 
place of chief justice of Kapua — to hoist the 
Herzovinian flag by the side of the Kapuan 
flag and by so doing receive the support of 
their war-ship. Further, he had written a 
« cry ^ which he desired be sent to the king 
of the count's country, asking annexation. 
He said the Kapuans were but children, and 
Kapua was but a bone between three hungry 
dogs. He feared the coming of more war- 
ships, and would willingly leave everything 
in the count's wise hands. 

Count Rosen was deeply thoughtful. The 
wanton pillage of the Kataafa warriors and 
their barbarous killing and beheading of the 
native supporters of the chief justice's choice 
for king had greatly shocked him. He had 
failed to appreciate the natural cruelty of 
even the gentlest savages when their primi- 

* Cry — Appeal. 


246 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

tive passion for bloodshed is aroused. Now 
to accept this petition and hoist the flag could 
not be considered. If there had been no 
bloodshed, then his countrymen at home 
might have upheld him if he hoisted the 
flag and even formally annexed the islands. 
But he could ofier as his excuse in accept- 
ing the office of governor the desire to bring 
about peace and allow the commerce of the 
islands to continue unchecked and in accord- 
ance with civilized law. But first he must 
feel his ground slowly. The other two 
Powers looked on with jealous eyes. 

I cannot be chief justice,” he said after 
a long pause, until Judge Lindsay has re- 
signed that office. Send and ask him to 
continue in that position, and if he refuses, 
Kataafa has the right to appoint another.” 

A letter was quickly written and dis- 
patched. Within a half hour a verbal 
answer was returned to the effect that Judge 
Lindsay did not recognize any king of Kapua 
save Panu, and that he, Lindsay, was yet the 
chief justice. 

The count smiled sardonically. 

I shall accept the position of governor 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


247 


and perform also the duties of chief justice/' 
he said, under the de facto government, but 
annexation we shall discuss later. First we 
must begin to repair all damage done, espe- 
cially to the foreigners." 

Kataafa and his chiefs withdrew. They 
smiled triumphantly. They believed all 
trouble had been lifted from their shoulders. 
This man, the count, had relieved them of all 
disagreeable consequences of their acts of 
violence. The men of war were undoubt- 
edly afraid of him. So argued the chiefs 
of the rebel leader. Upon the announcement 
that the count was to be the adviser of Kataafa, 
the papalangi had carried their sailors back 
to their ships. Now, since the count was 
equal to the king or governor, maybe the 
war-ships would sail away “ under the sea " 
and not return. The other war-ships that 
people said were coming would be afraid to 
let loose their thunder when they learned 
that this count and representative of a power- 
ful papalangi king was at the head of the new 
government. With these quieting thoughts 
the stately chiefs filed out of the consulate and 
turned toward the king's residence at Kulinuu. 


248 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Count Rosen was not afraid of the con- 
sequences of his act. He gloried in the 
thought that his country was nearer a settle- 
ment of the Kapuan difficulty than she had 
ever been. Yet there were points in the 
proceedings which gave him considerable 
concern. The principal one was his knowl- 
edge that the American commander had dis- 
covered the source of the Kataafa guns and 
doubtless also suspected that the rebellion of 
the old warrior had been planned in order to 
create just the situation by which the Ameri- 
cans and English now found themselves corn- 
fronted. If he only dared raise his country's 
standard over the islands I The count rea- 
soned that Kapua would be taken by the 
country whom the natives chose to govern 
them. Now he had the opportunity of show- 
ing them what good government really meant, 
and if he could succeed in winning the native 
confidence, his country would be the choice 
of the people. In the last war the natives, 
when maltreated and coerced by the Kapuan 
firm and the Herzovinian war-ships, appealed 
to England for annexation. England would 
have liked to grant the request, but her rival's 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


249 

friendship at that time was needed more than 
were the Kapuan Islands ; so no notice was 
paid by the British Cabinet to the pitiful cry 
from the far-away South Sea monarchy. 

Klinger/^ the count said seriously, you 
must take charge of the native laborers. Re- 
pair all damage possible to foreign property 
and guarantee to all just compensation. I 
shall grant full amnesty to all the supporters 
of Panu-Mafili. Be careful, he added se- 
verely. Don’t antagonize the foreigners. 
Don’t grab too much, or we may lose all.” 

Within a week Ukula and the surrounding 
country was as peaceful as before the death of 
the old king Laupepe. New houses were go- 
ing up on every hand, a sure sign of future 
peace in Kapua. By order of the count, who 
had taken charge of the government of the 
islands in fact as well as in fancy, guns could 
not be carried by the natives. The natives 
were encouraged to indulge in their Siva-Siva 
dances, at which the count made it his busi- 
ness to be present. 

The English and American consuls main- 
tained a haughty reserve when they trans- 
acted business with the governor, as the 


250 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

natives called the count, but a semi-friendly 
relation was soon established between him and 
the naval officers. 

The count provided himself a new house, 
built within a month, on the bungalow style, 
but of native workmanship, and invited all 
to a dance given in celebration of the opening. 

The lawn in front of the house was on this 
occasion reserved for the Siva-Siva dancers. 

The count received his guests in the lanai. 
The stately figure of Kataafa stood by his side 
and all visitors shook hands with him most 
cheerfully as they entered to greet the host. 

Phil and Sydney accompanied Commander 
Tazewell. Alice and her sister came also, but 
Mr. Lee sent his regrets on account of indis- 
position. The mail had not arrived from 
home, and both the British consul and 
Mr. Lee considered it wiser in their official 
positions to refrain from an act which might 
savor of a recognition of the justice of the 
government. Judge Lindsay returned his 
invitation unopened. 

The house was decorated profusely with 
bright bush flowers, and their perfume min- 
gling with the odor of cocoanut oil with which 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


251 


all Kapuans plentifully adorn their skins, 
gave the occasion a distinction which re- 
mained long in PhiTs memory. 

Herzovinian and Kapuan flags entwined 
were everywhere in evidence. 

Everybody of any consequence, whatever 
their nationality, was there and the count 
moved at ease among them. He was, how- 
ever, particularly attentive to the American 
commander. 

The best Siva-Siva dancers had been col- 
lected, and as the house was entirely too small 
for the European dances, the guests were 
soon gathered on the lawn, where many chairs 
and benches had been placed. Two great bon- 
fires had been built to furnish light in order 
to see the graceful movements of the dancers. 

The count had escorted Commander Taze- 
well to the lawn. Phil and his friends fell 
in behind and found themselves in the front 
row where an excellent view was to be had 
when the dancers appeared. 

Those old women are the orchestra,’’ 
Alice told them, pointing to a dozen or more 
figures huddled up on mats beyond the illu- 
mination of the bonfires. 


252 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPM \N 

Even as she spoke the count had raised his 
hand as a signal to begin. 

Immediately the dim figures began to beat 
time with sticks upon their mats; while from 
the darkness a volume of savage melody burst 
forth. Then came slowly forward from the 
shadow into the illumination a score of men 
in single file, their arms on each other's 
shoulders. To Phil it resembled the prison- 
gang step, but every move of their half- 
naked bodies was graceful. The light re- 
flected from their shiny skins gave a startling 
effect. On each head was a green wreath. 
Gummed to cheeks, ears and nose were hang- 
ing pendants of the leaves of the crimson 
hibiscus flower. About their necks were 
worn circles of boar tusks mixed with scarlet 
peppers and bright berries. 

They entered, first slowly, singing a low 
and slow measure which increased as their 
movements quickened, until with a final rush 
they threw themselves into a squatting posi- 
tion on the ground facing the numerous audi- 
ence. 

Great was the applause when an equal 
number of women suddenly made their ap- 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


253 

pearance from the opposite direction. Phil 
watched them fascinated. On they came with 
pride and consciousness of exalted position 
and importance. They were redolent and 
glistening with perfumed oil. Garlands of 
bright leaves and vivid flowers, wonderfully 
made, crowned their flowing locks. Like the 
men, necklaces from their beloved bush 
adorned their graceful necks. About their 
slender waists and hanging to the knee were 
fabulously valuable soft mats, their only gar- 
ments. Garlands of green leaves encircled 
their knees and ankles. All this Phil knew 
vaguely before. His eager eyes clung to the 
leading dancer’s face and did not leave it to 
define the marvelous costumes of those 
following. The girl was Avao, and leading 
the Siva-Siva given by Count Rosen and 
Kataafa. So surprised was he that he turned 
suddenly toward Alice, a question bursting on 
his lips. 

Wait,” she breathed. 

Avao, the Tapau of Ukula, daughter of 
Tuamana, the irreconcilable loyalist, was 
dancing before his enemies, while he was 
still a self-imposed exile on board the Ameri- 


254 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

can war-ship. What did it mean ? Could it 
be that even Tuamana had been won by this 
remarkable foreign nobleman ? 

At length the dancers were in place, in 
two rows, the women in front, and all seated 
cross-legged. The Tapau with her marvelous 
head-dress of human hair and mother of 
pearl, glistening in the firelight, sat smiling 
proudly in the middle of her troupe. The 
orchestra, now reinforced by many good 
voices, was keeping time. The dancers were 
motionless as if struck from gleaming marble 
and then Avao raised her arms, flinging them 
out with graceful ease, and as if the twoscore 
men and women had been molded into a 
single figure, every arm was flung out in per- 
fect unison with their girlish leader. It was 
a drill of the most difficult kind, requiring 
years of daily practice. No single person 
seemed to lag or get out of time, while all 
the while a weird chant rose and fell and 
finally as the movements, at first slow and 
deliberate, took on a galloping pace, the high 
treble of the women and the harsh bass of the 
men mounted to a pitch of delirious and 
savage ecstasy and then suddenly stopped. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


255 

A thunder of applause greeted the marvelous 
performance. Phil for the first time with- 
drew his eyes from the savage beauty of the 
scene and saw that hundreds of sailors of all 
three nations had been admitted to the show. 
He recognized the uniform of the American 
sailors and smiled with pleasure at their warm 
reception to the efforts of Avao, to whom was 
due the credit for the perfect dancing of the 
youth and maids of Ukula. 

Figure after figure was performed. The 
enthusiasm of the natives rose higher as the 
evening wore on. 

Suddenly the band began to play the Kap- 
uan national air, and all rose to their feet. 
After it had finished all eyes were again 
turned to the dancers. 

Slowly, gracefully they swayed their supple 
bodies and arms. The orchestra was silent 
except for the staccato time made by the 
sticks striking the dry mats. The dancing 
and singing seemed to be done subcon- 
sciously. No effort seemed to be used, yet 
all followed in movement, in tune and in 
word, the leading Tapau, each performer link- 
ing his own consciousness with the mind of 


256 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

the maiden as if swayed by her will. What 
she did and said was done and said without 
appreciable interval by each of the dancers. 
Such was the marvelous degree of the train- 
ing. 

This is the last/^ Phil heard the count 
say. It is a song in honor of the king.^^ 
Alice heard and smiled. Phil saw her lips 
tremble and her color pale in the firelight. 

Panu-Mafili o le Tupu-o-Kapua — ah I 
A solemn hush came over the assemblage. 
The song gained volume, faster and faster. 
Then a roar shook the air and the great con- 
course of native spectators had risen to their 
feet. 

The performers appeared not to appreciate 
the meaning of the crowd. Phil had risen 
suddenly from his chair — ready, but for what 
he did not know. The song had conveyed 
nothing to his mind. He had not under- 
stood the words, so swiftly were they sung. A 
glance at the count told that he, too, was in 
the dark. Phil was conscious of Aliceas trem- 
bling hand on his arm and heard her whisper, 
‘^They are praising Panu-Mafili as king in- 
stead of Kataafa. Avao is getting her revenge 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


257 

for being asked to lead. You know a Tapau 
cannot refuse to dance if asked by a chief.” 

With a final graceful sway the dancers 
jumped to their feet, their hands held aloft 
in sign of finality. The audience had now 
completely drowned the voices of the singers. 
Phil saw several chiefs rush toward the 
dancers. The crowd was in an uproar. The 
dancers gave way before the threat of those 
who had advanced, menacing them with 
bodily injury. Avao stood almost alone, a 
smile of defiance upon her handsome face. 

“ Is she in danger ? ” Phil asked excitedly 
of Alice at his side. “ Would they dare injure 
her?” Before Alice could answer Phil per- 
ceived the distorted countenance of Klinger. 
He had risen from his seat at some distance 
from the count. Phil saw him talking and 
gesticulating with a group of natives, pushing 
them forward, as if directing them to commit 
some act which they were reluctant to do. 

Avao, with unconcern in her face, appeared 
not to hear the torrent of abuse heaped upon 
her from all sides. Several women darted 
toward her and endeavored to tear her cos- 
tume to pieces. She evaded these angry 


258 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

rushes, but Phil saw that the temper of the 
crowd would not be appeased until revenge 
upon this daring girl had been taken. 

Look,’^ Alice cried out joyfully ; the 
sailors are coming to her rescue.’’ Phil saw 
a mass of white suddenly encircle the cring- 
ing dancers and then face outward toward the 
crowd. He recognized O’Neil as their leader, 
and wondered what would happen next. 

Klinger was talking excitedly to the count. 
The latter had ceased to smile. A dark frown 
was in his face. Then Phil noticed him raise 
his hand to quell the disturbance. A loud 
voice of a chief at his side warned all to 
silence. Slowly the babel died away. 


CHAPTER XV 


THE BE FACTO ” GOVERNMENT 

‘‘ Bring the girl to me,” the count com- 
manded. 

The angry natives made way for the proud 
Tapau as she advanced toward the gov- 
ernor. Phil read in their savage glances that 
this brave girl, if she were left to their mercy, 
was in great danger. 

In front of the count and Commander Taze- 
well, Avao stopped. Her eyes were cast down, 
but she held her head high ; then making 
a low bow she bent her knee in sign of 
submission. 

‘‘Will you not sing for King Kataafa?” 
the count asked kindly. Phil listened eagerly 
for her answer. The tumult about them was 
hushed. 

“ Alii,” Avao answered, “ I have sung for 
the king of Kapua. Panu-Mafili has been de- 
clared our king by the chief justice.” 

Count Rosen’s face paled, and he bit his 
259 


26 o a united states MIDSHIPMAN 


lips to suppress his great annoyance and 
mortification. Klinger's rough voice behind 
him was distinctly audible. 

“ Throw her out. We can get another 
Tapau leader.” 

Will you not sing Kataafa's praise? ” the 
count asked, not heeding Klinger's interrup- 
tion. 

Avao gave her answer readily and dis- 
tinctly. 

“ I will lead the song for Kataafa as a great 
chief, loved and honored by his people.” 

Don't bother with the cantankerous girl,” 
Klinger recommended brutally. 

Commander Tazewell recognized the awk- 
wardness of the situation. His admiration 
was for the girl who had drawn down upon 
her head the anger of most of her own race. 
Her loyalty to her father, Tuamana, and the 
rightful king could not be shaken. He 
turned to the count, a smile on his face. 

We are all greatly indebted,” he said, 

for this delightful evening. I thank you 
for myself, officers and men.” Then after 
wringing the count's hand, he turned gallantly 
to the silent Tapau. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


261 


Will you take my arm? ” he said. 

To the surprise of everybody and the 
chagrin of the governor and Klinger, Avao 
passed her arm through the American com- 
mander’s and together they marched deter- 
minedly toward the gate. Phil, Sydney, and 
Alice fell in behind, while the sailors, seeing 
that the other dancers were not to be menaced 
by the crowd, the entire blame being placed 
on the shoulders of their leader, the Tapau, 
quietly dispersed, and withdrew from the 
grounds. 

Having gained the road. Commander Taze- 
well relinquished his charge into Alice’s 
keeping. 

You must come home with me,” the 
young girl declared. Oh, Avao I I could 
hug you, if it weren’t for all that smelly oil 
you have rubbed on yourself.” 

The midshipmen joined in praise of the 
heroine. 

^^Avao,” Commander Tazewell said as he 
was about to leave the party at the dock to 
return to the ship, “your courage to-night 
was of a higher order than mere men display. 
You have taught your own people and even 


262 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


others a lesson in loyalty and honor. They 
did not see it then, but some of them will 
after they have had time to think over your 
simple words. 

What you said to the count, he added as 
he shook her hand, was told to Kataafa by 
a chief at my side in his native tongue. The 
great chief’s face showed no anger. I thought 
I read admiration and maybe a consciousness 
of guilt. Kataafa, I fear, has been badly ad- 
vised by his trusted white friends.” 

Avao was too greatly touched to express 
her gratitude in English. A flood of her own 
poetic tongue, only partly understood by the 
American captain, was her answer. 

The midshipmen left the two young girls 
at the consulate and returned toward the 
landing. 

‘‘ It was the count’s own fault,” Phil de- 
clared. He sent word to Avao that she 
must lead, and by the Kapuan custom, a 
Tapau cannot refuse.” 

Well,” Sydney replied, as O’Neil would 
say, ‘ he got his I ’ ” 

The easy-going life of the natives in Kapua 
now seemed to have again returned. Under 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 263 

the new government many improvements were 
made. The streets of Ukula were cleaned, 
and a campaign was made by the new govern- 
ment upon the native neglect in leaving their 
fruit to decay in the open, thus increasing the 
great pest of flies. The trade of the Kapuan 
firm fiourished. The foreign traders, English 
and American, complained to their consuls 
bitterly. No one would buy from them. 
When they asked their farmer customers the 
reason, they received the smiling answer. 

We shall soon belong to Herzovinia, so we 
wish to see how we like to buy our supplies 
from them.^^ 

Several weeks thus went by without impor- 
tant disagreements between the de facto ” 
government and the foreign consuls. Kataafa 
remained quietly in Kulinuu. His army was 
not, however, disbanded. Their guns for the 
time being were hidden from view, but the 
warriors who had assembled from all parts of 
the islands in answer to the call of their choice 
for king did not return to their homes. All 
the natives who had been loyal to Panu, ex- 
cept the rightful king and his high chief 
Tuamana, were again living their usual 


264 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

lives ashore. The latter two refused to ac- 
knowledge Kataafa, and remained on board 
the ‘‘ Sitka.’^ The two rival factions lived side 
by side, apparently without discord. The 
women engaged in many heated altercations, 
and frequently spread disquieting alarms of 
impending strife between the two political 
parties, but nothing ever came of these proph- 
ecies except now and then a personal en- 
counter between natives of diverging views, 
which was settled without recourse to anything 
more hurtful than fists and clubs. 

One day the whole town of Ukula was ring- 
ing with the news of a murder. A black boy, 
a Solomon Islander, on the Kapuan firm’s 
plantation at Vaileli had been deliberately 
shot and killed by a Kataafa warrior. The 
latter after committing the crime strolled 
proudly into the town, boasting that he had 
shot a “ black pig.’^ 

Phil and Sydney were in the consulate when 
Avao brought this sensational news. 

Killing during a war was looked upon by 
the foreigners as in the order of things, but 
during peace times such crimes could not be 
tolerated. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 265 

Give a child a gun/' Phil exclaimed, “ and 
there’s no telling what will happen.” 

Alice drew all the gruesome particulars from 
her native girl friend, and retailed them to the 
midshipmen. 

“ He did it just to see how his gun would 
shoot,” she told them. “ And when he found 
the bullet wouldn’t kill the black boy at the 
first shot he walked up close and shot him 
twice more, then severed his head from his 
body and brought it to town to show the won- 
derful power of the rifle.” 

“What will they do about it?” Sydney 
asked. 

Alice shook her head. 

“ The murdered black belongs to the Kap- 
uan firm,” she replied. “ He was worth about 
a thousand dollars. Under the Kapuan law 
there is no penalty for murder, but under the 
laws of the treaty the penalty is death.” 

Every one was greatly surprised when they 
heard that the murderer had been arrested by 
Johnny Upolu, on a warrant issued by the 
count himself, and he would be tried by the 
native court of Ukula. 

The midshipmen and Alice did not miss the 


266 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


trial. It was simple, and after the episode was 
told, the accused refused to make any defense. 

For three days the judges deliberated over 
their verdict. 

‘‘ It’s a wonder to me,” Mr. Lee said, on his 
porch after the trial was over and before the 
verdict had been given, ‘‘ that there haven’t 
been more of these terrible affairs. Nearly 
five thousand natives now have guns hidden 
in their homes and there’s no telling when the 
lust to kill will come to some of them. As I 
watched this murderer’s face during his trial, I 
could see no signs of penitence. He seemed to 
be proud of his exploit. If they would hang 
this fiery young warrior publicly it would 
make me think more kindly of the count and 
his government.” 

The midshipmen readily agreed to the sen- 
timent. 

“ But,” Phil objected, the count is trying 
to gain popularity with all the natives, and if 
they hang this man for only killing a black 
slave, the natives will consider they have been 
treated unjustly. I doubt whether the man 
will be punished.” 

‘‘ If he is not,” Mr. Lee exclaimed, “ it will 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 267 

be a blot upon our civilization, and I, as Ameri- 
can consul, will strongly condemn the morals 
of this unrighteous government that permits 
a murderer to move among us unpunished ; in 
fact, worshiped by the others as a hero/^ 

Mary Hamilton paid the consul and his 
family a long visit. Her husband was one of 
the five judges who were still considering 
what to do and she was eager to learn what 
the American “ Alii thought, in order that 
she could go back and give good advice to her 
lord and master. 

It is very difficult,^^ she said in remark- 
ably good English ; if they find the man 
guilty and order his death all our people 
will cry out upon the judges for hanging a 
brave warrior who has done nothing wrong 
fa’a Kapua. To kill a * black ’ man is all 
the same as shooting a pig. And,^^ she 
added, “ if they say what they would like to 
say and set the man free, the count and Missi 
Klinger will be very angry, and after we be- 
long to their country will punish the judges 
severely.^^ ^ 

Mr. Lee laughed, despite the seriousness in 
Mary^s voice. 


268 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

It’s their duty, Mary,” he replied, '' to 
find according to the facts. If this man 
killed another deliberately and without prov- 
ocation they should condemn him to be 
hung. If the man were a white man and I 
were the judge that is what I should be bound 
to do.” 

Mary looked puzzled. 

“ But, Alii,” she replied, this man is a 
very good man. He is a fine fighter, and a 
leader among the men of his family. This 
black boy was no good. Is it right that a 
good man be killed just because a bad black 
boy is killed ? ” 

A life for a life, Mary,” Mr. Lee replied 
firmly. “ That is the white man’s law.” 

The next day the judges gave their decision. 
It was that the native was guilty of murder 
and must be hung. 

The midshipmen were passing the jail a 
few days after the sentence had been given. 
They saw the prisoner squatting quietly 
within the doorway of the prison, talking 
unconcernedly with his policeman guard. 

I feel sorry for that poor chap,” Sydney 
said sadly. He’s a victim of white inter- 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 269 

ference. Why should we force our laws upon 
these savages? According to his method of 
thinking, he has done no more than step on 
a cockroach, and he can^t see why we make 
so much fuss about it. Anyway, he doesn’t 
seem to be worrying — nature has omitted 
nerves in his make-up.” 

Phil had drawn near and now spoke a few 
words to the condemned man, who smiled 
affably and pointed gleefully into the next 
room, where several natives were going 
through some mysterious looking pantomime. 

Go ahead ; don’t mind us, Johnny,” Phil 
exclaimed as the chief of police and his assist- 
ants stopped their performance and glanced 
sheepishly at the midshipmen. 

By George ! ” Sydne}'' exclaimed in horror. 

A rehearsal before the principal.” 

One policeman was carefullly greasing a 
wicked looking rope with a knot and noose 
at one end. Three others were practicing 
pinioning and ''turning off”^ the culprit. 
One, to make the scene realistic to their ad- 
miring audience, was chained and placed in 
the corner of the room. The other two then 

• Turning off— Springing the trap. 


270 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

would approach with straps in their hands, 
knock off the shackles from the supposed con- 
demned man and quickly pinion him. Then 
the three would march slowly to the middle of 
the room. They adjusted an imaginary noose, 
drew on a real black cap over the make-believe 
prisoner's head, adjusted the straps and then 
at a sharp word of command, all but the 
make-believe condemned man stepped smartly 
aside, and then one went through the motion 
of springing the trap upon which the blind- 
folded policeman was supposed to stand. 
Johnny Upolu told the midshipmen proudly 
that they had practiced it over a hundred 
times already, and hoped that it would be a 
sight worth seeing, and advised them not on 
any account to miss the real hanging. 

The prisoner understood sufficient English 
to understand and smiled, adding his wish 
that they should not miss the show. 

How’s that for nerve ? ” Phil exclaimed. 

Sitting there watching himself hung and 
actually smiling over it. I'm certainly not 
going to miss the real thing. I wonder if his 
splendid nerve will break down at the last? 

The day of execution was set at a week 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


271 


hence. The “ de facto government, as the 
British and American consuls insisted upon 
calling it, apparently had decided that in the 
interest of civilization the dread sentence of 
the law should be carried out with due deco- 
rousness. 

Stump, who was by trade a carpenter and 
who had in some unaccountable way been ex- 
perienced in erecting gallows, was seen direct- 
ing the erection of a novel sort of framework 
on the public “ Malae ^ at Kulinuu. 

“ Who gave you the job ? O^Neil asked 
Stump, after he and Marley had watched the 
work for several minutes. 

Stump did not answer ; instead he drew 
near the boatswain^s mate and whispered 
anxiously : 

‘ Bully ^ Scott hasn^t left the islands yet. 
He and the ^Talofa^ are around at Saluafata 
harbor, the other end of the island. He sent 
me word by a native to come back, or he’d 
come and get me.” 

‘‘ You don’t believe he will, do you ? ” 
O’Neil asked. 

There ain’t many things he won’t do 

^ Malae — Square. 


272 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

when he sets his mind to it/' Stump replied 
nervously. ‘‘ Klinger offered me this job/' 
he added. I've done some smart carpenter- 
ing in my time. I've got to earn enough 
money to pay my way back to ^ Frisco.' " 

O'Neil's sympathy was aroused at once. 

‘‘ You're an American," he said. Why 
don't you ship in the navy ? We need a car- 
penter." 

Stump shook his head. 

‘‘ No more going to sea for Ben Stump. 
I'm going home and look up my folks." 

Wlien's this show coming off? " O'Neil 
asked, changing the subject ; he saw Stump 
wasn't keen to go in the navy again. 

Between you and me, Mr. O’Neil," Stump 
confided, I don't believe this here gallows 
will ever grow any fruit." Stump was about 
to say more, but perceiving Klinger riding 
his pony toward them, he shuffled awkwardly 
away, and began again to direct his native 
workmen. 

Did he mean they ain't going to hang 
this murderer?" Marley asked of his friend. 

O’Neil nodded. I think he did," he re- 
plied, ‘‘ and I guess he's about right." 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


273 

The day before the execution a rumor 
passed through the native population that 
the man who had killed the black boy would 
not be hung, after all. 

Alice brought the gossip to the consulate. 

“ They would hardly dare a rescue,’^ Mr. 
Lee declared. 

O'Neil said he had heard from Stump, the 
man who built the gallows, that it wouldn’t 
be used,” Phil informed them. 

“ Just playing to the gallery, I reckon,” 
I Commander Tazewell suggested. 

If I were only sure the poor fellow won’t 
I be hung,” Alice said earnestly, ‘‘ I’d go and 
‘ see the ceremony.” 

It’s no place for women,” Mr. Lee said 
f reprovingly. ‘‘ On the contrary, if I thought 
1 the * de facto ’ government was honest in its 
desire to promote the Kapuan morals instead 
of making a fiasco out of it, I’d go and oc- 
cupy a front row seat.” 

The next day when Phil and Sydney with 
I many other curious white men, both from 
? shore and the war-ships, reached the Malae, 
they found gathered a great throng of natives 
! of both sexes. 


274 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

‘‘ I guess Stump, O’Neil and all the rest of 
them were wrong,'’ Phil said, after they had 
taken their seats and noted that the hour set 
had nearly arrived. Below the gallows the 
prisoner sat in a chair, just as unconcerned 
as he had been when he watched the panto- 
mime rehearsal of his own death. Mr. Carl- 
son, in full consular uniform, was the only 
official present. The king, with the count 
seated on his right hand, was a few yards in 
front of the gallows. A company of native 
soldiers under arms was drawn up near the 
high structure. Klinger was standing off by 
himself apparently only an interested spec- 
tator. 

Phil saw Stump behind the prisoner; ap- 
parently, he was to advise the native hang- 
man, and make sure that there would be no 
painful error in the proceedings. 

It’s a life for a life,” Sydney exclaimed 
turning almost sick, as he saw the prisoner 
jerked to his feet by Johnny Upolu and 
his two drilled assistants. The irons were 
quickly struck off and the man’s arms pin- 
ioned in a manner that reflected great credit 
upon Johnny. A native band suddenly 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


275 


struck up a doleful march, and the death 
party, keeping perfect time, moved off to the 
very foot of the ladder of the gallows. 

Tm sorry I came,” Phil said nervously. 
‘‘ I don’t want to see the poor fellow put to 
death.” 

Look I ” Sydney exclaimed. The Herzo- 
vinian consul had risen and was walking 
toward the king. The music suddenly 
stopped. The prisoner, held on each side by 
a policeman, was stopped, one foot already 
upon the ladder to the platform. 

The midshipmen gazed in wonder at the 
sudden interruption. They saw the consul 
present a paper to the king, who quietly read 
it, then bowed his affirmative answer. 

A reprieve,” Phil exclaimed. I’m glad 
of it, and I’ll never go to another hanging.” 
Both suddenly laughed nervously. They 
were glad in their young hearts that the 
murderer was not to expiate his crime on the 
gallows. 

A talking man rose to tell the people. The 
midshipmen could not understand a word, 
but the effect upon the crowd showed the 
news was to their liking. Suddenly several 


276 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

voices were raised in song ; slowly the volume 
increased until every native had joined in. It 
was a song of praise for Herzovinia. 

“ A play for popularity/^ Sydney said dis- 
gustedly as they moved away toward the road 
and back to the landing. “ And another step 
toward annexation.’' 


CHAPTER XVI 


GAEL KLINGER 

Avao appeared at the consulate one morn- 
ing a few days after the count’s Siva-Siva 
dance, her black eyes bright with indigna- 
tion. 

See,” she exclaimed as she handed to 
Alice a sheet of paper on which was printed 
a dozen or more lines. 

Alice read slowly, the color mounting to 
her cheeks and her breath coming faster. 

They have confiscated all of Tuamana’s 
land,” she exclaimed, “ and branded him a 
rebel to the king. This is the official notice 
posted about the town.” 

Phil, in spite of the evident seriousness of 
this act to the native girl, could not suppress 
a smile. 

Kind of mixed up affair, isn’t it?” he said 
quietly. “ Rebel Kataafa brands the loyal 
Tuamana a rebel.” 

** This is Klinger’s work,” Alice declared. 

277 


278 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

The land is most valuable, cocoanut and 
banana groves, and worth a dollar a tree every 
year for the copra alone. There must be over 
a thousand trees on the land. IPs a fortune, 
and it is all that Tuamana’s family possesses.’’ 

Can nothing be done?” Sydney asked 
solicitously. “ Where is it located ? ” 

“ Let’s go and look it over,” Phil suggested, 
if it isn’t far away.” 

The horses were quickly saddled and the 
four were soon on the way to visit the family 
estate of Tuamana, chief of Ukula. 

It was near the sea beach, to the eastward 
of Matautu. As they approached the cocoa- 
nut grove they beheld a number of black 
boys^ running barbed wire through new fence 
pales, recently set up. 

They are fencing it off already,” Alice ex- 
claimed as they halted their ponies. 

Avao pushed her pony across the wire that 
had not as yet been stretched, calling to the 
others to follow. Very soon they arrived in 
front of a very large native house. Several 
women sitting within quickly arose and 
greeted them. 

^ Solomon Islanders are black j Kapuans are brown. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


279 

Avao talked with them for several minutes. 

‘'My relatives say that Missi Klinger has 
ordered them to move their house ; that it is 
on the Kapuaii firm's property," Avao said, 
her voice breaking in mortified anger. 

They had all dismounted and several of the 
native men had climbed trees to gather fresh 
cocoanuts for their visitors. 

Suddenly a cry of alarm was raised, and 
one of the young natives slid quickly down 
the tree and dodged off into the bush. Phil 
and his friends had just reached the house 
when they heard a hoarse cry of anger, fol- 
lowed by a loud report as of a pistol dis- 
charge. Phil hurriedly moved until he could 
see between trees that the other native was 
standing at the foot of the tree into which he 
had climbed, and that Klinger was beating 
him with his slave whip. The native was 
silent, stoically accepting the punishment 
from the white man, while yet in his hands 
were several green cocoanuts he had just 
gathered. 

“ Who is the native boy?" Phil asked of 
Avao. He saw her lips were trembling. 

“ My cousin," she said. 


28 o a united states MIDSHIPMAN 


Phil, acting upon a strong impulse to pro- 
tect the native, who had been acting in his 
own service, turned and rapidly approached 
the brutal scene. 

“ Mr. Klinger,^' he exclaimed tensely, 
‘‘ you will please stop whipping that native 
at once. It’s outrageous. What has he done 
to deserve such punishment?’’ 

With his whip hovering over the bruised 
back of the native, Klinger gazed angrily at 
the intruder. 

This is my method of punishing these 
rebels who steal my fruit,” he replied, and 
then the cruel whip again fell upon the 
native’s quivering back. 

Stop it, I say ! ” Phil cried determinedly. 
‘‘ I shan’t stand idly by and see you maltreat 
that poor fellow. He was gathering his own 
fruit for us to eat. You are the one who is 
stealing other people’s fruit, and what’s more,” 
and Phil’s voice rose high in indignation, if 
you don’t get off of this place and take your 
slaves with you. I’ll whip you with your own 
rawhide.” 

Klinger’s hand dropped to his side in 
sheer dumfounded amazement. He gazed in 





‘Sou ARi: 


SIMPLY A LULLY ” 






1 . » 

'fhtJr I ’■ 


A 




I I*,' 


A 








' > Wi^BBgp 

« ^^mSi 




l"-^ 

h>a!. 


''/rt '.• : ,-j 


^ i V 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 281 

bewilderment at this young man, not able to 
realize that such words had been addressed 
to him. 

Phil made a sign for the native to go, and 
the stolid but mystified native smiled in his 
pain and moved out of reach of the whip. 

“ Now go,^^ Phil commanded to Klinger. 
“ This place is private property, and you are 
trespassing.^* He pointed the way out. 

Klinger slowly recovered his balance. 
Then a sinister smile spread slowly over his 
face. 

“ I can show you that you and your friends 
are the trespassers,** he said evenly. “ Here 
is my title to the property, signed and ex- 
ecuted by the court.** He drew forth a paper 
from his coat pocket. 

Phil gazed squarely into Klinger*s face un- 
waveringly. “ You heard what I said,** the 
young midshipman replied. I saw the way 
you horsewhipped that inoffensive native ; if 
I were he I would wait my chance and give 
you back two blows for every one received. 
You are a brutal coward I Your kind don*t 
fight. You are simply a bully ! ** 

Klinger, fairly aroused, was now stung 


282 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


to action ; again he raised his cruel whip, 
slinging the long lash behind him and re- 
treating a step to give the blow fair play. 
Phil did not budge. He saw the long leash 
raise itself as if alive from the ground ; he 
heard it sing in the air above him, expecting 
it to wrap itself stinging and biting about his 
neck. But it passed harmlessly a few inches 
from his shoulder and fell upon the ground 
at his feet with a dull report. Then he could 
hardly believe his eyes, for his antagonist was 
rolling on the ground, a naked brown body 
clinging desperately to him. 

Phil was transfixed in astonishment. His 
first intention, to go to the aid of the native, 
he saw was unnecessary. The supple native 
boy had found his strength and was slowly 
choking the breath from the manager's body. 
Klinger^s face had turned purple before Phil 
could persuade the injured native to desist. 
The boy was fairly delirious with savage joy 
over his wonderful achievement. Klinger 
lay insensible upon the ground. Phil 
stooped, the managers whip in his own 
hands, and tore the man’s shirt at the 
neck and felt for his heart. He feared that 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 283 

some permanent injury might have been done 
him. 

Sydney and the others were now at PhiFs 
side. Avao openly praised the native boy for 
his prowess, and Phil learned that a command 
from her had sent this young bundle of steel 
muscles to protect him from the manager's 
cruel whip. The native grinned for joy. He 
had discovered his own manhood and pro- 
tected a papalangi friend of the queen of his 
clan from a ruffianly slave driver. 

He’s nearly choked to death,” Phil an- 
nounced as he rose to his feet. That boy 
has the strength of a young gorilla in his 
hands. Look at those marks on Klinger’s 
neck.” 

The manager’s neck was a sorry sight ; the 
cords and muscles had been twisted and al- 
most pulled bodily from the broad throat. 

“ He’ll have an awfully sore throat when 
he wakes up,” Sydney said quietly. 

“ We must get him to a doctor at once,” 
Phil exclaimed. Avao, call to those slave 
boys. We must have him carried to town.” 

The Tapau called, and several of the blacks 
started toward them. 


284 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Then Phil thought of the native boy who 
had come to his aid. He feared for him. He 
knew that some cruel and unheard-of punish- 
ment would be given to the native that dared 
to so roughly handle the manager of the 
Kapuan firm. Death even was not impos- 
sible, especially as the native was a relative 
of Tuamana. 

‘‘Avao,^’ he whispered, “tell the boy to go 
away far and not come back until you send 
him word.’^ 

“ He knows, Alii,” Avao replied. The boy 
pressed his forehead hurriedly to the girl’s 
hand, and then murmuring, “ Tofa, Alii,” ^ 
with a cheerful grin vanished into the “bush,” 
just as the first of the Solomon Islanders 
arrived to raise their fallen master. 

With Klinger carried on the shoulders of 
several black boys, and with the Americans 
bringing up the rear, the party proceeded 
toward the town. 

Fortunately a carriage was hitched at the 
British consulate and the driver sitting in 
the shade near by. They put Klinger in- 
side, while Phil and Sydney remained to sup- 

*Tofa, Alii — Good-bye, chief. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 285 

port him, and thus they drove hurriedly to 
Klinger’s residence back of the store. 

This isn’t going to improve the kind feel- 
ing between us and the ‘ de facto’ govern- 
ment,” Phil said. 

“ I’m glad you are not responsible,” Sydney 
declared. 

“ But I was,” Phil insisted. “ I goaded him 
on to strike me. I had an irresistible desire 
to take his whip and give him a plentiful 
taste of his own medicine. He would have 
struck me, too. I saw it in his eyes. He 
has an ungovernable temper, and was clean 
off his head.” 

“ Why will you be so rash ? ” Sydney asked 
affectionately. Some day you’re going to 
get into serious trouble.” 

I can’t help it, Syd,” Phil answered 
soberly. Such acts as that, beating an in- 
offensive native, make my blood boil, and I’m 
thankful I have the courage and strength to 
interfere. You would have done it too, Syd,” 
he exclaimed, “ if you had seen it before I did.” 

Sydney shook his head. No,” he replied. 

My blood is more sluggish than yours. You 
did exactly right though, Phil.” 


286 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 


Phil was silent for a moment. Klinger’s 
face was now regaining its color, but his body 
was still limp and his eyes closed. 

‘‘ Syd,” Phil said quietly, you are really 
more solid than I. You reflect before you 
act. I too frequently act upon impulse with- 
out reflection.” 

“ You act, though, only upon good im- 
pulses,” Sydney replied. 

The carriage stopped in front of the Kapuan 
firm’s store, and a couple of bystanders were 
impressed to carry the injured man inside. 

Go tell the ‘ fomai,’ ” Phil instructed a na- 
tive woman, and she departed quickly to obey. 

“Shall we wait?” Phil asked nervously. 
This part of the ordeal was trying for the 
midshipman. 

“ I guess we must,” Sydney replied. “ We 
shall have to explain how it happened.” 

Phil frowned. “ I’m not going to reveal the 
identity of that native boy. Maybe Klinger 
did not recognize him.” 

The manager had been carried into his own 
room, while Fanua, his native wife, hovered 
over him anxiously. She gazed in open dis- 
trust upon the two officers. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 287 

Here comes the little doctor,” Sydney ex- 
claimed in relief, as the same fat, middle-aged 
man that had before restored the injured 
Klinger after his earlier encounter with Phil 
pushed his way through the crowd of inquisi- 
tive natives, and entered the room. 

Klinger had opened his eyes. The pain in 
his throat made him cry out weakly. 

The doctor examined the injured man’s 
neck in silence. 

A black boy run ‘ amuck ’ ^ ” he asked 
after he had finished the examination. It 
looks as if a whole gang had risen against him.” 

Klinger tried to speak, but his voice failed. 

We’ll leave now,” Phil returned. His 
nerves were under tension. He felt no sym- 
pathy for Klinger, yet wished to avoid a dis- 
agreeable scene with the injured man. I 
shall be ready to give my story whenever it is 
asked for. Good-day, sir.” 

Sydney followed Phil from the room. 

It’s a relief to get away,” Phil declared. 

They went at once to the ship and told their 
story to Commander Tazewell. 

' Amuck — A form of insanity where the person affected desires 
to kill. 


288 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

‘‘That isn't the only land grabbing the 
Kapuan firm has been indulging in," he in- 
formed them. “ Our lease of land at Tua-Tua 
in Kulila has been declared illegal by Kataafa 
and affirmed by the acting chief justice, 
Count Rosen. The Kapuan firm, I hear, 
brought in evidence of a prior claim of pur- 
chase. Of course it's a trick, but we can't 
prove that before an interested judge." 

The midshipmen drew in their breath in 
surprise. Evidently the land grabbing was 
not confined to property owned by uninfiuen- 
tial natives. 

“ I have searched all morning," the com- 
mander exclaimed annoyedly, “ for the lease 
signed by Moanga, the chief of Tua-Tua, who 
owns the property. I took it from the safe 
yesterday and thought I had returned it there, 
but it is not in the regular envelope. Prob- 
ably it is only mislaid, and I shall find it 
among my other papers. I'm afraid I'm 
getting careless. A natural effect of this 
torrid climate." 

“Are you going to dispute the claim?" 
Phil asked. 

“ That was my intention," Commander 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 289 

Tazewell replied, ‘‘ but the lease is a private 
one between Chief Moanga and myself. It 
must be confirmed at home before money is 
appropriated. Of course I acted under in- 
structions from the Navy Department. It’s 
embarrassing not to find the paper, because I 
cannot register an appeal very well with- 
out it.” 

‘‘ Do you believe it has been stolen ? ” Phil 
asked earnestly. His thoughts had gone to 
the orderly Schultz. 

That isn’t likely,” the commander said, 
shaking his head. No one has access to my 
cabin while I’m not here except a few 
trusted men who keep it clean, and my 
orderlies, and all of them are men with ex- 
cellent records. No,” he added certainly. 

It’ll turn up ; it’s probably in a wrong 
envelope, and I’ll find it after more search. 

So Klinger has again come to grief 1 
through you,” he said to Phil suppressing a 
smile of gratification. “ I am glad you did 
not carry out the threat you made. I wouldn’t 
care to have my officers engage in fights with 
civilians. It doesn’t look well outside, even 
though it may have been justified.” 


290 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Phil acknowledged the mild rebuke. 

1 know I’m too hasty,” he said humbly. 

The next day news came from ashore that 
all the male relatives of Tuamana had been 
arrested for the assault on Klinger and thrown 
into jail. The house the midshipmen had 
visited the day before had been demolished 
by order of Klinger, and the women turned 
off the place. 

Alice was keyed to a high pitch of excite- 
ment when the lads saw her in the afternoon. 

“ They tried to arrest Avao, too,” she ex- 
claimed, “ but she ran away and managed to 
reach the consulate, where they dared not 
touch her. All the land belonging to Panu’s 
family in Matafeli has been claimed by 
Klinger for his firm,” she told them almost 
in a breath. Where will it all stop? ” 

It won’t stop,” Phil replied savagely, 

until the present outfit are put out and the 
legal government is put in. The treaty is 
being violated right and left. I can’t see 
what this man Count Rosen expects to gain 
by it. The three great Powers when they 
hear what is going on down here must decide 
that the high-handedness of Rosen and 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


291 

Klinger have only made things more difficult 
to adjust.’^ 

'' Maybe that^s where the count expects to 
g'din” Alice said seriously. Maybe their 
country wishes to make difficulties — to show 
the other nations that three countries cannot 
together run one little group of islands with- 
out war and bloodshed. 

‘‘ I, for the life of me” Sydney declared, 
“ cannot see why the United States and Eng- 
land don’t pull up stakes and leave the islands 
to Herzovinia. I know we have our eyes 
on the fine harbor of Tua-Tua, but I can’t see 
when we are going to use it.” 

Maybe you can’t see ! ” Phil replied sar- 
castically, “ and one reason you can’t see is 
that you haven’t given it a minute’s thought. 
Herzovinia has a body of intelligent men in 
her government whose duty it is to study 
such questions. It is quite evident those 
men have advised their nation to endeavor 
to acquire Kapua, and this is her way of try- 
ing to acquire it. The captain of the British 
war-ship told us the other day that he had 
seen their machinery of annexation work 
over in Africa. 


292 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

First comes the merchant, pushing his 
way in by brute strength and awkwardness, 
shoving out all other merchants by staying 
close to his job. Then a row between the 
merchants and the natives, followed closely 
by the arrival of a war-ship. Then a punitive 
expedition against the natives who have dared 
to resent the oppression of the merchants. 
Then diplomatic correspondence assuring other 
nations there is no thought of acquisition of 
territory and then all of a sudden up goes the 
Herzovinian flag, and the thing has been ac- 
complished. As I said before,” Phil ended 
his impromptu speech, I can’t see why the 
count hesitates about hoisting his flag. We 
can’t stop him. We haven’t men enough.” 


CHAPTER XVII 


BEN STUMP LISTENS 

Carl Klinger paced the porch of the 
count's home in visible annoyance. Count 
Rosen surveyed the angry overseer compla- 
cently from his easy chair under the shade of 
the thatched roof porch. 

Don't be an idiot, Klinger," he said. 

You can't afford to indulge in personal 
vengeance. The American officer has gotten 
ahead of you and put you to shame before 
the natives, and I think you deserved it. 
Your work was childish. Putting that cartoon 
on your wall was bad enough, but to attempt 
to thrash a native relative of Tuamana under 
the eyes of his own friends and supporters 
was infantile. If you don't stop swearing 
vengeance upon that young midshipman 
I'll be forced to lock you up in your own 
house and put a guard over you. To attempt 
such barefaced outlawry as an attack upon 
the person of an American naval officer by 
293 


294 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

hired thugs would only lead to intervention 
by the war-ships/^ 

Klinger sulked in silence, and the count 
continued : 

The last mail steamer carried Kataafa’s 
appeal for annexation. It was to be cabled 
from San Francisco to our government. An 
answer should reach here now in a few days. 
The news of the war of course is now known 
everywhere, but I am sure our own war-ship 
with instructions for us will arrive first. The 
United States may beat us, but upon the ap- 
pearance of a Yankee ship I’m going to 
hoist the flag. Even sooner if I hear from 
our man on the Yankee ship anything alarm- 
ing.” 

Why do you take such chances ? ” Klinger 
asked surlily. We’re in power. The Eng- 
lish and Americans are afraid to act without 
orders from home. Hoist the flag and be done 
with it ! ” 

Klinger,” the count replied haughtily, 
“ as long as you keep within your limitations 
as a manager of a commercial firm, grabbing 
land from defenseless natives and using it to 
increase the income of your company, then I 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


295 

am willing to listen to your advice, but when 
you make bold to advise me upon mat- 
ters of state, you make yourself ridiculous. 
This savage kingdom is isolated from the great 
world,” he continued in a more kindly tone 
of explanation as he saw the look of apology 
in the rough overseer’s face. ^‘The nearest 
cable stations are San Francisco and Auck- 
land ; news of what has happened reached our 
capital before or as soon as it was received in 
Washington or London. A Herzovinian war- 
ship has been waiting in Auckland to bring 
us instructions. I do not know the present 
diplomatic situation. If I hoist the flag be- 
fore the arrival of the war-ship, I may And the 
instructions are not to hoist the flag. We may 
be on the verge of a war with our commercial 
rival England over some other diplomatic dif- 
ficulty, and our action here might greatly em- 
barrass our foreign office.” 

But you said,” Klinger persisted, you 
would hoist the flag upon the appearance of 
a Yankee war-ship.” 

'‘The arrival of another Yankee war-ship 
must mean but one thing,” the count replied 
patiently, and that would be that the United 


296 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

States government had decided to back the 
decision of the chief justice and put Panu- 
Mafili on the throne by force. In that case I 
would have to resign. Kataafa would either 
have to submit or else fight the white sailors. 
If the new arrival sees our flag flying and our 
sailors in possession, then the' Americans and 
British must stop and think a long time before 
they use force to drive us out of the govern- 
ment.’^ 

And then after that if your instructions 
coming on our war-ship should be not to hoist 
the flag? ” Klinger asked. What then ? ” 

“ Then I shall send a war-ship to Auckland 
post-haste to tell what I have done, and to 
wait for an answer, and then hasten back here.” 
The count smiled proudly as his plan unfolded 
itself. Our government could then wait to 
see how the news was received. If they saw 
it was embarrassing they could order the flag 
hauled down. If not, then it would remain 
flying permanently.” 

“ I have that lease of land at Tua-Tua made 
by Chief Moanga to the American captain,” 
Klinger said jubilantly, showing the docu- 
ment, and Scott has gone across to get 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


297 

Moanga’s signature to one I drew up for the 
‘ firm/ and to destroy the other duplicate.” 

The count nodded. Tua-Tua we should 
keep, but the United States government may 
succeed in getting the island of Kulila after 
all. She has had her eyes on it for many 
years, and doubtless thinks her claim is first. 
We would not fight her for it, so unless we can 
win out through diplomacy it will be hers.” 

‘‘ Little good it will do her,” Klinger said 
savagely, “ when the Kapuan firm owns the 
only water-front that is not full of quicksand.” 

The count chuckled. “ We statesmen can 
always receive a lesson from a clever merchant. 
No doubt the United States will be forced to 
pay a fancy price for your land when she 
makes up her mind to build a naval station 
there. By the way,” he added, “ I thought 
Scott was intent upon saving his skin, and had 
sailed for the Fijis.” 

“That was his intention,” Klinger replied, 
“ but he ran into Fangaloa Bay for water, and 
heard you owned the government; so he sent 
me word he was staying around to get a cargo 
of copra, and incidentally to coax back his 
mate Stump.” 


298 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

‘‘And you sent him to Tua-Tua on a mis- 
sion to Chief Moanga? ” the count asked point- 
edly. “What does he receive for that 
service? ” 

“ Stump/^ Klinger replied. “ He also got 
a cargo of copra to be landed in Suva.’' 

The count shook his head doubtfully. 
“ That’s a serious business, to seize an American 
and ‘ shanghai ’ him,” he said. 

“ It will be done without force,” Klinger ex- 
plained. “ Stump is in our employ. He’s 
trying to pay his way back to America. I’ll 
have him in Fangaloa on some plantation 
work, and let Scott do his own shanghaiing. 
Scott should be back at Fangaloa to-day unless 
he had trouble persuading Moanga.” 

The portly figure of Mr. Carlson emerged 
from the palm and banana grove in front of 
the bungalow. A few seconds later he arrived 
on the porch, puffing and blowing from his 
exertions. As the count and the overseer 
turned to greet him, none too graciously, the 
figure of a man unrolled itself from the tapa 
draperies of a window opening on to the porch, 
and silently withdrew through the kitchen in 
the rear. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


299 

Stump, for it was he, held in his hand a 
hammer and nails, and unconcernedly told 
the native cook that he would come back to 
make imaginary repairs. 

After the mate had put several hundreds 
of yards between himself and the governor’s 
house, he stopped and called down all manner 
of vengeance upon Klinger’s head. Then he 
took a wide detour arriving breathless at the 
landing, hired a boat and was soon in Com- 
mander Tazewell’s cabin. 

While Stump retailed the conversation he 
had heard between the count and Klinger, 
Commander Tazewell’s indignation mounted 
higher and higher. When he heard of the 
plan to rob his government of Tua-Tua as a 
coaling station and the fact that his contract 
had fallen into Klinger’s hands, the com- 
mander’s brows gathered in a perplexed frown. 
There must be a spy on his own ship ! In 
no other way could the paper have been 
stolen from his cabin. 

Phil, answering the commander’s summons, 
was soon informed of Stump’s exciting news. 

The commander was disappointed in seeing 
no surprise in Phil’s face when he heard 


300 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

that the Tua-Tua lease was in Klinger’s 
hands. 

“ Then you have suspected that there is a 
spy on board this ship,” the commander ex- 
claimed incredulously, and have not con- 
fided your suspicions to me I I’m surprised 
and disappointed in you, Mr. Perry,” he added 
accusingly. 

Phil fiushed guiltily. It was really not 
a suspicion, sir,” he stammeringly answered, 
‘‘and has only developed into a suspicion 
after listening to the news Stump here 
brings.” 

The lad then detailed what had occurred 
the night the “ Talofa ” and Captain Scott 
had entered the harbor, when he had thought 
he had surprised Schultz, the captain’s orderly, 
endeavoring to listen to the conversation be- 
tween Commander Tazewell and the British 
commander. 

“ His explanation, sir,” he added, “ was so 
readily given, that I thought I had been mis- 
taken. Then when I learned his name was 
Schultz, the suspicion returned ; only that 
didn’t seem sufficient proof to accuse him 
of spying. When you told me earlier of the 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


301 

loss of the lease I again thought of Schultz, 
but you seemed to think the paper was only 
mislaid. Em sorry, sir,'' Phil stammered in 
embarrassment. I see now I should have 
made a clean breast of it before." 

“ Don't worry over that, Perry," Com- 
mander Tazewell said kindly. “ Hindsight, 
you know, is always better than foresight. 
If I had been you I doubt if I should have 
acted differently, so I have no right to blame 
you. I know you are loyal, and will always 
act in a way that seems to you right and 
straightforward." 

Stump had been sent forward to seek out 
O’Neil. The captain had desired that the 
mate remain on board the Sitka" for the 
present, a request which Stump was only too 
happy to accept. 

“ The most serious part of this news," Com- 
mander Tazewell exclaimed, “ is that it shows 
the whole plot unearthed, and yet I don't see 
any way now to thwart the conspirators." 

“ Where's the ‘ Sacramento ' ? " Phil asked 
excitedly. 

At last accounts, in Honolulu, or at least 
expected there. She sailed from Panama some 


302 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

weeks ago/' Commander Tazewell replied 
thoughtfully. There's no cable to Hono- 
lulu, so if she is to come here, word must be 
dispatched by steamer from San Francisco. 
If Stump has heard correctly, the count knew 
that a Herzovinian war-ship was waiting in 
Auckland to bring the government’s orders 
to annex or not to annex. That, according to 
the count, would depend upon the diplomatic 
conditions. Of course,” the commander added, 
“ there can be no question of a European war 
over Kapua. The thing would be impossible, 
and not worth the life of a single soldier or 
sailor.” 

Phil shook his head, much puzzled over 
the situation. 

‘‘ It’s all very confusing to me, sir,” the 
lad said. “ The personal feelings between the 
Herzovinians on one side and the English 
and ourselves on the other are so strongly 
antagonistic that I’m sure if we were put 
ashore together and left there for a week we 
would be fighting, although for the life of me 
I can’t see what it would be about. I haven’t 
any personal interest in Kapua and really 
admire the Herzovinians greatly, yet I am as 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


303 

antagonistic as any one to her getting the 
islands/^ 

Commander Tazewell laughed in high 
amusement. Yes,” he replied, it is re- 
markable how men isolated as we are focus 
our minds upon local affairs that should not 
really influence us. Here am I, out of cable 
communication with Washington. I see this 
nation through private individuals plot to 
take over a group of islands in which the 
country I represent has one-third share. If I 
precipitate a fight with a foreign power in 
order to retain that one-third right given us 
by treaty, I may And upon receipt of mail that 
the government has decided to relinquish its 
claim. Meanwhile through my action blood 
may have been spilled.” 

Why does a government, like ours espe- 
cially, so often change its mind in these inter- 
national affairs?” Phil asked. 

It doesn’t change its mind often,” the 
commander smilingly replied, “ for it seldom 
makes up its mind. There is one thing, Mr. 
Perry, that few people seem to thoroughly 
understand, and our government has always 
disregarded. It is the relation between our 


304 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

international acts and our armed forces : the 
army and navy. 

“ If there exists a large army and a navy 
to back up our demands, then the other coun- 
tries will cheerfully grant them, but if the 
army and navy are small and weak, then the 
demands are not granted.^' 

Phil nodded his head. He was having ex- 
plained a problem over which he had long 
puzzled. 

So you believe then that whether Her- 
zovinia gets Kapua or loses it depends upon 
the relative power of her army and navy ? 
he asked. 

Exactly ; if she wants to seize Kapua I 
don’t see any way to stop it,” Commander 
Tazewell answered. “ Whether she will hold 
it or not must depend upon how highly Eng- 
land and the United States appraise the value 
of the Herzovinian army and navy to back 
up her act. If we think she is in earnest 
and will go to war rather than give up Kapua, 
then our statesmen must decide what will be 
the advantages or disadvantages of war to 
us.” 

But,” Phil exclaimed, '' she couldn’t fight 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


305 

both the United States and England, all at 
once.’^ 

‘‘ There, you see, is the true value of her 
great army and navy,'' Commander Tazewell 
answered solemnly. The two great nations 
might be able to defeat her, but it would not 
stop there. Probably many other nations of 
Europe would become involved." 

“ Then if Herzovinia had only a small 
army and navy," Phil said questioningly, 

the United States or England would pay 
no attention to her demands, and she would 
be forced to give in." 

** That's the whole thing in a nutshell," 
the commander exclaimed. ^‘Let us hope. 
Perry," he added, our great nation will be 
sensible enough to keep always a strong army 
and navy, so that we can be assured that we 
can do right without the need of asking some 
other nation's permission." 

As Commander Tazewell paused he unrolled 
a chart and spread it before him on the cabin 
table. 

It's nearly twenty miles from here to Fan- 
galoa Bay," he said after a few minutes' silent 
scrutiny of the chart of the Kapuan Islands. 


3o6 a united states MIDSHIPMAN 

Phil was at once keenly alert. What was 
in Commander Tazewell's mind ? 

‘‘I believe I am fully justified in seizing 
Scott and his schooner, and with Stump a 
witness against him we could try him for 
something very near piracy." Commander 
Tazewell smiled amusedly as he regarded 
Phil's, eager face, and was prepared for the 
lad's earnest question. 

‘'Will you go there with the ship?" Phil 
asked. 

“ No," the commander replied. “ I'm think- 
ing of sending you on a ‘ cutting out ' ex- 
pedition to bring back Scott and the schooner, 
either or both. Will you accept the job? " 

Phil fairly beamed with joyful anticipation, 
but he composed himself and answered : 

“ I'm ready to go anywhere you send me, 
sir." 

“ Schultz had best be watched," the com- 
mander added. “ It's wiser not to show him 
that we suspect him. He may help us to 
find out something to our advantage concern- 
ing our friends, the count and Klinger. 

“ I’ll tell the executive officer to let you 
have the steam launch, and he will get it 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


307 

ready for you beginning after dark. You 
can select the men you wish to go with you. 
Tuamana can pilot the launch through the 
reef at Fangaloa. Is there any suggestion 
you wish to make ? the commander asked 
as Phil arose to go from the cabin. 

“ I’d like to have Mr. Monroe go along to 
keep me company,” Phil replied quickly, 
and I thought it might be wise to go ashore 
now and try to find out from Avao or Mary 
Hamilton whether the ‘ Talofa ’ has reached 
Fangaloa on her return from her trip to Tua- 
Tua.” 

Commander Tazewell readily agreed with 
the lad’s suggestions. “ I’ll see you before 
you shove off to-night,” he said. “ And don’t 
get hurt. Scott and his schooner aren’t worth 
it.” 

Phil found Sydney and told him all the 
good news, and then sent for O’Neil and 
Stump. 

The mate gleefully volunteered to go along. 

‘‘ Can I navigate a schooner ! ” he exclaimed. 
Didn’t I bring her into Ukula harbor on 
the darkest tropical night I ever saw with 
only the white line of surf as buoys ? I’ll sail 


3o8 a united states MIDSHIPMAN 

her back for you, and sit on old * Bully ^ 
Scott’s face while I’m doing it.” 

He’d be handy to show us where the gear 
is located, sir,” O’Neil said approvingly, and 
besides, he knows the crew and can speak 
their * lingo.’ ” 

The two midshipmen after having been 
interviewed by the executive officer, who had 
come to think highly of the activity of his 
two young subordinates, were set on shore 
and at once sought their friend, Alice Lee, to 
find out what news she had gathered from 
her native friends. 

They found her in the hammock in the 
‘‘ lanai,” deep in a book. She greeted them 
without reserve. 

‘‘ It’s about time you came,” she exclaimed. 
“ I’ve been bursting with news for you.” 

“ What is it ? ” they both asked eagerly. 

I tried to go up on Mission Hill this 
afternoon and was refused,” Alice declared 
excitedly. The count has established a 
' lookout ’ station there. I saw half a dozen 
Herzovinian sailors with a long spy-glass 
mounted on a tripod ; and I saw signal flags 
too,” she added. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


309 


The midshipmen exchanged glances. 

‘^Looking for the ‘Sacramento/’’ Sydney 
exclaimed. Then they told Alice of the con- 
versation Stump had overheard and of their 
mission for that evening. 

“ That isn’t all my news,” Alice said 
proudly. “ One of the ‘ Talofa’s ’ crew, a Fiji 
Islander, arrived in Ukula, and Klinger rode 
away with him toward Saluafata. Mary 
Hamilton came and told me that an hour 
ago.” 

The two lads shook hands with each other 
in boyish excitement and joy, while Alice 
looked on thinking they had suddenly gone 
crazy. 

“ Don’t you see,” Phil explained to Alice’s 
inquiry. “ Scott and his schooner are back, 
and Klinger is going to get the lease and ex- 
plain that Stump will come later. We’ll 
catch the schooner anyway, and maybe Scott 
and the lease will also be on board.” 


CHAPTER XVIII 

A CUTTING OUT EXPEDITION 

Four bells was struck on board the Sitka/^ 
as the steam launch quietly shoved off from 
the gangway. 

The launch had been stripped of its bulky 
canopy and lay lean and low in the water. 
No lights were shown, and in the darkness 
the little craft hoped to leave the harbor un- 
observed. 

“What’s that for?” Sydney suddenly ex- 
claimed in alarm. 

The “ Sitka ” had turned on all her search- 
lights and was sweeping them in small arcs 
over the shipping and along the shore line. 

Phil chuckled. 

“ Throwing sand in their eyes,” he said. 
“ See that light held stationary on our ‘ look- 
out ’ hill. They can’t see us with that illumi- 
nation in their faces. There’s another light 
playing over the Herzovinian war-ship and 
310 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


311 

another on the Matafeli district where the 
count lives. It’s just a measure of safety. I 
heard Commander Tazewell give the order 
for it as we left the cabin a few minutes ago.” 

“ Those search-lights wdll nearly put your 
eyes out,” O’Neil declared. When I was serv- 
ing in a torpedo boat destroyer during the war 
manoeuvers we used to run full speed toward 
a battle-ship after we had sighted her steam- 
ing along with no lights showing. Then when 
she saw us and turned her search-lights on us, 
there was nothing doing. We couldn’t see 
nothing, and we didn’t know how far we were 
away.” 

The launch cleared the reefs at the entrance, 
and stood to the eastward. The craft was un- 
der the pilotage of Chief Tuamana, who had 
been delighted to aid his white friends against 
those he assumed to be his enemies. A course 
was laid from the chart to take them clear of 
the reef, and also far enough away so as not to 
be observed by natives fishing along its edge. 

Commander Tazewell especially cautioned 
secrecy,” Phil said, as he directed O’Neil, 
who was at the helm, to give the reef a wide 
berth. We are to act only at night, and sur- 


312 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

prise old man Scott. The natives on shore 
are to know nothing of our move.” 

‘‘ What's the idea of that? ” Sydney asked. 

The fear that if the count heard we had 
cut out the * Talofa ' he might use it as an ex- 
cuse to precipitate matters, I suppose,” Phil 
replied. He could give the episode vivid 
coloring and claim he had hoisted his nation's 
flag to prevent the high-handed and lawless 
acts of the American and English naval com- 
manders. It would sound well to those who 
didn't know all the particulars. Of course,” 
Phil added, another reason is that if we are 
seen, Scott may be informed and might resist 
us by force, and then the situation wouldn't 
be so simple; especially if he should use na- 
tives of Kataafa's side to resist us.” 

Sydney contemplated in silence the gun- 
ner's mate at his side who was critically exam- 
ining a machine gun on its portable tripod. 

The executive seems to have supplied us 
with enough force to overcome resistance,” the 
midshipman declared quietly. A machine 
gun and ten sailors with rifles should easily 
overpower Captain Scott and his crew.” 

Stump had listened in silence. Hearing 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


3^3 

Sydney’s observation he joined in the conver- 
sation. 

“ You’ll need all you’ve got to get ahead of 
* Bully ’ Scott,” he exclaimed wagging his head 
sagely, “ unless you surprise him. This here 
‘ Bully ’ Scott is a tough man to go fooling 
with. I seen him lay out nearly a dozen na- 
tives in the Solomon Islands. They were all 
trying to kill him with head knives and war 
clubs. He’s a dead shot with a revolver, and 
he usually carries two of them.” 

‘‘ I reckon he will not resist us. Stump,” 
Phil said confidently. We represent the 
law, you see, and if he hurts any one, he’ll be 
liable to a long term in jail.” 

Stump laughed mirthlessly. 

“ He’s entitled to that already,” he ex- 
claimed. That’s why he wants to lay his 
hands on me. And if he should,” the mate 
added with an involuntary shiver, “ the 
‘Talofa’ would arrive at its next port and 
‘ Bully ’ Scott with tears in his eyes would tell 
of the loss of his dear friend Stump, drowned 
at sea.” 

''What’s the plan, Phil?” Sydney asked 
some time later. 


314 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

We go first to Fangaloa Bay. If the 
* Talofa's ’ there we simply seize her and every 
one on board and take her back to Ukula 
harbor/^ Phil replied. 

‘‘That sounds simple enough/^ O^Neil de- 
clared, “ and, Mr. Perry, it’ll be just as easy as 
saying it. Only,” he added jokingly, “ we’ll 
have to keep our eyes on Stump. He’s likely 
to get mixed up with his old friend and ship- 
mate ‘ Bully ’ Scott.” 

The night was extremely dark, but the 
thunder of the surf on the reef guided them 
in keeping beyond that peril. The land 
loomed dark on the starboard hand, while over- 
head a brilliant starry sky accentuated the 
blackness of the night. Ashore, bright lights 
sprang up from time to time, revealing the lo- 
cation of native villages along the beach. 

Tuamana, a cape of native cloth slung pic- 
turesquely over his shoulders, stood silently 
beside O’Neil. The chief’s eyes were contin- 
ually upon the shore line. He was for the 
most part silent, but would occasionally turn 
to Phil, pointing to a group of lights ashore 
or to a deeper shadow against the loom of the 
land and inform him shortly of their bearings. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


315 

‘‘ Saluafata/^ he said as the thunder of the 
breaking surf grew louder and a ghastly 
whiteness appeared on the bow. 

Phil glanced at his watch. Eleven 
thirty/^ he said. We're about half-way." 

Most of the crew had curled themselves 
down in the bottom of the boat and lay 
motionless. Phil envied them. Even with 
the prospect of a hand to hand fight, against 
what odds they could not know, their healthy 
minds were wrapped in sleep. 

** What brought Captain Scott back. 
Stump ? " Phil asked after an unbroken 
silence of some minutes. “ He was supposed 
to have left the islands after landing the guns." 

Klinger said Scott heard that the Her- 
zovinians owned the government, and that 
he was therefore safe to come and get his 
copra," Stump answered. “ But I know that 
he’s looking for me. I know too much. 
I’ve seen more than one poor black boy 
kicked overboard when Scott was in one of 
his wild fits of anger." 

Why have you stayed so long with such a 
brute ? ’’ Sydney asked. 

Well, sir," Stump replied, I reckon I 


3i6 a united states MIDSHIPMAN 

was always too scared to run away. And 
then/* he added fearfully, I*ve got a few 
things to answer for, too. I was driven to 
*em, but before a court that don’t count. I 
hain’t got murder, though,” he declared. 

’Tain’t in no way as bad as that. Captain 
Scott swears I shoved a black boy overboard 
in a gale of wind, but ’fore God, it was an 
accident, and I asked to lower a boat and go 
after him, but Scott wouldn’t let me. I’ve 
done with it, and am willing to take what- 
ever medicine is coming.” 

‘‘ Fangaloa,” Tuamana grunted, pointing to 
the dim outline of a high cone-shaped moun- 
tain looming up on the starboard hand. 

The word soon spread among the sleeping 
forms, and presently all were keenly alert. 
The gunner’s mate had secured his machine 
gun to be prepared to rake the enemy with a 
withering fire in case of opposition. 

The launch turned between two bold head- 
lands and steered for the dark land. They 
were running into a long narrow arm of the 
sea — the Bay of Fangaloa, a mile wide and 
three miles deep. 

Every eye was strained ahead, gazing for 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


317 

the schooner. There were but few lights on 
the distant beach. Most of the natives were 
long ago in bed. 

Quietly the sailors had taken their stations. 
Each carried only a revolver ; for night use 
rifles are less effective. Phil and Sydney 
stood side by side ready to lead their men on 
board the Talofa.'^ The darkness was in- 
tense. The bold and densely wooded moun- 
tains rising precipitously above them cast a 
deep shadow over the waters of the bay. 

A satisfied grunt from Tuamana was the 
first news that their quarry had been located. 
The chiefs keen eyes had perceived the 
ghostly outline of a sail. In a few minutes 
all recognized the schooner, lying near the 
extreme end of the bay. Her great mainsail 
was set and its whiteness against the land had 
first revealed her presence. 

No one spoke. The steam launch had 
been slowed in speed, and all precautions 
taken to assure surprise. The fireman cease- 
lessly watched his boiler to prevent a sudden 
escape of steam and the machinist used oil 
freely to prevent the slightest machinery 
squeak which might reveal their presence. 


3i8 a united states midshipman 

In silence, except for the slight churn of 
the propeller and the swirl of water thrown 
from the bow of the launch in its progress, 
O'Neil steered straight for the black hull now 
distinctly outlined scarcely five hundred yards 
away. No lights were visible on the schooner 
— a good sign. The crew were either all asleep 
or ashore. 

The launch, with its engine stopped, swung 
alongside. Ready hands made her fast, and 
a moment after the deserted decks were held 
by the Americans. 

“ You look out for the forward hatch," Phil 
ordered Sydney. “ O’Neil, take a half dozen 
men with Stump, and make sail. Tell the 
launch to take a line and tow us out of the 
bog.” 

Phil with two sailors moved toward the 
cabin ladder. He gazed below into forbid- 
ding blackness. 

I wonder if Scott is down there?" he ex- 
claimed. If he is he will soon be up when 
he feels his ship under way." 

Phil heard the sound of the capstan as 
O’Neil and his men began to weigh the anchor. 
Then the squeak of gear grinding through 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


319 

unoiled blocks gave proof that the foresail 
and head-sails were being set. Soon a slight 
jar and the louder noise of the churning of the 
launch’s propeller told him the schooner was 
under way, and then slowly she moved through 
the quiet water of the bay toward the sea. 

Keep watch here,” Phil said to his two 
men. Then with his revolver in hand he 
slowly, cautiously descended the ladder. 
Stories told of this pirate Scott came into his 
mind. At the bottom the darkness was op- 
pressive. Phil endeavored to listen for the 
breathing of the man he sought, but his own 
heart-beats deafened him. He did not know 
which way to turn. Where were the sleeping 
quarters ? 

He fumbled in his pockets and drew forth 
a box of matches. Then quickly striking one 
he held it above his head. He was in a small 
cabin containing a table and a few leathered 
bunks. A door opened to his right. Advanc- 
ing he held the match before him. He saw 
the small room was a stateroom, but it was 
empty. Captain Scott was not on board the 
ship. Disappointedly he mounted the ladder 
and turned his steps forward. 


320 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Sydney and O^Neil had aroused the crew, 
six men in all, and had employed them haul- 
ing on ropes. Stump was talking with a tall 
native as Phil approached. 

“ Captain Scott isn’t in the cabin,” he in- 
formed his companions ; but we have his 
vessel, anyway.” 

^‘Did you go down there alone?” Stump 
exclaimed incredulously. 

“ I certainly did,” Phil replied, laughing 
half nervously at the evident surprise in 
Stump’s voice, “ and my heart’s still racing 
like that steam launch engine.” 

Mine would have stopped,” Stump de- 
clared. I’m glad he ain’t on board. I never 
want to see the old pirate again until I see 
him hanged.” 

** What does his crew say ? ” Phil asked. 

‘‘This is Maka,” Stump said indicating the 
tall native. “Captain Scott, he says, went 
ashore to meet Klinger somewhere, he doesn’t 
know where, and left word he’d sail in the 
morning.” 

“ Well, he won’t.” Phil chuckled. “ Gee I 
I’d like to see his face when he arrives and 
sees no schooner.” 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


321 

The little steam launch toiled away, drag- 
ging its huge burden toward the sea. 

It’s two o’clock,” Phil said looking at his 
watch by the light of a lantern. There will 
be little wind before morning, and then it 
will probably be offshore. I think we’d 
better have the launch tow us well clear of 
the reefs before we attempt to haul aft the 
sheets.” 

O’Neil nodded in agreement. 

We’ll have to arrange watches,” Phil said. 

I’m overpowered with sleep myself, and I 
suppose we all are in about the same condi- 
tion. We’ve four of us to stand watch. I 
insist on standing the first hour, then I’ll 
call you, Syd.” 

O’Neil protested : ‘‘ Excuse me, sir. You 
and Mr. Monroe are young and need lots of 
sleep. I couldn’t sleep if I tried. Stump 
here sometimes stays awake for days at a time. 
It’s all a matter of habit, this sleeping is. 
Now, please, you gentlemen go and turn in, 
and I’ll call you if anything happens that you 
ought to know of.” 

Phil was really too sleepy to protest vigor- 
ously, so he and Sydney curled down on 


322 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

mattresses, brought up from ScotPs cabin, and 
were soon sound asleep. 

When Phil woke the sun was high up and 
the “ Talofa was under sail. The steam 
launch raced along several hundred yards 
away. The breeze was light and the water 
smooth. 

There's smoke out there on the horizon," 
O’Neil said as he came aft, looking as fresh as 
if he had slept the whole night through. 
‘‘ There ain’t any steamer expected, is there, 
sir? ’’ 

Phil shook his head. Not for another 
week, anyway,’’ he replied excitedly. Then 
he gazed toward the land. “ We’re twenty 
miles from shore, at least,’’ he added. 

‘‘ The wind’s offshore, but the trade wind 
will be stronger out here when it starts up, 
and we can then make Ukula in one leg," 
O’Neil replied. 

Phil considered for several minutes. Was 
the smoke a Herzovinian war-ship or was it the 
“ Sacramento " ? If it was the latter it would 
be of great service to the admiral on board to 
know the conditions in Kapua before he was 
sighted by the watchful sailors on Mission 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


323 

Hill. If it turned out to be the other war- 
ship no harm could be done by taking a look 
at it. 

Bear up, O’Neil, and run down and in- 
vestigate,” Phil said quietly. Hail the 
launch and tell her to proceed toward Ukula, 
but keep outside until we catch up, and watch 
us for signals.” 

With the wind free the fast schooner fairly 
skimmed over the water, racing toward the 
curl of smoke barely distinguishable. 

Smoke down here means something,” 
O’Neil said as he returned with Stump after 
seeing that all the running gear was prop- 
erly belayed and the sails trimmed. Then he 
added cheerfully, “ We’ll be eating breakfast 
at the expense of our absent friend Captain 
Scott in a few minutes. Stump knows where 
he keeps his eatables, and we’ve got a seaman 
with us who can make as good coffee as you 
can buy in a first-class ^ Frisco ’ hotel.” 

It seemed ages to the anxious Americans 
before the small speck of a hull appeared 
beneath the curl of misty smoke. 

“ She’s painted white,” O’Neil exclaimed 
as he handed the binoculars to Phil. The 


324 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

midshipmen each took a look, then shook 
their heads. She was too far away. '' Imagi- 
nation, O’Neil,” Sydney suggested. 

“Another fifteen minutes and we’ll know 
for sure,” Sydney said nervously. “ I hope 
it’s the ^ Sacramento.’ ” 

The steam launch had disappeared, swal- 
lowed up against the background of the high 
mountains of the island. 

Slowly the speck on the horizon took shape. 
Anxiously the Americans watched, each eager 
to recognize some outline that would tell them 
whether the strange vessel was flying their 
flag or that of the power which to all intents 
and purposes was their rival, if not enemy. 

“ What will you do,” Sydney asked Phil 
excitedly, “ if she’s not the ^ Sacramento ’ ? ” 
Phil glanced aloft at the straining canvas. 
The wind had come out at southeast, and on 
the sea whitecaps of foam were here and there 
appearing. He knew that within the hour 
or even less a strong trade wind would be 
blowing fair for Ukula harbor. 

“ We’ll try to beat her in,” he replied, “ and 
announce her coming to Commander Taze- 
well. But,” he added hopelessly, “ what can 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


325 

he do? We are too weak now to oppose the 
count^s government, and with this reenforce- 
ment our chances will be hopeless.’’ 

“It’s the ‘Sacramento,’ all right!” O’Neil 
exclaimed. “ See those big bow sponsons for 
her guns. It’s all over but the shouting now 
for friend Kataafa I He’ll be doing a foot-race 
for his summer capital, and the count will 
be taking a voyage in a war-ship for his 
health!” 

No doubt longer existed. O’Neil’s brisk 
summing up of the events of the future 
brought a smile of relief to the lips of the 
midshipmen. Phil gazed long and earnestly 
at the approaching war-ship. She had appar- 
ently altered her course and was now heading 
down directly for them. 

A few moments later a puff of smoke was 
seen ejected from the high forecastle and a 
muffled report was heard some dozen seconds 
later — the universal message of the sea, an- 
nouncing, “ I desire to communicate.” 

The big war-ship, her decks crowded with 
curious sailors, lay motionless in the water as 
the schooner “ hove to ” close alongside. 

Phil had answered the hail and reported 


326 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

he had information of importance for the 
admiral. 

A boat shot down from the Sacramento’s ” 
davits, and was soon alongside the Talofa.” 

O’Neil tended the boat line and good-na- 
turedly chaifed the inquisitive boat’s crew. 

“ We’re doing a little buccaneering, that’s 
all,” he answered an eager inquiry as to their 
mission. The islanders are fighting between 
themselves. You fellows came just at the 
right time. Say,” he added, did you see 
anything of a Herzovinian war-ship heading 
this way, burning up the paint on her 
bottom ? ” 

The coxswain of the whale-boat declared 
that the schooner was the only sail they had 
sighted since leaving Honolulu, nearly two 
weeks ago. 

“It’s a big ocean, ain’t it?” O’Neil said 
thoughtfully. 

Phil stepped down into the whale-boat and 
was soon being rowed across to the war-ship. 
The admiral wished to hear the news directly 
and from Phil in person. 


CHAPTER XIX 


A REENFORCEMENT 

Rear Admiral Spotts, whose flag was 
flown at the masthead of the cruiser “ Sacra- 
mento/^ wasted no time in drawing from Phil 
the complete story of everything that had 
happened in Kapua. 

The captain of the flag-ship and the ad- 
miraPs flag-lieutenant were both present in 
the cabin and followed the lad’s narrative 
with great interest and amazement. 

Phil told of the decision by the chief justice 
for Panu-Mafili, and then the attack upon 
Ukula by Kataafa and his warriors, armed 
with guns purchased apparently from the 
Kapuan firm, of the appointment of Count 
Rosen as governor, and the appeal for annexa- 
tion to Herzovinia. 

“ I think I can now see,” the admiral de- 
clared, why the Washington government 
sent a revenue cutter post-haste from San 
327 


328 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Francisco to Honolulu to order me to proceed 
with my flag-ship to Kapua. A great wrong/' 
he added earnestly, has been done the treaty, 
and my duty is clearly to set it right, by force 
if necessary. I shall consider this Count 
Rosen an adventurer. 

Yet," he said after a few thoughtful min- 
utes, you say the count is prepared against 
my coming. When those of the ‘ de facto ’ 
government see our ship approaching, they 
are ready to take the responsibility of hoisting 
the Herzovinian flag over Kapua. Then I 
shall be powerless ; only an order from Her- 
zovinia can remove the badge of annexation. 
What we do after that will not be an act 
against the government of Kapua. It will be 
against the sovereignty of Herzovinia." 

A plan had suddenly flashed through PhiTs 
mind. The admiral was quick to see the 
sudden eagerness in the midshipman’s face. 
A kindly smile spread slowly over his own 
grizzled countenance. 

You have something rash and daring in 
mind, I am sure," he said, half in amusement, 
but half seriously. You have the local color 
and inspiration of contact. Tell us your plan." 



C ( 


IS ri' yl’JTK CLEAR 


? 




THE ADMIRAL ASKED 




* Y 
t 



' ' > ■ r. , *• "’• ■■-/-*'* <* ■ '51 



V-;, ^ t '•■** "'i - '■*'* * '.'^ 

1 ,'^^V '^'- ^ H 

isC'.,- i^f ■ A ,i..j 



t 




V-UjW t I » 'i • 'i 

V ^ ^ c-. - 

:• I , (ca Si ‘ J» ' 




< 






W •* 


m 


. '1 T^'WV 







i*A^ 


•/ ‘r 

t> 

H ^ 

« 

■ . ^ 

4 

4 .*♦ 

/ - 

- ifc^ 


'JM ‘ :’■ ’^ ',.J 


. I 


1 * 


[/ ' " 


fc 







I#1 


■*^Ji T . • ' * ’ 

' .itr '-^V 


t% 


iw^’ 


-r« 


vr 

, <j 

4. Hlit 


V* 


^ .■^' ,' 5 % %f ,- •• ;'.v 

. • • i * * * - V ' , 

T ' * 1 ' — , T > ' W 


y 



^ * In 







lA I 


9 t 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


329 

The humor of the situation suddenly struck 
Phil, and he blushed to the roots of his hair. 

Pardon me, sir, for being so bold,'^ he replied 
apologetically. The same thing must have 
also struck you, sir, and that is the ' Sacra- 
mento ^ must enter Ukula harbor at night 
and secretly and Commander Tazewell must 
meanwhile prevent the hoisting of the Her- 
zovinian flag.^^ 

All three of his hearers gave an ungrudg- 
ing assent. The admiral took out his watch. 

IPs now a little after one o’clock,’^ he said. 
“ We are thirty odd miles from Ukula. You 
can probably be there by dark. I’ll enter the 
harbor at ten o’clock to-night and shall have 
my entire force of three hundred men ashore 
within ten minutes after we anchor. Tell 
Commander Tazewell I shall leave all details 
to him, for he knows the situation better than 
I. Tell him my decision is to uphold the law 
of the chief justice under the existing treaty 
until our government orders me to do other- 
wise.” 

Phil thrilled with joyful excitement as he 
listened to the admiral’squiet but decided voice. 

Is it quite clear? ” the admiral asked. 


330 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

** Perfectly, sir,” Phil assured him. 

Then I must speed the parting guest.” 
The admiral smiled, and put out his hand. 

Phil shook the hand warmly. 

“ Happy is he who brings young men to his 
council table,” the admiral quoted. 

With Phil on board, the “ Talofa ” lost no 
time in squaring awa}’' for Ukula. The ‘‘Sacra- 
mento ” was seen to turn and head out to sea, 
so as not to be in danger of discovery from 
shore. Phil told the plan to his shipmates. 

“ ThaPs a corker I ” O’Neil exclaimed glee- 
fully. “There’s just one thing you haven’t 
mentioned,” he added seriously. “ They’ll see 
the ‘ Sacramento ’ coming in from the pilot 
station and maybe from Mission Hill. The 
Herzovinian war-ship will also be on the look- 
out.” 

Phil nodded. “ Yes,” he said questioningly. 

“ Then, sir,” the sailorman declared, “ we 
must prevent those at the pilot station send- 
ing the news, and blind the other two. A 
couple of our men can fix the pilot station, 
and our search-lights can do the rest. They 
can’t see the cruisers with those big glims in 
their eyes.” 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


33 ^ 

‘‘Fine suggestion, O’Neil,’' Phil exclaimed. 
“ I’ll certainly give it to the captain. And by 
the way, I have a thought,” he added eagerly, 
as the “ Talofa ” raced toward the distant land, 
all sails spank full and sheets straining. 
“ We’ll get on board the launch, leaving the 
‘ Talofa ’ outside to come in later after dark. 
It will create less curiosity. Stump and a 
couple of men can hold her.” He looked at 
Sydney questioningly. “ I reckon, Syd,” he 
said apologetically, “ you’ll have to miss the 
fun on shore and stand by the schooner.” 

Although the midshipman felt somewhat 
disappointed he did not show it. 

“ That’s natural,” he said. “ I’ll bring her 
in after dark, all right, and be in time in case 
there’s a row.” 

They found the steam launch awaiting them 
about fifteen miles from the harbor, and 
quickly transferred to her all but Sydney, 
Stump and two sailors, who remained to sail 
the schooner into Ukula. 

“ Don’t pile her on the reef,” Phil cautioned 
banteringly, as the steam launch shoved off 
from the “ Talofa’s ” side and headed at full 
speed for Ukula. 


332 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

We should be in by five o’clock/’ Phil said 
as he looked at his watch. Now,” he added, 
these are going to be exciting times, eh, 
O’Neil? I wonder what’s coming out of it 
all?” 

It looks as if that count was getting cold 
feet,” the boatswain’s mate replied. “If he’d 
had more nerve the Herzovinian flag would 
have been flying on the flagstaff at Kulinuu 
right now.” 

Phil shook his head. “ It’s a pretty big 
undertaking to annex a kingdom unless you 
are sure you’re going to be backed up,” he 
said. 

“ It didn’t take our admiral long to make 
up his mind,” O’Neil reminded. “ And he 
doesn’t know he’s going to be backed up, 
either.” 

“ That’s different,” Phil replied. “ He is 
only restoring a king to a throne under a law 
that he considers yet binding. And he has 
sufficient force to do it.” 

Chief Tuamana had shown evident and out- 
ward signs of great joy when Phil told him 
that the American admiral was going to up- 
hold the chief justice’s decision, and passing a 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


333 


big Kapuan canoe filled with natives, the de- 
lighted chief raised his voice to taunt his ene- 
mies, some of whom he recognized, when Phil 
by main force drew him down and told him 
forcefully to keep his counsel to himself. 

They’re just like schoolboys with a secret, 
sir,” O’Neil said. “ Those natives are on their 
way home, aren’t they? ” he asked of Tuamana. 
The launch was not over three miles from the 
harbor. The “ Talofa’s ” sail was barely in 
sight on the horizon. 

The chief shook his head. 

‘‘Going to Vaileli for a dance,” he an- 
swered in very broken English. “ Chief 
Tuatele is there in that boat ; he ask me to go 
along. He make fun of me.” The chief 
grunted in contempt. 

“ Do you mean there’s going to be a big 
Siva-Siva there to-night? ” Phil asked eagerly. 

Tuamana replied in the affirmative. “ This 
day big day at Vaileli plantation. Very big 
‘ Siva-Siva ’ and ‘ Talola.’ ” ^ 

As they drew nearer the harbor they saw 
large numbers of war canoes filled with na- 
tives, all dressed in gala attire, paddling out 

^ Talola — A ceremony of giving presents to the one honored. 


334 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

through the break in the reef, confirming 
Tuamana’s information. 

‘‘That’s a lucky stroke,’^ Phil exclaimed. 
“ Probably the count and Klinger will both 
be at the Vaileli plantation, and if so, there’ll 
be no trouble carrying out the admiral’s plan. 
I’m going to find out for sure,” he added as an 
extra large canoe holding nearly forty men 
and women passed them, its crew shouting 
and singing in high glee. 

“ Run up close,” Phil said quietly to O’Neil. 
Then to Tuamana, “ Say nothing of our 
plans,” he cautioned, “ only find out what’s 
actually going to happen.” 

The canoe paddlers stopped their efforts and 
waited. Twoscore eager smiling faces were 
turned upon the Americans, and from all the 
musical greeting of “ Talofa, Alii ” was given. 

Tuamana rose and with solemn dignity 
spoke to the people in the canoe. He was an- 
swered by an elderly warrior sitting in the 
stern of the canoe. Both Tuamana and the 
Kataafa warrior addressed maintained a 
haughty but dignified bearing toward each 
other. 

Finally Tuamana nodded, and the old pa- 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS * 


335 

triarch gave a command. The song again 
broke forth, and in perfect time the paddles 
were dipped and the canoe shot on her way. 

All Ukula go Vaileli, to-night, Tuamana 
said, after the launch had again been headed 
for the harbor. Big ' Talola ^ and ‘ Siva ^ to 
Missi Klinger.’’ 

Fine business I ” O’Neil exclaimed. 

They’ll come back in the morning to find 
a new king at Kulinuu.” 

Kataafa go too,” the chief added. 

Phil could hardly suppress his joy. Things 
were certainly coming their way. 

As Phil ascended the ladder of the “ Sitka,” 
Commander Tazewell anxiously awaited him. 
But before the commander could ask a ques- 
tion, Phil hurriedly but guardedly outlined 
the news, and followed his captain into his 
cabin. 

Schultz has deserted us,” the captain told 
him. ‘‘ He got ashore during the night — 
probably let himself down over the side into 
a waiting canoe. So you can speak out.” 
Phil had been conversing in guarded tones. 

The entire situation from beginning to end 
was discussed, the executive officer and most 


336 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

of the important officers of the cruiser being 
present. 

The ‘ Sacramento ^ will be here at ten 
o^clock/' Commander Tazewell said after all 
points had been discussed. “ Captain Sturdy 
and his British sailors will hold all roads 
leading into Ukula west of the Mulivaii River 
while we garrison Matautu to that river. A 
squad will take care of the pilot station, and 
guards must be furnished all the consulates in 
Matautu.’^ 

All listened eagerly. The time all had 
looked forward to was fast approaching. 

Lieutenant Morrison will command our 
men,^^ the captain added, as he rose to his 
feet in sign of dismissal. We may of course 
have opposition, but we must guard against 
precipitating the fighting. Our duty is only 
to hold and not to advance. When the ad- 
miral arrives he will of course tell us what to 
do next. 

Tents, rations and supplies will be landed 
to-night after the sailors are ashore,” he added. 

Phil remained behind after the officers had 
filed out of the cabin, having been detained 
by a word from his captain. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


337 

I want you to take the news to Mr. Lee 
at once/' Commander Tazewell said to the 
lad, and show him the necessity for secrecy. 
No one must know until we are ashore." 

Phil made himself presentable, and then 
was conveyed to the shore by the captain’s 
boat, which on its return carried a letter from 
Commander Tazewell, addressed to Com- 
mander Sturdy of the British war-ship, ac- 
quainting him of the change in the situation 
and the plan for the night. 

Mr. Lee and Judge Lindsay were both 
jubilant over the turn of affairs, while Alice 
fairly danced with joy. Miss Lee, quiet and 
dignified, rather shrank from the thought of 
possible bloodshed. There was only one drop 
of bitterness in Alice’s joy. Phil insisted that 
Avao should not be told until after the Sacra- 
mento ’’ had entered the harbor, and landed 
her men. He feared the fatal custom of 
women’s gossip among the Kapuans. 

I sincerely hope this strong stand of our 
admiral will have the required effect, and that 
we shall have no further bloodshed,’’ Mr. Lee 
said solemnly. 

“ There can be no lasting peace in Kapua, 


338 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Lee,’^ the judge exclaimed earnestly, so long 
as the islands are administered by three ra- 
pacious beasts and animals of prey. A lion 
and two eagles can never act in harmony. 
It is best for the people that only one 
should govern. Herzovinia has the greatest 
interests on this island ; she should govern it. 
Our presence is but a stick in the molasses.^^ 

“ I agree with you in principle, judge, Mr. 
Lee replied, but even you are not willing 
to see one nation, in deliberate disregard of 
the treaty rights of others, seize what is not 
hers.’^ 

That, my dear sir, is not a matter of 
politics, but of morals, the judge answered. 

Let us decide the justice of the situation ; 
but after that is determined then I am anx- 
ious to see this triple government at an end.’^ 
When Phil left the consulate the two 
officials were yet deep in their discussion. 
As he hurried toward the landing he noted 
that the town was almost deserted of the usual 
crowd that gathered along the main thorough- 
fare at this time of the early evening. The 
“ Talola at Vaileli was going to be pop- 
ular. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


339 

As Phil’s boat rounded to alongside of the 
gangway, the '' Talofa ” had just anchored 
within a few cables’ length of the Sitka.” 

Preparations were being carried forward 
with great expedition on board both the 
American and British war-ships, but every- 
thing was being done so quietly that no sus- 
picion had so far been aroused on board the 
other cruiser anchored only a short distance 
away from each of the allies. 

As the ship’s bell sounded two strokes 
(nine o’clock) a long line of boats filled with 
armed sailors shoved off from the two ships 
and were towed by steam launches swiftly 
toward the shore. Phil and Sydney accom- 
panied Commander Tazewell in their towing 
steam launch. The Talofa ” had been 
turned over to a squad of sailormen under 
a petty officer, to prevent the native crew 
' from attempting to take her out of the harbor. 

Phil’s eyes were upon the dark outlines of 
the Herzovinian war-ship as they passed close 
alongside of her. There was a grim smile of 
, satisfaction in Commander Tazewell’s face as 
he heard loud voices raised in the guttural 
Herzovinian tongue, apparently the officer 


340 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

of the watch berating the men on lookout for 
their slackness. Then came a hurrying of 
footsteps upon the deck and finally a hail in 
broken English. 

“ Is there trouble on shore ? the voice 
called hesitatingly. 

Commander Tazewell waited several seconds 
before replying. 

Once more the voice was raised, this time 
more loudly. He had apparently just dis- 
covered a second line of boats on the other 
side of his ship, ladened deeply in the water 
with sailormen. 

Has there been a fight on shore ? Why 
are you landing your men ? ” 

‘‘Just a precautionary measure,^^ Com- 
mander TazewelFs clear-cut voice answered. 
“ Is your captain on board? 

“ No, sir,” came back the answer. “ He 
has gone to Vaileli.” 

“ It’s no matter,” Commander Tazewell 
replied. “ When he returns I will explain 
everything to him.” 

“ Thank you, sir,” said the voice, but it 
was plainly noted that the speaker was 
greatly perplexed. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 341 

** Only a young officer left on board/^ Com- 
mander Tazewell said quietly to the midship- 
men, and taken off his guard, he doesn’t 
know what to do.” 

“ What could he do ? ” Phil asked excitedly. 

Commander Tazewell shook his head 
doubtfully. “ He might land his men too, 
but that could not defeat our purpose. With 
the English and American sailors in military 
control of Ukula, it would take a stronger 
man than Count Rosen to annex the islands.” 

The boats glided alongside the wharf at the 
foot of the Siumu road and the sailors, their 
accouterments rattling musically, scrambled 
upon the dock and quickly formed their com- 
panies. But few commands were given. 
Each officer knew his station already. 

The English commander, fairly beaming 
with joy, joined Commander Tazewell on the 
dock. 

“ I say, that admiral of yours is a jolly 
good sport, and we’re behind him with every 
man and gun,” he exclaimed effusively, 
and we’re not much beforehand, either,” 
he added. The natives all say that the 
Vaileli ' Talola ’ was arranged by Count 


342 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Rosen in order to inform Kataafa and his 
warriors that the islands will be annexed as 
soon as their war-ship, hourly expected, ar- 
rives. IPs a sort of informal annexation, don’t 
you know. And they’ll come back and then, 
as you Americans say, they’ll ‘ wake up.’ ” 

Commander Tazewell joined in the laugh. 
The dock was clear. All the men landed 
had gone to their stations, and their boats 
had been towed back to their ships to be 
filled with tentage and provisions. 

‘‘ By now,” he said grimly, “ there probably 
are many eager messengers hurrying to ac- 
quaint those at Vaileli of what is happening 
on the beach of Ukula.” 

Phil was suddenly aware of Avao’s presence 
at his elbow. 

Kataafa’s men all take guns,” she whis- 
pered guardedly. Mary Hamilton, she go 
too to Vaileli. What are sailors going to do?” 
she asked excitedly. 

You’ll see to-morrow, Avao,” Phil replied 
evasively. 

“ Too few men,” Avao persisted anxiously. 

Kataafa many thousand.” 

‘‘What does she say?” Commander Taze- 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


343 

well asked, suddenly noting the eagerness in 
the girhs manner. 

Avao repeated what she had told Phil. 

“ We’ll have about three hundred more 
inside a half hour, Avao,” Commander Taze- 
well assured her. Don’t you think we can 
stand off an attack with those ? ” 

Fa’a moli-moli,” ^ she said humbly ; but, 
Alii, I know my people, and I afraid bad men 
may tell them fight. Suppose I go to the 
count and say do not permit armed natives to 
come to-night back to Ukula. If they come 
maybe have big fight.” 

There seems to be something in what the 
girl says, Tazewell,” Commander Sturdy ex- 
claimed. Of course our plan is to refuse 
them entrance, and open fire if they persist. 
Yet we’d like to prevent a fight if we can win 
without it.” 

Commander Tazewell remained silently 
thoughtful for several minutes. To him the 
plan savored too much of asking the count 
a favor. However, it was in the cause of 
humanity. If word was to be sent the girl 
could not take it alone. An officer from 

^ Fa'a moli-moli — Excuse me. 


344 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

his command must go. He turned his eyes 
toward the midshipmen, standing silently 
awaiting the decision. 

Perry, will you go to the count at Vaileli 
plantation ? '' he said quietly. Explain the 
situation and see if he will agree to prevent 
bloodshed. To-morrow we can treat with him. 
Monroe,’^ he added hurriedly, please take 
gig fh® executive officer of the 

‘ Sitka ^ about using the search-lights begin- 
ning at fifteen minutes of ten.^^ 

Sydney saluted, gulped down his disap- 
pointment and turned toward the waiting 
boat. He had been on the point of asking 
to go with Phil. 

** You and Avao can get mounts at the 
consulate, Commander Tazewell continued, 
turning to Phil, who stood like a sprinter 
ready to run or a hunting dog about to be 
unleashed. 


CHAPTER XX 


THE TABLES TURNED 

Alice helped Phil and Avao saddle two of 
her father^s ponies. 

Time was too precious for conversation, and 
Phil spoke only in monosyllables, much to 
Aliceas disgust. 

‘‘We are going to the plantation house at 
Vaileli,^’ he had told her, “ but just what we 
expect to accomplish I don^t exactly know.’^ 

As he gave a last tug at the girth bands of 
the two animals, and lifted Avao on to her 
side-saddle, he looked about for Alice, but she 
had disappeared into the darkness of the 
stable. 

“ Come on, Avao,^’ he exclaimed eagerly ; 
“ weVe got to do the entire distance on a run 
if our ponies can stand it.^' He shook loose 
his reins after leaping into the saddle and 
dug his heels into the pony^s flanks. The 
pony, believing it meant a race, sprang smartly 
forward with an eager whinny of delight, and 
345 


346 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

away he raced through the gate of the con- 
sulate. Avao followed only a few lengths 
behind. 

They had gone several miles at a rapid 
pace, when it became evident that a third 
horseman was following. 

Phil was greatly disturbed when Alice, 
mounted on her father’s Australian horse, 
a larger and much sturdier breed than the 
native pony, drew up beside them. 

I have learned enough not to ask per- 
mission when I want to go with you,” she 
exclaimed between breaths. Now, don’t be 
angry. I’m in no danger from the natives.” 

They found the road deserted. The villages 
through which they passed at breakneck speed 
were dark and empty. 

Look,” Avao exclaimed. Vaileli I ” 

A bright light, apparently caused by a huge 
fire, had sprung into view not far distant. As 
they raced forward they now passed on the 
road natives, singly and in twos and threes, 
hurrying toward the scene of festivity. 

At the massive stone gateway leading into 
the plantation, the three drew rein and al- 
lowed their gasping ponies to walk. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


347 

As they drew nearer they saw that many 
fires had been kindled. The great space in 
front of the plantation house was flooded with 
light, about which hundreds of men and 
women had gathered. All were in gala attire. 
Each of the warriors carried his precious gun, 
with his cartridge belt of webbed material 
worn jauntily over his naked shoulder. 

“Where shall I find the count? Phil 
asked. 

Avao fearlessly greeted the people, who 
gazed in amazement at the intruders. She 
called many by name and they, like children, 
soon forgetting their grievance, smiled back 
and bade her welcome. 

“ The count is at the house, they say,^^ the 
girl answered Phil’s question. 

“ You and Avao remain mounted,” Phil 
said, as they approached the low bungalow of 
the plantation, used as a residence for the 
manager and his white overseers. He noted 
that the wide porch was crowded with people 
dressed in white, and as he got closer he 
recognized the count’s strong figure with the 
high chief Kataafa standing beside him. 

The great delicacy of his mission suddenly 


348 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

flashed upon him. Here were gathered nearly 
flve thousand warriors, all armed with modern 
rifles. The power represented was in the 
hands of the two men before him. They 
could by one word hurl the entire assemblage 
upon the sailors now ashore in Ukula. Then 
another face appeared in the crowd, the sphynx- 
like countenance of “ Bully Scott, the man 
whose schooner Phil had taken. Did he 
know ! 

Throwing his horse^s reins to Avao, Phil 
slipped from his saddle and advanced up the 
steps of the porch. The count received him 
with but scant courtesy. No attempt was 
made to hide his displeasure. Phil knew that 
all eyes were upon him, and felt their hostile 
stare. It was a situation calculated to dis- 
concert the boldest. Phil steeled himself to 
hide his great nervousness. 

“ I come from my captain.’^ He heard his 
own voice as if from a long way off. There 
was an ominous silence all about him. My 
message is for your ear alone, Count Rosen,” 
he said. 

A deep frown of annoyance furrowed the 
count^s brow. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


349 

Isn't this time inopportune?" he ex- 
claimed angrily. 

Phil appreciated that every moment was 
valuable. The news of the landing of the 
sailors was on the way. The runners that 
they had passed on the road were probably 
bringing the unwelcome tidings. 

“ It is of the highest importance," the lad 
replied tensely. “ Otherwise you must know 
that my captain would not have sent me at 
this time." 

Phil noted a suspicion of alarm in the 
count's face. Suddenly a buzz of excitement 
disturbed the quiet, and Phil, glancing about 
quickly, following people's gaze, saw the 
flash of search-lights from the direction of 
Ukula. 

^‘That is what I have come to explain," 
Phil added, gaining confidence. The Sacra- 
mento " was entering the harbor. In a few 
minutes, the admiral had said, three hundred 
sailors would be on shore to reenforce Com- 
mander Tazewell's men. 

The count without other than a sign to fol- 
low him turned and entered the house. 

In a room giving off* from the hall, and 


350 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

lighted only by a single oil lamp, he stopped 
and motioned Phil to speak. 

“ An American admiral has arrived, and 
all the American and English sailors and 
marines are now holding Ukula. Com- 
mander Tazewell begs that you will use your 
good offices to prevent useless bloodshed. 
Your warriors must not attempt to return 
to-night. To-morrow the admiral will hold 
council, and invites you to come to arrange a 
peaceful settlement. That is all, sir,” Phil 
added finally. 

The count’s face was livid, while the hand 
that pulled his long moustache shook like an 
aspen. Words for once failed him. He knew 
that he had played and lost. 

Footsteps from the hall heralded the ap- 
proach of others. Phil’s heart sank. Had 
the news of the landing of the sailors already 
come? Klinger and Scott had entered the 
room. Phil gazed at them, but saw only dis- 
pleasure in their faces. The greeting he had 
been about to give was withheld. 

Finally the count spoke. His voice was 
husky. The blow had been severe. 

I’ll do what I can. Now go I ” He half 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


351 


shoved Phil out of the room. “ No earthly 
power can save you if you are not away before 
that savage horde out there has learned this 
insult to their king.’^ 

Phil half stumbled down the steps and 
flung himself into the saddle. 

Pide fast, Avao,’^ he ordered sharply, 

straight for the gate, and, Alice, you follow 
her. Go on, faster, faster.^^ He herded them 
before him. 

The natives in their path quickly got out 
of their way and called after them ‘‘ Faima- 
losi,” ^ thinking that they were only enjoying 
a pony race. 

Before they had reached the gate of the 
plantation the news of the landing of the 
sailors had arrived. 

They have heard from Ukula,^^ Alice 
called from over her shoulder, indicating a 
group of armed natives squatting by the side 
of the road feasting upon fruit stripped from 
trees in their near vicinity, and are wonder- 
ing what it means.’' Even as she spoke to 
Phil, one of the group called out questioningly 
to Avao. The native girl tossed back an an- 

* Faimalosi — Go it. 


352 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

swer, and her words apparently were satis- 
factory and caused a laugh. 

Phil heaved a sigh of relief as they swung 
through the gate. By mutual consent their 
horses were slowed to a trot, and the three 
drew close together to converse. 

“ What did the count say ? Alice ques- 
tioned eagerly. 

‘‘ He promised he^d do what he could, 
Phil replied, his voice unsteady from the re- 
cent excitement. “ I’m afraid the ‘ Franken- 
stein ’ he has created has grown beyond his 
control. We’re bound to have war.” 

When Phil and his companions arrived in 
Ukula the town resembled an armed camp. 
The roads leading to the village were all 
strongly held. Machine guns and field pieces 
had been mounted behind hastily constructed 
barricades. The main strength of the forces 
was encamped in the town proper between 
the two streams. The British sailors were in 
garrison at Kulinuu. The cruiser Sacra- 
mento ” had anchored in a commanding posi- 
tion with her heavy broadside bearing upon 
the town. 

Phil found Commander Tazewell and the 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


353 


admiral at the Tivoli Hotel, where the latter 
had taken up his headquarters, and gave 
them an account of his mission. 

We must not relax vigilance,^' Admiral 
Spotts said, while Phil saluted, ready to with- 
draw. ‘‘ I believe that no hostilities will be 
thought of until to-morrow. Then we shall 
see what can be done through diplomacy to 
avoid bloodshed.^^ 

Phil and Sydney occupied that night their 
old room in the consulate. 

When I got on board and gave the execu- 
tive officer the captain’s message about the 
search-lights,” Sydney said, after Phil had 
graphically told of the trip to Vaileli and of 
the great gathering of armed warriors, “ he 
looked queerly at me and exclaimed, ‘ Why, 
he told me that himself the last minute before 
leaving the ship.’ So, you see, the captain 
must have thought there was danger, and 
didn’t want to risk us both.” 

It would be a terrible loss,” Phil ex- 
claimed laughingly. 

The next morning Count Rosen and 
Klinger rode through town back to their 
homes in the Matafeli district. 


354 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

At ten o’clock the American admiral and 
his officers, in full dress uniform and accom- 
panied by the American and English consuls 
and Judge Lindsay, proceeded to Kulinuu. 
About a thousand loyal natives had collected ; 
all were unarmed. A large bright Kapuan 
flag had been brought ashore from the 
“Sitka” and O’Neil had bent it on to the 
halliards of the tall flagstaff. 

When all was ready, the band struck up a 
stirring march and the lawful king, Panu- 
Mafili, declared eligible by the chief justice, 
put in an appearance. He was strongly es- 
corted by sailors from both the English and 
American war-ships. 

To Phil the ceremony was very impressive. 
The day was beautiful and clear ; a gentle 
breeze ruffled the deep green waters of the 
bay, and stirred lazily the tall cocoanut palms 
overhead. The loyal natives, supporters of 
Panu, in all their gorgeous coloring, and led 
by Tuamana, rose to their feet and sang their 
savage song of welcome to their king Malea- 
Toa Panu-Mafili. 

The chief justice conducted the ceremony. 
He first read his decision. Then he gave the 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


355 

oath to Panu. As the judge finished he raised 
his hand and the song to their king floated 
out upon the balmy air : Panu o Tupu-e- 
Kapua.” O'Neil and Marley hauled away on 
the halliards, and as the great white, red and 
blue flag appeared above the tops of the cocoa- 
nut trees, the three war-ships boomed forth a 
national salute in its honor. The Herzovinian 
war-ship alone remained sullenly silent. 

Panu-Mafili was now the rightful king. 
Five miles away at Vaileli, Kataafa and his 
five thousand warriors were camped. Panu 
could muster barely a thousand men, and 
hardly a hundred guns. 

** We have him on the throne,'' Phil heard 
the admiral exclaim as each officer beginning 
with the American naval commander-in-chief 
pressed forward to congratulate the young 
king. “ But we've got to hold him on with 
our bayonets." 

At noon the British war-ship was under 
way, and standing out of the harbor. Com- 
mander Tazewell, the midshipmen and Alice 
watched her go from the consulate porch. 

Where's she going? " Alice asked in great 
surprise, for not an hour ago the war-ship’s 


356 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

captain, Commander Sturdy, had been present 
at the coronation of the new king. 

She^s going to the island of Kulila,” Com- 
mander Tazewell told his hearers guardedly, 
for there were many natives on the lawn in 
front of the house and within ear-shot. The 
island, you know, is about sixty miles to wind- 
ward ^ and the inhabitants are almost entirely 
loyal to the Malea-Toa family, of which Panu 
is the acknowledged head. Commander 
Sturdy has agreed to bring a ship-load of 
natives and arm them from his own stock of 
guns. That will give us at least five hundred 
reenforcements.’^ 

The allies at once began to prepare their 
forces for serious work. Companies of the 
loyal natives were being mustered in with 
English and American sailormen to lead 
them, while white officers were designated to 
command the combinations made by joining 
several companies. In all, a force of eight 
native companies of a hundred men each, 
armed with American and English rifles, 

^ The prevailing wind in the islands of the South Seas is south- 
east — so “ windward ’’ or “leeward ” means easterly or westerly 
in direction. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


357 


was encamped in the Malae under the com- 
mand of Lieutenant Tupper of the British 
cruiser ; while encamped along the main 
street of Ukula five hundred English and 
American sailors were ready in addition to 
aid in repelling an attack by the old fox 
Kataafa, who had been himself now declared 
a rebel by Admiral Spotts. 

The count and Klinger did not long remain 
in Ukula. That afternoon they departed 
quietly to Vaileli plantation. 

During the afternoon Phil and Sydney rode 
with Commander Tazewell along the Siumu 
road. All three were armed with revolvers, 
but no sailors or natives were taken along. 

Kataafa has written the admiral the most 
remarkable letter,'^ the captain said after they 
had left behind the last vestige of civilization. 

He says that he does not question the right 
of Panu-Mafili to be king, but that by the 
Kapuan custom he also is king, and that ac- 
cording to their traditional custom, as old as 
their race, he will fight Panu for the office. 
He says that he has no war with the white 
men, and that no harm will come to them if 
they do not attack him.'' 


358 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

What answer did the admiral send back ? ” 
Phil and Sydney asked in a breath. 

'' That Panu>Mafili was now under the 
protection of the two allied powers, and that 
if Kataafa attacked him the admiral would 
consider it an attack upon his own men, and 
that by so doing Kataafa would have brought 
on a war with the white men.^^ 

Hello,^^ Sydney exclaimed suddenly rein- 
ing in his horse. A party of natives, their 
faces blackened, had silently come from the 
bush and barred their way. A chief stepped 
forward and courteously told Commander 
Tazewell that no one should pass. 

While they consulted with the native, 
many warriors appeared from each side of 
the road and gazed in friendly curiosity at 
their visitors. 

“ He says,'^ Commander Tazewell told the 
midshipmen, that Kataafa’s troops have 
surrounded the village of Ukula, and will 
starve out the inhabitants instead of attack- 
ing. That Kataafa has given orders that 
white men shall not be molested, but must 
remain within the besieging lines.’' 

Starve them out I ” Phil exclaimed. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


359 

'‘Why, that's impossible. They can catch 
fish and eat fruit." The Americans had 
withdrawn some yards from the natives, but 
remained to observe further. 

" How long do you suppose the supply of 
fruit would last ? " Commander Tazewell asked. 
" Besides, many of the fruit trees in Ukula 
have been destroyed, and it will take a year 
for them to again bear fruit. And as for fish, 
the reefs off Ukula are not good fishing ground, 
and would not feed one-tenth of the population 
now gathered in the vicinity of the town." 

" Then what are we going to do ? " Phil 
asked earnestly. 

" The war-ships will have to give the na- 
tives food from their own supplies," the com- 
mander replied. " Kataafa is a wily old fox, 
or else that Herzovinian count is ably advising 
him. But come," he added, swinging his pony 
about ; " we have received interesting news, 
and if we are to succeed in this affair, we’ve 
got to take the offensive. The food supplies 
on our ships would be devoured by the horde 
of natives in the town inside of a week. We 
shall have to attack Kataafa in order to feed 
our native allies." 


360 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Sydney had been examining the locality 
where the greater number of natives had 
shown themselves in their curiosity to see the 
white men. A gleam of white caught his eye, 
and before the warriors that had barred the 
passage of the horsemen could interfere, he had 
urged his horse ahead a few score of yards. 
An agile native grasped firmly the horse's 
bridle and turned Sydney back toward his 
companions, but not until he had solved the 
mystery of that gleam of white. 

“ Captain ‘ Bully ' Scott was with that out- 
fit," Sydney exclaimed as they trotted swiftly 
toward home. I distinctly saw him, hidden 
behind a barricade of earth and banana trees ; 
he was in white clothes, and I saw him dis- 
tinctly, gray whiskers and all." 

“ It isn’t likely he will remain idle," Com- 
mander Tazewell replied, not at all surprised 
at Sydney’s news. He cannot have any great 
friendship for us after we have confiscated his 
schooner, and he knows if he is caught by 
either an American or an English war-ship 
he will have to serve a term in jail for his 
many crimes." 

‘‘ It’s a pity he wasn’t on board the ^ Talofa ’ 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 361 

when we captured her,” Phil said. Now if 
his character is as black as Stump paints it, he 
will give us lots of trouble.” 

Commander Tazewell nodded his head 
gravely. 

If the count, Klinger and Scott could be 
disposed of we would find these fine fellows 
of Kapuans only too willing to bury the 
hatchet,” he exclaimed, but those three men 
are like vinegar in the molasses barrel. If 
blood is shed it will be upon their heads.” 


CHAPTER XXI 


A RECONNAISSANCE 

A Herzovinian war-ship had come to join 
the four other men-of-war, all anchored inside 
the narrow harbor of Ukula. 

The Herzovinian consul at once went on 
board the newcomer, and afterward he and her 
captain passed through the allied lines on their 
way to Vaileli. 

That evening many were the rumors in 
Ukula. Alice and Avao collected the stories 
from the women. 

Herzovinia has accepted Kataafa’s al- 
legiance, and will aid him to conquer and then 
annex the islands,^^ Alice told the midshipmen 
that evening, and also,^’ she exclaimed, “ the 
women say that Kataafa has been persuaded 
to make a big attack on the town.^’ 

I can hardly believe it,’^ Phil declared, 
but apparently the admiral is not willing for 
us to remain passive in our defense. Have 
362 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 363 

you heard/' he asked, “ about the expedition 
to-morrow ? " 

Alice shook her head, her eyes big with 
excitement. “ Where? " she asked. 

“ No one knows," Phil answered. “ We 
start at daylight." 

The next morning before dawn a force of 
one hundred sailors, consisting of both English 
and Americans, had been formed in column 
of march on the Ukula road. A machine gun, 
mounted on a light carriage and hauled by 
hand, formed a part of the expedition. The 
midshipmen were detailed to go along as aides 
to the commanding officer, Lieutenant Tupper. 

We're going to reconnoiter Vaileli planta- 
tion, I hear," Sydney said as he and Phil 
drank their coffee preparatory to joining the 
expedition, “ and gather food for the natives 
in the town." 

Mind, sir, it's a ticklish business we're 
starting out on," O'Neil said confidentially to 
the lads as they joined him. The boatswain’s 
mate commanded one of the new companies 
of native troops, but had volunteered to go 
along, after learning that no native troops were 
to take part in the expedition. If we do this 


364 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

at all we should take all the force we've got 
and fall upon them good and hard. Half 
measures, sir, are dangerous." 

The column started just as the first streaks 
of dawn appeared in the eastern sky. They 
traveled by the road which followed close to 
the beach. On one side was the sea and the 
other the impenetrable bush. Out beyond the 
reef the Sitka " steamed slowly along to 
guard them in case of an attack by a force be- 
yond their strength to oppose. 

The expedition reached the Vaileli plan- 
tation by eight o'clock and halted on the same 
ground where only a few nights before the 
Kataafa warriors had held their celebrations. 
No warriors so far had been encountered. The 
only outward evidence of hostilities were the 
empty villages passed en route. 

A number of cleverly built forts and bar- 
ricades along the road had been encountered 
and destroyed by the sailors en route. 

They've all been occupied recently," Lieu- 
tenant Tupper declared, and they are not of 
native design. Some white man's hand has 
guided them in their construction, that is 
evident." 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


365 

The “ Sitka” had entered between the reefs 
and dropped anchor in deep water within a 
half mile of the shore. 

Lieutenant Tapper with several officers, and 
among them the midshipmen, approached the 
plantation house. They saw many black 
boys, Solomon Islanders, working about the 
place, but not a white man or a Kapuan was 
visible. 

Klinger finally appeared. Phil saw that he 
was pale and looked worried. 

“ Where are the Kataafa men ? the lieu- 
tenant asked brusquely. I see youVe been 
feeding and sheltering them,’^ he added in- 
sinuatingly, and doubtless are now conceal- 
ing their whereabouts.^^ 

I do not know,” Klinger replied stub- 
bornly. I cannot help it if they take my 
fruit. I have no sailors to protect my 
property.” 

‘MVe a good mind to take you back with 
us,” the lieutenant said angrily. You and 
that count are advising these natives to fight 
us. Who else is in the house ? ” Tupper asked, 
advancing upon the porch. 

Klinger held his ground. 


366 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

There are no others here/' he replied. 

You are welcome to search the house if you 
desire, but I warn you this is Herzovinian 
property, and you must answer for all insults." 

I'd like to see you strung to a yard-arm," 
Lieutenant Tupper exclaimed, angrier than 
ever at the man's cool effrontery. 

Phil surprised a sinister gleam in Klinger's 
eyes that gave him a sudden pang of uneasi- 
ness. Did Klinger know where Kataafa and 
his warriors were hiding ? 

We are going to requisition your fruit," 
the lieutenant said authoritatively. You can 
put in your claim for damages, and if I have 
anything to say in the matter you wouldn't 
get a shilling." 

The sailors had spread out through the 
beautiful groves of banana and breadfruit 
trees and were quickly stripping the trees of 
their fruit and carrying the great bunches 
down to the beach, where they were being 
loaded into the cutters of the war-ship. 

** There won't be enough to feed a locust on 
when they get through," O’Neil chuckled. 
'' I'd like to get a hold on that fellow Klinger 
alone for about ten minutes. I have an idea 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 367 

he knows where Kataafa and his men are this 
very minute.’^ 

We’re not looking for a fight,” Sydney 
said, shaking his head emphatically. “We’re 
only making a reconnaissance and bringing 
back food for the town. That’s why no na- 
tives were brought along.” 

“ I don’t like the looks of it,” O’Neil de- 
clared. “ We sent word to Kataafa that unless 
he attacked we would not disturb him for the 
present, and he is said to have said the same 
thing to us. In that case what is he hiding 
for?” 

“ Maybe he fears either we or he cannot 
keep their word,” Phil suggested. 

O’Neil shook his head. 

“ Look out for a trick,” the sailor insisted, 
“ and besides, I hear Chief Tuatele commands 
the natives in the Vaileli district, and he is 
the meanest Kapuan ever born. In fact, they 
say he has a mixture of Solomon Islander in 
him.” 

Lieutenant Morrison and Ensign Patterson 
from the “ Sitka ” had listened to the sailor’s 
remarks, and nodded their heads in agreement 
with his views. 


368 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

‘‘ It’s queer we have met no women/’ Lieu- 
tenant Morrison said in his quiet, thoughtful 
voice, but of course we go back by the beach 
road the way we came, and with the guns of 
the ‘Sitka’ to back us, I can’t believe that 
even Chief Tuatele would dare attack.” 

“ Let him attack,” Patterson exclaimed. 
“We’ve got a hundred rifles and a machine 
gun. I guess he won’t find us such an awfully 
easy mark.” 

The last boat load of fruit had been sent off 
to the “ Sitka ” when the English lieutenant 
in command of the expedition formed his 
column for the return march. 

“ The king of France marched up the hill 
and then marched down again,” he laughed 
as he gave the command to set the column in 
motion. 

Lieutenant Tupper was in the lead. The 
road stretched along the seashore, winding 
in and out in conforming to the irregularities 
of the beach. 

“I say,” Lieutenant Tupper suddenly ex- 
claimed, “isn’t that road to the left a short 
cut ? ” He took out a small pocket chart and 
consulted it. Then he glanced out to the 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 369 

‘‘ Sitka/^ which had gotten under way and 
was following, as before, just beyond the surf 
on the outer reef. It will save us nearly a 
mile, and is shady, all the way, through cocoa- 
nut groves.’^ 

His mind was made up without more ado, 
and the head of the column wheeled to the 
left away from the sea and their supporting 
war-ship and took the trail leading through 
the woods. 

“ Anybody got any wire cutters ? O’Neil 
asked Phil, who was walking at his side. 

Look, sir, both sides barbed wire. Nasty 
thing to get through in a hurry.” 

Phil saw that on each side of the road ran 
a substantially built fence of barbed wire as 
high as a man’s head. The woods here were 
not very thick. Cocoanut and other trees 
were plentifully mixed. 

They had now reached the top of a rise. 
The road from there led down and at the 
bottom a small, swift stream would have to 
be forded. 

The machine gun was being dragged by its 
crew between the two companies of sailors. 
As the head of the column entered the stream 


370 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

it was found that the water was deeper than 
where it had been crossed nearer its mouth. 
Phil and Sydney were told to warn the ma- 
chine gun's crew, and have the rear company 
give aid if they needed it to get the gun 
across safely. 

The midshipmen left the head of the column 
just as it was on the point of entering the 
mountain stream. Phil looked behind as they 
ran rapidly back toward the machine gun. 

“ The water’s above the men’s waists,” he 
exclaimed. 

Lieutenant Morrison was waiting at the 
machine gun when Phil arrived to tell him 
of the depth of the stream which they were 
about to cross. 

Childers,” the lieutenant said quietly to 
the gunner’s mate in charge of the delicate 
weapon, '' better dismount the gun and have 
it carried across by hand. We cannot afford 
to run the risk of getting the mechanism wet.” 
He looked about him and Phil read appre- 
hension in his eyes. I think it would have 
been wiser to have returned by the beach 
road,” he added uncomplainingly, but Phil 
thought only too truly. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


371 

‘‘Aye, aye, sir,'' Childers replied, and as 
the gun carriage was brought to a stop four 
men picked up the gun, raising it upon 
their shoulders. Childers removed the breech 
mechanism for fear it would fall out. The 
men with the gun on their shoulders waded 
into the icy cold water. 

The advance company had gone on barely 
a hundred yards beyond the river, and there 
had halted to permit the rear company and 
the machine gun to catch up. 

The men on the drag ropes of the gun 
mount were on dry land when the midship- 
men left Lieutenant Morrison, with whom 
they had been walking, and started ahead to 
rejoin the leader. 

A savage cry from out the jungle on the 
left brought the entire command to imme- 
diate attention. The cry was taken up and 
increased in volume until the woods rang, and 
then suddenly came a scattering volley of 
musketry fire. 

Phil and Sydney drew their revolvers. 
They had halted, gazing in bewilderment 
into the dense bush, from which there con- 
tinued to come a multitude of savage shouts 


372 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

with a scorching rifle fire. The sailors ahead 
had deployed along the road and were excit- 
edly but blindly firing. 

Phil gazed behind him and saw the ma- 
chine gun had been hurriedly replaced upon 
its mount, yet the gunner’s mate, Childers, 
was storming furiously at the men about him. 
They had dipped the breech of the gun into 
the water in their sudden shock and surprise 
at the weirdness of the attack. 

Phil hastened back in hopes of being able 
to lend a hand : his familiarity with the gun 
qualified him for the task, but Childers had 
already deftly put back the mechanism and 
was about to feed in the cartridge tape carry- 
ing the ammunition. 

Got any oil ? ” Phil asked excitedly. 

Childers pointed to a can in the accessory 
box whose top was open. Phil unscrewed the 
top of the oil can and poured its contents over 
the wetted breech and into the mechanism. 

“ Bring up the gun,” was the cry from the 
advance company. 

With a rush the sailors carried the gun and 
carriage up the road and swung its muzzle 
toward the concealed foes. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


373 

Childers snapped a cartridge in place while 
Lieutenant Morrison, seating himself upon the 
trail of the mount, pointed and pulled the 
trigger. One shot was heard and then the 
mechanism jammed. 

Again Childers drew back the gas lever, but 
only one shot could be fired. 

“ It’s put together wrong,” the gunner’s 
mate cried out aghast as he slipped out the 
bolt and examined it. 

“ The Colt gun won’t work ! ” was the dis- 
heartening news that spread up and down the 
line. The unseen enemy had now become 
bolder. Many of them disregarding the 
danger, in their exultation, revealed their 
half-naked bodies from behind trees, while 
the sailors made good their expended ammu- 
nition in dropping these in their tracks. The 
white men were being attacked from all sides 
save one and the volume of fire told only too 
plainly that nearly a thousand rifies were 
against them. 

We’ve got to get off this road and take 
cover,” Phil cried in exasperation as he saw 
men drop sorely hit near him. Lieutenant 
Morrison’s face was pale and as he rose from 


374 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

his seat on the gun carriage, he steadied him- 
self upon Patterson’s shoulder. His right leg 
hung useless ; a bullet had shattered the bone 
below the knee. 

The two midshipmen seized bayonets from 
the guns of those fallen and began to hack 
away at the barbed wire fence in their rear. 
Others now joined them, while the most part of 
the sailors threw themselves upon the ground 
and continued their fire at the flitting figures, 
only seldom and then dimly visible within the 
impenetrable bush, on their front and flank. 

Lieutenant Tupper was already severely 
wounded, but he saw that to save his men 
a retreat was urgently necessary. To remain 
there in the open was useless and would prove 
costly if not destructive. 

The sailors retreated slowly through the 
places in the fence, cut laboriously with the 
bayonets. 

The gun must be abandoned, Childers,” 
Lieutenant Morrison exclaimed in despair, 
after they had dragged it through the torn 
fence and Childers had made a last heroic 
effort to disassemble the breech mechanism in 
order to locate and repair the defect. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


375 

The rebel natives perceiving the retreat 
threw caution to the winds and now showed 
themselves in a savage swarm. The sailors 
made a desperate stand, and at such close range 
the execution among their delirious enemies was 
great ; but nothing could stop their mad rush. 

Phil clung to his wounded lieutenant on 
one side, while Patterson supported him on 
the other. 

Cries for mercy could be heard behind 
them, where a wounded sailor was discovered 
by the eager savages. Then triumphant yells 
and a scream of terror told the horrible story 
of the poor fellow’s end. 

Leave me,” Lieutenant Morrison begged 
them. Save yourselves.” 

The natives were almost within reach when 
Lieutenant Morrison’s body suddenly sank to 
the ground. A second bullet had reached a 
vital spot. Phil stopped. Patterson was be- 
hind him. He had emptied his revolver with 
telling effect in holding the enemy at bay in 
an endeavor to cover the retreat of his stricken 
friend. Phil now sprang to the ensign’s aid 
and as he did so he could have cried out for 
joy, for there was O’Neil at his side, cool and 


376 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

collected, among the terrible dangers, firing 
his rifle from its magazine. Each shot carried 
a message of death. 

'' Ran, both of you,’^ the sailor cried out to 
them. Phil saw Patterson reel, and caught 
him in his arms. The lad turned the ensign 
toward him and a great sob of anguish es- 
caped his lips as he saw the death pallor 
already on the stricken officer's face. The 
next moment the lifeless body fell at his feet, 
and almost touching the lifeless body of the 
friend for whom he had heroically but fruit- 
lessly given his young life. 

Turning upon the enemy, who had now 
hesitated in their advance in face of such un- 
expected resistance, Phil fired his revolver 
until empty. Then a crash and a mighty 
explosion almost threw him to the ground. 

‘‘ Quick, sir, run ; those are our shells,’' 
O’Neil exclaimed, and together the two raced 
for the beach, guided in their flight by the 
discharges from the guns of the Sitka,” 
while behind them the rebel natives were left 
to exult over their victory. Again the invin- 
cible white man — papalangi — had been found 
to be only mortal. 


CHAPTER XXII 


WAR IN EARNEST 

When Phil and O’Neil reached the beach, 
the Sitka’s ” shells were screeching angrily 
over their heads and exploding in the bush 
behind them. The sailors had been collected 
and formed on the beach road to repel an 
attack. Three officers and eight sailors were 
missing and a score had received wounds. 
The command of the force fell to a sub-lieu- 
tenant from the English cruiser. Tupper, 
Morrison and Patterson had been killed and 
left upon the field. 

There were at least a thousand of them,” 
Sydney exclaimed as he met Phil and grasped 
his hand silently, thankful for his escape, 
and Scott or some white man was with 
them. Many of the men say they distinctly 
heard a white man’s voice encouraging the 
natives to charge us.” 

The sailors were apathetic, stunned. The 
377 


378 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

suddenness of the attack and their defeat had 
unnerved every man of them. 

If we could only have used the machine 
gun/^ Childers moaned plaintively, we’d 
have had a different story to tell.’^ 

Little by little the men’s shattered nerves 
were mended. The Sitka’s ” shells yet 
screeched overhead, but the rebel natives had 
retired. 

The commanding officer gave the order and 
put the force in motion. It was a sadly dis- 
heartened band that entered the town of 
Ukula an hour later. 

When the doleful news reached the Ameri- 
can admiral, he was beside himself with anger 
at the white men whom he firmly believed 
had instigated and made possible the ambush. 
Far from yielding, all efibrt was now ordered 
to be concentrated upon swift punishment to 
the rebels. 

Lieutenant Gant came ashore from the 
British ship to command all the loyal native 
troops. Several hundred loyal warriors were 
now added, having been brought from Kulila. 
One thousand strong they were mustered, and 
all were armed with the latest patterns of the 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


379 

Lee Metford rifle from the British and American 
war-ships. The white troops, unused to bush 
fighting, by the admiral’s order were here- 
after only to garrison the town, while offen- 
sive work was to be done exclusively by the 
loyal native troops. A plentiful supply of 
white sailors was sprinkled among the native 
companies, to teach them how to use their 
weapons and how to take cover. 

Through the women the fate of the fallen 
officers and sailors was learned. All had been 
beheaded ; but Kataafa when he learned of 
this savage act had ordered the bodies and 
heads to be buried and their graves marked. 

Phil and Sydney were given commandsin the 
native regiment, and O’Neil went with them. 

All day and every day they drilled their 
men. Meanwhile the rebels were drawing 
their lines closer about Ukula. 

The Herzovinian consul had, immediately 
after the unfortunate fight with the rebels, 
gone in person to offer his sympathy to the 
admiral for the sad loss of life. Admiral 
Spotts received him in stony silence. He 
listened to his words but vouchsafed no an- 
swer, nor even thanked him for his sympathy. 


380 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Against his countrymen, whom he should 
control,’’ the admiral exclaimed to Com- 
manders Tazewell and Sturdy, after the dis- 
confited consul had departed, “ the blood of 
every man killed in these islands should 
righteously cry out vengeance.” 

Phil, who had been present, repeated the 
admiral’s words to O’Neil. The sailorman 
nodded his head in silence for several 
minutes. 

What were you going to say?” Phil asked 
quickly. He had seen a look in O’Neil’s 
eyes, and knew that the sailor was looking 
at the sad episode from a different stand- 
point. 

** Well, sir,” O’Neil replied apologetically, 

I am not saying the admiral isn’t dead right. 
That count and Klinger have sure brought 
on this war and are responsible for the men 
killed. But, sir,” he added, I was here 
when twenty Herzovinian sailors were killed 
and their heads taken by this same Kataafa. 
They were killed by bullets furnished by 
Americans and Englishmen. They blamed 
us then — we blame them now. 

“ Don’t you see, sir,” he added earnestly. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 381 

“the Herzovinians think we are now ^ quits/ 
They lost twenty sailors ; we have lost eleven, 
including three officers/’ 

“ Now,” Sydney said thoughtfully, “ is the 
time for the white men to get together and 
stop this useless war.” 

Phil and O’Neil gazed at him in surprise. 

“ When we have lost our first battle,” Phil 
exclaimed scornfully. “ Why, Syd, that is 
contrary to human nature. The Herzovinians 
might be willing to compromise, but we can- 
not accept a truce until we have proved that 
our courage has not been affected. When we 
have driven Kataafa away from Ukula, then 
we might be willing to treat for an armistice, 
but never before.” 

“ I agree with the humanitarian view of 
Mr. Monroe,” a voice from behind them said 
solemnly. The lads turned to find Judge 
Lindsay beside them, smiling in fatherly 
fashion upon them. “Now is the moment 
of moments to bring together the warring 
factions. To do so,” he added, “we must 
sacrifice some of our selfish pride. But we 
would thus spare innocent human lives. 

“ Have you heard that Klinger has been 


382 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

arrested, and is now held in jail by our naval 
forces for the crime of instigating the rebels 
to attack our sailors?'^ he asked. The judge 
spoke without sign of feeling. 

I cannot see,’^ he said after a pause, what 
evidence they have against him. He supplied 
guns to natives to fight natives. That they 
used their weapons against the white men I 
am sure was not his wish.^^ 

‘‘ Begging your worship’s pardon,” O’Neil 
said respectfully, Klinger was here ten 
years ago, and saw twenty of his country- 
men killed through the work of white men 
of our race. Do you believe, sir, he has for- 
gotten that ? Klinger has no fear. When we 
stood and talked with him at Vaileli before 
the fight, I thought I saw a look in his face, 
like one who believes something for which he 
has long wished was about to happen. He 
didn’t owe us anything, and the line of talk 
we gave him didn’t make him feel any the 
more kindly toward us. I am dead sure 
now that he knew that Kataafa’s warriors 
were between us and Ukula, waiting to attack 
us, but the memory of the monument in 
Kulinuu for the martyred Herzovinian sailors 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 383 

kept his mouth shut tight. No, sir, he let us 
go to our defeat almost with joy in his heart, 
and somehow,^^ O’Neil added solemnly, almost 
reverentially, when I remember that ter- 
rible day, just before the hurricane that 
wrecked us all, I haven’t it in my heart to 
blame him.” 

^'So you were here then,” the judge ex- 
claimed in surprise and interest. “ Well, I 
wish I could be the instrument to bring to- 
gether the two sides, and bring peace to these 
beautiful islands ; but I suppose the blood of 
our poor fellows cries out for atonement, and 
we must fight on.” 

Lieutenant Gant with his native regiment 
was almost ready to take the offensive. 

“ We’ve got to be mighty keen about it,” 
he exclaimed to some of his officers. ‘‘ A 
cable is on the way to New Zealand by the 
mail ship that left to-day. The Powers will 
soon put a stop to this show when they learn 
the results of our first battle.” 

But before Gant could take the field to 
retrieve the defeat, Kataafa became suddenly 
bold and advanced his lines within a couple 
of hundred yards of the allies. They moved 


384 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

during the night, and strange as it may seem 
women did not bring the news beforehand. 

Matautu was the point of attack, and the 
foreign resident section was swept by bullets. 

The natives taunted each other from their 
earth intrenchments, firing wildly, but neither 
side made an attempt to leave the protection 
of their forts and attack. 

Across the Fuisa Kiver on the east of 
Matautu the Kataafa and Panu warriors 
faced each other, and here Lieutenant Gant 
had despatched several native companies of 
reenforcements to hold the road leading into 
Ukula. 

The sailors, by order of the admiral, had 
been held in reserve. They were only to be 
used in case Kataafa undertook to rush the 
earthwork defenses. They held the second 
line of defense. 

“ IPs a perfect shame, O’Neil exclaimed 
disgustedly, “ to see these fellows throw away 
their ammunition. Why, a squad of sailors 
could have picked off twenty of those black- 
ened faced natives across there in the last ten 
minutes.” He picked up the rifle that had 
been idly lying beside him in the trench and 













- . 




HE DID NOT FIRE 



IN THE SOUTH SEAS 385 

adjusted the sight to two hundred yards. 
“ Watch me lay out the next fellow who gets 
funny and jumps on top of his fort and shakes 
his fist at us.’^ 

The midshipmen watched him interestedly, 
for O’Neil was a dead shot. 

Suddenly a fine looking warrior leaped 
upon the trench, brandishing his gun and 
head knife, using the forceful but picturesque 
Kapuan tongue in boasts and taunts, hurling 
them upon all those of his enemies across the 
river. 

O’Neil calmly raised his gun, but he did 
not fire. He dropped it into the hollow of 
his arm. 

“ It’s too much like murder,” he said, and 
both midshipmen breathed a sigh of relief. 

“ This isn’t war,” Phil complained bitterly. 
** We are fighting children. I’d as soon shoot 
a schoolboy showing himself in bravado from 
the top of his snow fort as to shoot at those 
joyful warriors. To them fighting is fun. 
They do not realize that they are uselessly 
destroying human life.” 

Look ! ” Sydney exclaimed in admiration, 
as a Kataafa warrior was seen to rush into the 


386 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

river a few hundred yards above them and en- 
deavor to reach the body of a native whom he 
had slain. A rain of bullets fell all around 
him, and as he reached the side of his victim, 
his head axe raised, he fell dead. So excited 
had both sides become that no thought of per- 
sonal safety was given. Both sides stood upon 
the top of their trenches and uttered their sav- 
age cries of defiance. The Kataafa men who 
had cheered on their hero, exulting in the pros- 
pect of a trophy, saw themselves suddenly ex- 
posed to a disgrace. 

“ We ought to stop it,^^ Sydney exclaimed. 

Look at our men exposing themselves need- 
lessly.^’ 

You might as well try damming Niagara 
first,” Phil returned. It would be an easier 
job.” 

“There’s the real thing for you,” O’Neil 
cried, bringing his rifle up to his shoulder as 
a lithe Kataafa native darted across the inter- 
vening water scarcely half waist deep, swung 
the dead body of his friend upon his back and 
returned to his trenches unscathed. 

“ If they don’t stop this foolishness,” the 
sailor said, “ I’m going to teach ’em a lesson.” 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 387 

He lowered his rifle from his shoulder. I 
could have dropped him a half a dozen times/' 
he complained, “ and yet these wild savages 
have wasted a barrel of lead shooting at him, 
and not a single hit." 

The excitement along the Fuisa River began 
to die down after this last piece of bravado. 
O'Neil and the midshipmen had sent word 
to the chiefs in their vicinity to save their am- 
munition. 

About three o'clock those at the Fuisa River 
were much concerned over heavy musketry 
fire behind them and on the right flank of the 
allied position. A woman came along the 
road from Ukula, carrying fruit for her 
relatives in the trenches. 

O’Neil spoke to her, inquiring the cause 
of the firing. She answered quite calmly and 
passed on down the trench. 

She says she heard Kataafa would attack 
along the Siumu road, and supposed that was 
the cause of the firing," O'Neil explained. 
“ There goes the artillery," he exclaimed, as 
all distinctly heard the crash from the village 
in their rear where some English howitzers 
were mounted. “ They must have driven 


388 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

the natives back. Look out ! he cried sud- 
denly. 

There was no need for further warning. The 
midshipmen, glancing up over the top of the 
trench, saw the Kataafa warriors were beyond 
their trench and advancing toward the river, 
firing, gesticulating, taunting, dancing and sing- 
ing. A hail of bullets met them from the Panu 
side ; but nothing seemed able to stop the 
movement. 

The contending factions were about equal 
in numbers. The Kataafa men having will- 
ingly abandoned their trench to fight in the 
open, their enemy, not to be outdone in chiv- 
alry, bravely mounted on top of their own 
earthworks and awaited the attack. Mean- 
while both sides fired blindly. Neither side 
took time to aim. Even with such poor fire 
direction, however, many men on both sides 
were being hit. 

O’Neil and the two midshipmen had gotten 
suddenly over their hesitancy in shooting down 
a native enemy, and their example was being 
followed by about fifty white men, after en- 
deavoring in vain to keep their natives under 
cover. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 389 

Pick out the leaders/’ O’Neil exclaimed. 
“ I got that fellow. I am sorry ! he was such 
a fine looker.” Again he fired, and each time 
his exclamations told the result of his shot. 

Phil and Sydney realized that it was not a 
matter of choice. That rush had to be stopped, 
even if the entire force against them was wiped 
out, and they loaded and fired eagerly, but 
carefully, every shot bringing down an 
enemy. 

“ They’ve had enough 1 ” Sydney cried joy- 
ously. Those near had turned and were fiee- 
ing back across the stream. Once the panic 
had seized them, the entire Kataafa force was 
fleeing for cover. 

“ Now after them,” O’Neil suggested to the 
midshipmen, and this same thought had ap- 
parently come to every white sailor along the 
loyal line. An English sub-lieutenant some 
hundred yards above had begun the sortie, 
and presently the whole line was in the river 
advancing rapidly after their fleeing foe. 

Breathless, Phil found himself in the ene- 
my’s trenches. The natives had dashed on 
into the bush to pursue their broken foe. 

The trench made by Kataafa was quickly 


390 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

razed and again the loyal warriors were 
quietly, yet joyously, back in their own forts. 

It was not until this lull in the fighting 
that the midshipmen realized the extent of the 
attack upon the center of the allies^ position 
along the Siumu road. The firing seemed 
closer and in greater volume. The howitzers 
had been reenforced by Gatlings and pom- 
poms, or one-pounder automatic cannon, from 
the English ship. 

“ I say, that looks as if the big attack were 
down there, the sub-lieutenant exclaimed 
anxiously. He had come down to talk with 
the midshipmen. Suppose you take your 
company and see if they need help. After 
that rush I think we have more than plenty 
to keep them off here.” 

Phil, Sydney and O’Neil led forth about 
one hundred excited natives on a run through 
Matautu. In front of the legations two com- 
panies of American sailors, forming the reserve 
for the flank which the midshipmen had just 
left, hurriedly joined on behind. 

Ahead, in front of the Tivoli Hotel, the 
artillery could be seen firing down the Siumu 
road. The air was full of flying bullets, ap- 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


391 

parently coming from all directions. The 
entire stretch of road from the American con- 
sulate was bullet swept. Phil saw that it was 
deserted, but he could not stop to take cover. 
It was evident that on the Siumu road the 
biggest attack was being made. As the natives 
and sailors approached Phil saw several com- 
panies of white men advancing from the other 
direction. He soon recognized the English 
from Kulinuu, coming to reenforce the center. 

Lieutenant Gant, mounted upon a pony, 
in all that hail of bullets came galloping 
toward the midshipmen. 

Go straight down the road,^^ he ordered. 
Phil marveled at his calmness. “ They’ve 
driven our natives back almost into the town. 
The guns are shelling behind them. It’s only 
making noise. We can’t shoot into them for 
fear of hitting our own.” 

The extra three hundred arriving turned 
the tide of battle. The Panu natives, encour- 
aged by their white officers and sailors from 
the war-ships, now turned and charged their 
enemy. The impetus of the reenforcements 
carried them through the front ranks of the 
enemy and into the middle of the horde. 


392 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

Out in the jungle the natives spread out, and 
each line was quickly reenforced by squads of 
sailors. 

By four o^clock the attack had been re- 
pulsed, and the loyal natives and their allies 
were again withdrawn into their forts. All 
the Kataafa forts taken had been destroyed. 

Many heads were brought into the town, 
but these were ordered buried, and the natives, 
after some grumbling, finally complied. 

Phil and Sydney saw the heads collected by 
native chiefs appointed by Lieutenant Gant. 
One head in the gruesome pile gave him a 
start that he will always remember. It was 
that once proudly carried by Captain Bully 
Scott. The grayish whiskers and long matted 
locks of once black hair, but now turning 
gray. The usually sun-brown face had turned 
to an ashen pallor. Yet the likeness in death 
was as vivid as in life. 

Phil had the head taken up and wrapped 
in tapa cloth, and then carried it to Com- 
mander Tazewell. 

In front of the Tivoli Hotel they found 
him. 

Phil quickly explained his mission. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


393 

All retired inside the hotel while a box was 
ordered brought. 

Phil laid his ghastly relic on the floor and 
gingerly unwrapped it. 

All gazed upon it in silence. Commander 
Tazewell nodded, and Phil rewrapped the 
head carefully and placed it within the box. 

As they left the hotel O’Neil brought up 
the native who claimed to have taken the 
head. 

He says he didn’t kill him,” O’Neil said, 
** but I think probably he did, and is afraid 
to say so. He thinks we are displeased be- 
cause it was a white man.” 

‘‘Who did it? Ask him,” Phil ordered. 

“ He says a white man shot him. He saw 
it, and when the white man didn’t take the 
head, he did,” O’Neil replied, after a short 
conversation. 

The native so closely questioned by these 
white officers was becoming very much con- 
cerned. His eyes rolled from side to side 
seeking apparently somebody to take his part. 
Finally he leaped away and grabbing a man 
by the arm dragged him excitedly toward his 
inquisitors. 


394 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 
It was Stump. 

“ He kill ! He kill I the native cried out 
pointing his finger at the surprised white 
man. 


CHAPTER XXIII 

CONCLUSION 

Stump was not proud of his exploit. The 
lads saw that he trembled violently, and his 
face showed that his nerves were unstrung. 

“ It was my life or his,’^ he said sorrowfully. 
** Klinger had put me in charge of the store 
when he was arrested. During the fight on 
the Siumu road I was inside the store. Scott 
and several natives came from the bush and 
made me go with them. I was afraid to re- 
fuse. They led me away. Some time later 
our party was attacked by the Panu men. 
They did not attack Captain Scott, who held 
me by the arm and told me he’d blow my 
head off if I ran away. When the Kataafa 
men were running away Scott saw that we 
must run too. He beat and kicked me to 
make me go faster. I had been wounded in 
the left arm.” Here Stump showed his band- 
395 


396 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

aged arm. ** The wound hurt me and made 
me desperate. By this time we were sur- 
rounded by Panu men. I appealed to them 
for help, but they only laughed. One man, 
however, came to me and handed me a gun. 
Scott did not see what was done ; he was drag- 
ging me along toward the retreating Kataafa 
men. 

The next thing I knew,^^ Stump declared, 
a strong fit of trembling seizing him at the 
thought, I had stuck the muzzle of the gun 
close to his neck and pulled the trigger. He 
let go his hold of me and I ran. I heard the 
shouts and laughter of the natives behind 
me.’^ 

I reckon you won’t be hung for it,” 
O’Neil said consolingly. ‘‘ The killing of 
that scoundrel and pirate is probably the most 
useful thing for humanity you’ve ever done, 
Stump. Now I advise you to dig out on the 
next steamer and go home.” 

The defenders of Ukula at last were able to 
relax in a measure their vigilance. The Ka- j 
taafa warriors had been badly shattered, and j 
further attacks were not likely until they j 
could replenish their store of ammunition, j 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


397 

Tlie arrest of Klinger blocked one source of 
supply. Many thousands of rounds fitting 
the enemy’s rifles had been found by the 
allied sailors after a search of the Kapuan 
firm’s store. Kataafa had probably counted 
upon the capture of Ukula long enough to re- 
stock his expended ammunition. 

The midshipmen dined that evening with 
the Lees. Alice was eager to hear the 
gruesome details of the fighting and was 
greatly surprised when the lads declared that 
neither they nor O’Neil had been wounded. 

‘‘How could you help being?” she asked 
doubtingly. “ The air all afternoon was full 
of lead. We all hid behind furniture stacked 
up like a fort up-stairs. The house was hit, 
you know, lots of times.” 

“ Where’s Avao?” Phil asked; he had not 
seen her for several days. 

“ She was with her father in the trenches,” 
Alice replied, admiration in her eyes. “ She 
was here an hour ago and told us all about 
the fight.” 

“ Yes,” Miss Lee added smiling upon her 
enthusiastic sister, “ Alice was restrained 
from being on the scene only by force. Fa- 


398 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

ther and I had all we could do to keep her 
at home/^ 

After dinner Admiral Spotts and Com- 
mander Tazewell came in to confer with 
Mr. Lee. 

I have just found out/’ the admiral said, 
that the Herzovinian war-ship brought a re- 
fusal of annexation to Kataafa, and Count 
Rosen was informed that he must act in 
concert with other nations to prevent blood- 
shed. The count returns to-morrow in the 
mail steamer for Australia.” 

At daylight the next morning Lieutenant 
Gant led his entire native regiment over the 
road taken by the small force some days be- 
fore. The enemy was not encountered until 
they arrived at the Vaileli plantation. There 
a few shots were exchanged, but the Kataafa 
men were not in force and quickly scattered 
into the bush. The advance guard under 
Tuamana pursued them and returned after a 
half hour’s chase with several native heads, 
and besides carrying the body of a white man, 
who had been shot and killed fleeing with the 
Kataafa men. It was the missing marine 
orderly, Schultz. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


399 

The regiment returned over the same road 
recently traversed by the ill-fated party. The 
midshipmen and O'Neil sought for the Colt 
gun. Childers had dismounted the breach 
mechanism during that disastrous battle and 
brought it to the beach with him upon his re- 
treat. The gun had been taken away by the 
Kataafa warriors, although they were unable 
to use it. No signs of bodies or arms were 
found ; the victors had carried away all spoils 
of their vanquished enemy. 

When the expedition reached Ukula, the 
mail steamer from San Francisco was in port. 
The admiral, the war-ship captains and the 
three consuls had held a meeting to discuss 
the instructions received in the mail from 
their respective governments. 

A commission has been appointed to 
finally decide the fate of Kapua,^' Com- 
mander Tazewell told the lads as they joined 
him after turning over their native company 
to its native chief. We are sending word to 
Kataafa declaring a truce. He has retired 
with all his warriors to Saluafata. Klinger 
will carry the message and the mail steamer 
is to wait until he returns. Klinger has 


400 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

agreed to leave the islands. He and Count 
Rosen go together. 

The midshipmen were delighted. The war 
had ceased to be exciting. They felt that the 
useless killing of natives should stop. It had 
gone too far already. With Rosen, Klinger 
and Scott out of the way, a peaceful settle- 
ment would be possible. 

They told the captain of the death of his 
unfaithful orderly and of burying him at 
Vaileli. 

Commander Tazewell was thoughtful for 
several minutes. ** Poor fellow,” he said. “ I 
suppose he could not withstand the golden 
bribe offered him.” 

Kataafa sent in word that he agreed to sus- 
pend hostilities and would remain in Salua- 
fata, ten miles away from Ukula. 

The mail steamer departed, carrying with 
it the two men who had overreached them- 
selves in their patriotic endeavor to bring 
Kapua under the control of their own nation. 

The American and English sailors and the 
natives loyal to Panu meanwhile garrisoned 
and preserved order in Ukula and over the 
surrounding country. 


IN THE SOUTH SEAS 


401 

Stump was rewarded and sent home on a 
mail steamer, promising to look up his folks 
and turn over a new leaf. 

One day, several weeks after the last fight, 
another American war-ship came to anchor 
in the harbor of Ukula. On board were three 
great commissioners of the treaty powers. 

Two days later Phil and Sydney said good- 
bye to their friends in Ukula. The war-ships 
“ Sitka and “ Sacramento were under orders 
to return to the United States. 

As the two war-ships lifted their anchors, 
many canoes filled with natives hung in the 
quiet water about them. The sweet plaintive 
air of the Kapuan farewell song floated up to 
the ears of the midshipmen, really sorry to 
leave behind those for whom they had formed 
a strong bond of friendship. 

Some days later the midshipmen dined in 
the cabin with Commander Tazewell. 

What has Herzovinia gained in Kapua 
after all the years of stirring up uncertainty 
and strife?^' Sydney asked earnestly. 

Her policy has been to prove to the other 
nations that the islands are not worth the 
trouble to govern them,'' the commander an- 


402 A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN 

swered. *‘She has proved that the three nation 
control cannot be carried on with peace. She 
has lost her own sailors in fighting rebels and 
we have lost ours. 

She still persists in her desire for the 
islands. England and America are almost on 
the point of giving up the struggle. You will 
find/^ he added, that Herzovinia will be 
given most if not all of Kapua by the com- 
mission now working for a settlement there.’' 

The midshipmen remembered this accurate 
summing up when a month or so later the 
decision of the commission was given out to 
the world. 

Know what you want, and always keep 
wanting it and trying to get it ; it’s a cinch 
that you can’t miss it,” was O’Neil’s moral, 
derived from his Kapuan experiences. 


Other Stories in this Series are : 


A U. S. MIDSHIPMAN AFLOAT 
A U. S. MIDSHIPMAN IN CHINA 


A U. S. MIDSHIPMAN IN THE PHILIPPINES 
A U. S. MIDSHIPMAN IN JAPAN 









<r 


0 ♦ JL 


• \ 


v’' 'J C 0 ^ . 'O 

o xo : 

d' ^ fA^w Ai \V» 

« ww^riV/z^yA ^ i<> ^ 





5 

^ > 





ri-' y V . 

^ ft 

° ^ ° ■ >0'^ » 

' V- 

.* % ' 

^■‘.A '^o/'o 

c “ ^ "^o " “ 




*■«''• s.. , %. *0 „o’ ^O-’ ^/. »,,, 

V > sy -J. " Oa 'C' V’ S 

C- V « ® ^ ^ 



V 


* 

v' * ^ -A 

<* ■' 0 * X . A '^ ''' / 

. fj- ■? 






% 

^ o 
■^* o 

s -V 

*<»'>'' V I k 





» 

4 r/^ 

» 5* ^ ’^o *.'^ 


.V ^ ^ o 








A 

c“ '■*, , 0 - 


V 





oo 


» r 53 5=1 <■ -f^ ^ 

' ^ ^ 



^ '^'r \^ 



0 J» X 



V 




Oo 



O' 


o 0 ^ 





^ c. ^ t^'// 

^ o %'// ^^^. ■' \X^ 

^ '4 » 

S ^ *6 ^ A ^ 

-t I « "O 0 « X 5‘\ O ^ s ( 

c » *"= . '■^o ' * " ' 






. 0 ^ ^ “ 0 A 

■% / ^ “ 


V t/>. 




■^oo' 


«• 

" "I " 

lU^ kV 

s^ ,<!.‘^ 4. ', 

'' \^ 't-. *■ ■. N 0 ’ ^0 




\ rm^. • ■=%. A , ^^#/k, av * 

^ S <a cv\v^^/7^ ® ^t/> ,< V ^ 


<■’ »!; 





v> ' ' ' • ' 


■v 


kV </>. 


0 « V. 


^ O ^/ 

* ^ c ^ ^ ^ 4 > ^ 







r^ 



r s <* 

0‘ V^ 



0 5 > X 


O' 


■>• V '' 

» o o' 

> 4 ^ * 

(kV ^ ^ 

y. 'i' y 








%. s 




•xV^ . 

-4 A o ^ 


!>■ 

» 

y 

"•‘NO' 

O'^ ^ • " A '< 7 . V A 




"o o' 

^ A 'i 

" s^'"' '%=• ' 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 


□□□E0fi77SD^ 







